Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 Technical Manual · Safety information. Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though the auxiliary voltage has been disconnected. Non-observance

Relion® 650 series

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0Technical Manual

Document ID: 1MRK 511 275-UENIssued: March 2019

Revision: CProduct version: 1.0

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright

This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without writtenpermission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, norused for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and maybe used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSLToolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young([email protected]) and Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

This product includes software provided by the jQuery Foundation (http://jquery.org/) and bythe Flot project (http://www.flotcharts.org/).

Trademarks

ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. Switchsync is a trademark of theABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarksor registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty

Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

ABB AB

Substation Automation Products

SE-721 59 Västerås

Sweden

Telephone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00

Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation

HTTP://WWW.OPENSSL.ORG/

HTTP://JQUERY.ORG/

HTTP://WWW.FLOTCHARTS.ORG/

HTTP://WWW.ABB.COM/SUBSTATIONAUTOMATION

Disclaimer

The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or productdescription and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All personsresponsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves thateach intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety orother operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications wherea system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of theperson or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested toensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruledout. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer.Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible orliable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of theequipment.

Conformity

This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on theapproximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility(EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specifiedvoltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of testsconducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive,and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. Theproduct is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.

Safety information

Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though the auxiliaryvoltage has been disconnected.

Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial propertydamage.

Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical installation.

National and local electrical safety regulations must always be followed.

The frame of the IED has to be carefully earthed.

Always keep the factory supplied caps on unused optical communicationports, to prevent exposure to laser radiation.

Whenever changes are made in the IED, measures should be taken to avoidinadvertent closing or opening of circuit breaker.

The IED contains components which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.ESD precautions shall always be observed prior to touching components.

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................................................171.1 This manual........................................................................................................................................171.2 Intended audience............................................................................................................................171.3 Product documentation..................................................................................................................171.3.1 Product documentation set.......................................................................................................171.3.1.1 Related documents.................................................................................................................. 171.3.2 Document revision history.........................................................................................................181.4 Symbols and conventions...............................................................................................................181.4.1 Symbols......................................................................................................................................... 181.4.2 Document conventions...............................................................................................................18

Section 2 Available functions........................................................................................... 192.1 Control and monitoring functions................................................................................................192.2 Station communication..................................................................................................................202.3 Basic IED functions.......................................................................................................................... 21

Section 3 Analog inputs.................................................................................................... 233.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 233.2 Operation principle..........................................................................................................................233.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................................25

Section 4 Binary inputs and outputs...............................................................................294.1 Binary inputs..................................................................................................................................... 294.1.1 Debounce filter.............................................................................................................................294.1.2 Oscillation filter........................................................................................................................... 294.1.3 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 304.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary inputs.................................................................................. 304.1.3.2 Setting parameters for precision binary inputs.................................................................314.2 Binary outputs.................................................................................................................................. 344.2.1 Binary outputs..............................................................................................................................34

Section 5 Local HMI............................................................................................................355.1 Local HMI elements......................................................................................................................... 355.1.1 Display........................................................................................................................................... 355.1.2 LEDs................................................................................................................................................375.1.3 Keypad........................................................................................................................................... 385.2 Local HMI screen.............................................................................................................................. 395.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................395.2.2 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 395.3 Local HMI signals............................................................................................................................. 395.3.1 Identification................................................................................................................................395.3.2 Function block..............................................................................................................................39

Table of contents

Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0 1Technical Manual

5.3.3 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 405.4 Status LEDs.......................................................................................................................................405.5 Indication LEDs................................................................................................................................ 405.5.1 Identification................................................................................................................................405.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................................ 415.5.3 Function block.............................................................................................................................. 415.5.4 Signals............................................................................................................................................415.5.5 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 425.5.6 Operation principle..................................................................................................................... 425.5.6.1 Operating modes..................................................................................................................... 425.5.6.2 Acknowledgment/reset..........................................................................................................435.5.6.3 Operating sequence................................................................................................................ 435.6 Function keys....................................................................................................................................495.6.1 Identification................................................................................................................................495.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................................495.6.3 Function block..............................................................................................................................495.6.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 505.6.5 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 505.6.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................... 505.6.6.1 Operating sequence in Control mode.................................................................................. 515.6.6.2 Input function............................................................................................................................51

Section 6 Web HMI (WHMI)............................................................................................... 53

Section 7 Controlled Switching and Monitoring............................................................557.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 557.2 Operation principle..........................................................................................................................557.2.1 List of functionalities................................................................................................................. 597.2.2 Control...........................................................................................................................................607.2.2.1 Normal switching mode......................................................................................................... 607.2.2.2 CB timing test (learning) mode.............................................................................................827.2.3 Monitoring.................................................................................................................................... 837.2.3.1 Electrical monitoring............................................................................................................... 837.2.3.2 Mechanical monitoring........................................................................................................... 937.2.3.3 Combined monitoring...........................................................................................................1007.2.3.4 Resetting the calculated and acquired values..................................................................1037.2.4 Data Acquisition........................................................................................................................ 103

Section 8 Control.............................................................................................................. 1118.1 Selector mini switch VSGGIO........................................................................................................1118.1.1 Identification............................................................................................................................... 1118.1.2 Functionality................................................................................................................................1118.1.3 Function block.............................................................................................................................1118.1.4 Signals...........................................................................................................................................1118.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................ 1128.1.6 Operation principle ................................................................................................................... 1128.2 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO.................................................... 113

Table of contents

2 Switchsync™ PWC600 Version 1.0Technical Manual

8.2.1 Identification...............................................................................................................................1138.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 1138.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 1138.2.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 1138.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................1148.2.6 Operation principle ...................................................................................................................1148.3 Strategy switching SSCPOW........................................................................................................1148.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 1148.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 1148.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 1158.3.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 1168.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 1208.3.6 Operation principle....................................................................................................................1238.3.6.1 System application and switching pattern detection (Static application

switching strategy)................................................................................................................1248.3.6.2 Source selection and zero-crossing detection.................................................................1248.3.6.3 Case Control Strategy........................................................................................................... 129

Section 9 General calculation......................................................................................... 1339.1 Analog scaling ANSCAL................................................................................................................. 1339.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 1339.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 1339.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 1339.1.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................1349.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 1349.1.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 1359.1.6.1 Limit module........................................................................................................................... 1369.1.6.2 Chart function......................................................................................................................... 1369.1.6.3 Equation function...................................................................................................................1379.2 Double point input status time monitoring DPISTTIM...........................................................1389.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 1389.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 1389.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 1389.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................1389.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 1399.2.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 1399.3 Binary status to analog conversion BINSTSAN........................................................................ 1419.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 1419.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 1419.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 1429.3.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................1429.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 1439.3.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 1439.3.6.1 Calculating output values using 1 of n mode................................................................... 1449.3.6.2 Calculating output values using incremental mode........................................................1459.3.6.3 Calculating output values using summation mode........................................................ 145

Table of contents


Section 10 Logic................................................................................................................. 14710.1 Configurable logic blocks............................................................................................................. 14710.1.1 Standard configurable logic blocks....................................................................................... 14710.1.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................14710.1.1.2 OR function block................................................................................................................... 14710.1.1.3 Inverter function block INVERTER.......................................................................................14810.1.1.4 PULSETIMER function block ................................................................................................14910.1.1.5 Controllable gate function block GATE..............................................................................15010.1.1.6 Exclusive OR function block XOR.........................................................................................15110.1.1.7 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY............................................................................. 15110.1.1.8 Timer function block TIMERSET.......................................................................................... 15210.1.1.9 AND function block ............................................................................................................... 15310.1.1.10 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY.................................................................15410.1.1.11 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY....................................................... 15510.2 Fixed signals FXDSIGN.................................................................................................................. 15710.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 15710.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 15710.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 15710.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................15810.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 15810.2.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 15810.3 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I.......................................................................................15810.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 15810.3.2 FunctionalityBoolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I ......................................................... 15810.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................15910.3.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................15910.3.5 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 16010.3.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 16010.3.7 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 16010.4 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI.................... 16010.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................16010.4.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................16010.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 16110.4.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 16110.4.5 Settings .......................................................................................................................................16210.4.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 16210.4.7 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 16210.5 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A.................................................................................... 16210.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 16210.5.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 16210.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 16210.5.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................16310.5.5 Settings .......................................................................................................................................16310.5.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 16310.6 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB................... 164

Table of contents


10.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 16410.6.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................16410.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................................16410.6.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................16410.6.5 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 16510.6.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 165

Section 11 Monitoring....................................................................................................... 16711.1 Measurements................................................................................................................................ 16711.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 16711.1.2 Measurements CVMMXN......................................................................................................... 16811.1.2.1 Identification ..........................................................................................................................16811.1.2.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 16811.1.2.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 16911.1.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 17011.1.2.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 17311.1.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU.................................................................................... 17311.1.3.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 17311.1.3.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 17311.1.3.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 17411.1.3.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 17411.1.3.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 17511.1.4 Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU....................................................................... 17511.1.4.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 17511.1.4.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................17511.1.4.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................17611.1.4.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 17611.1.4.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 17711.1.5 Current sequence component measurement CMSQI......................................................... 17711.1.5.1 Identification .......................................................................................................................... 17711.1.5.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 17711.1.5.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................17811.1.5.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 17811.1.5.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................18011.1.6 Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI.............................................................................. 18011.1.6.1 Identification ..........................................................................................................................18011.1.6.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 18011.1.6.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 18011.1.6.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 18111.1.6.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 18211.1.7 Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU.................................................................. 18311.1.7.1 Identification ..........................................................................................................................18311.1.7.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................18311.1.7.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 18311.1.7.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................18411.1.7.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................184

Table of contents


11.1.8 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 18511.1.8.1 Measurement supervision.................................................................................................... 18511.1.8.2 Measurements CVMMXN...................................................................................................... 18911.1.8.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU................................................................................ 19311.1.8.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU............ 19411.1.8.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI.....................................19411.1.9 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 19411.2 Event Counter CNTGGIO...............................................................................................................19411.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 19411.2.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................19511.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................19511.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................19511.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 19511.2.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 19611.2.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 19611.2.7.1 Reporting................................................................................................................................. 19611.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 19611.3 Disturbance report.........................................................................................................................19711.3.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................................. 19711.3.2 Disturbance report DRPRDRE..................................................................................................19711.3.2.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 19711.3.2.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................19711.3.2.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 19811.3.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 19811.3.2.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................19811.3.3 Analog input signals AxRADR .................................................................................................20211.3.3.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 20211.3.3.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 20211.3.3.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 20211.3.3.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................20311.3.4 Analog input signals A4RADR ................................................................................................ 20611.3.4.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 20611.3.4.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 20611.3.4.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 20711.3.4.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................20711.3.5 Binary input signals BxRBDR................................................................................................... 21011.3.5.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................21011.3.5.2 Function block......................................................................................................................... 21111.3.5.3 Signals....................................................................................................................................... 21111.3.5.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 21211.3.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 21611.3.6.1 Disturbance information...................................................................................................... 21811.3.6.2 Indications .............................................................................................................................. 21811.3.6.3 Event recorder ........................................................................................................................21811.3.6.4 Event list ..................................................................................................................................21811.3.6.5 Trip value recorder ................................................................................................................ 218

Table of contents


11.3.6.6 Disturbance recorder ............................................................................................................21811.3.6.7 Time tagging........................................................................................................................... 21811.3.6.8 Recording times......................................................................................................................21811.3.6.9 Analog signals......................................................................................................................... 21911.3.6.10 Binary signals...........................................................................................................................22111.3.6.11 Trigger signals.........................................................................................................................22111.3.6.12 Post Retrigger......................................................................................................................... 22211.3.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 22211.4 Indications.......................................................................................................................................22311.4.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................................. 22311.4.2 Function block............................................................................................................................22311.4.3 Signals..........................................................................................................................................22311.4.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................ 22311.4.4 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 22311.4.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 22411.5 Event recorder ............................................................................................................................... 22411.5.1 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................22411.5.2 Function block............................................................................................................................22411.5.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 22411.5.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................22411.5.4 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 22511.5.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 22511.6 Event list.......................................................................................................................................... 22511.6.1 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................22511.6.2 Function block............................................................................................................................22511.6.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 22611.6.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................22611.6.4 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 22611.6.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 22611.7 Trip value recorder.........................................................................................................................22611.7.1 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................22611.7.2 Function block............................................................................................................................ 22711.7.3 Signals..........................................................................................................................................22711.7.3.1 Input signals............................................................................................................................ 22711.7.4 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 22711.7.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 22711.8 Disturbance recorder.................................................................................................................... 22711.8.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 22711.8.2 Function block............................................................................................................................22811.8.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 22811.8.4 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 22811.8.5 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 22811.8.5.1 Memory and storage............................................................................................................. 22911.8.6 Technical data............................................................................................................................23011.9 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO....................................................23011.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................230

Table of contents


11.9.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 23111.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 23111.9.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................23111.9.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................23111.9.6 Operation principle....................................................................................................................23111.10 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO...............................23111.10.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 23111.10.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................23211.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................................23211.10.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................23211.10.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 23311.10.6 MonitoredData...........................................................................................................................23311.10.7 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 23311.11 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO...................................................23411.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................23411.11.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................23411.11.3 Function block............................................................................................................................23411.11.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 23411.11.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 23511.11.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 23511.11.7 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 23511.12 Measured value expander block MVEXP....................................................................................23611.12.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................23611.12.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................23611.12.3 Function block............................................................................................................................23611.12.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 23611.12.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 23711.12.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 23711.13 Operation log.................................................................................................................................. 23711.13.1 Operation log function OPERLOG..........................................................................................23811.13.1.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................23811.13.1.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 23811.13.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 23811.13.1.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 23811.13.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................23911.13.1.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 24111.14 Clear operation log data CLROPLOG ........................................................................................24411.14.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................24411.14.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 24411.14.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 24411.14.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 24411.14.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 24511.15 Compensation of circuit breaker switching times CBCOMP................................................24511.15.1 Identification .............................................................................................................................24511.15.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................24511.15.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 246

Table of contents


11.15.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 24611.15.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................24911.15.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 25111.15.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 25111.15.7.1 Compensation mode.............................................................................................................25311.15.7.2 Sensor status..........................................................................................................................25411.16 Monitoring and compensation CB parameters MONCOMP................................................. 25411.16.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................25411.16.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................25511.16.3 Function block............................................................................................................................25611.16.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................25711.16.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................26011.16.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................26011.16.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 26311.16.7.1 Coordination logic................................................................................................................. 26411.16.7.2 Fingerprint average logic..................................................................................................... 26511.16.7.3 Deviation from average logic.............................................................................................. 26611.16.7.4 Drift average logic..................................................................................................................26711.16.7.5 Error evaluation logic............................................................................................................ 26811.17 Multilevel threshold alarm generation MONALM.................................................................... 26811.17.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................26811.17.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 26811.17.3 Function block............................................................................................................................27011.17.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 27111.17.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 27411.17.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 27811.17.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................28011.17.7.1 Alarm status logic...................................................................................................................28111.17.7.2 Hysteresis................................................................................................................................ 28311.17.7.3 Circuit breaker operation capability.................................................................................. 28411.18 ACBMSCBR...................................................................................................................................... 28611.18.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................28611.18.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................28711.18.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 28811.18.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 28911.18.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 29211.18.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................29411.19 CBLEARN..........................................................................................................................................29411.19.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................29411.19.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 29411.19.3 Function block............................................................................................................................29511.19.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 29611.19.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 29911.19.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................30011.19.6.1 Command handling logic..................................................................................................... 30311.19.6.2 Data acquisition logic........................................................................................................... 307

Table of contents


11.19.6.3 Core logic.................................................................................................................................307

Section 12 Station communication..................................................................................31112.1 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol ....................................................................................31112.1.1 Identification...............................................................................................................................31112.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 31112.1.3 Communication interfaces and protocols............................................................................31212.1.4 Settings........................................................................................................................................31212.1.5 Technical data.............................................................................................................................31212.2 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV....................................................................................... 31212.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 31212.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 31212.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 31312.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................31312.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 31412.2.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 31412.3 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV...............................31512.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 31512.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 31512.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 31512.3.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................31512.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................31512.3.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 31612.4 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV......................................31612.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 31612.4.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................31612.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 31712.4.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 31712.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................31712.4.6 Operation principle ...................................................................................................................31712.5 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV.................................31812.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 31812.5.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................31812.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................................31812.5.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................31812.5.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 31912.5.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 31912.6 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV................................. 31912.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 31912.6.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................31912.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................................32012.6.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 32012.6.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 32012.6.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 32012.7 IEC 61850-9-2(LE) merging unit.................................................................................................. 32112.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................ 321

Table of contents


12.7.2 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 32112.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 32112.7.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................32212.7.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 32212.7.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 32312.7.6.1 Signal identification ............................................................................................................. 32412.7.6.2 Time synchronization............................................................................................................ 32512.7.6.3 Alarm signals...........................................................................................................................32512.7.6.4 Accuracy of power measurement functions.....................................................................32612.7.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 32612.8 Redundant station bus communication................................................................................... 32612.8.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................32612.8.2 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................32612.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................................32612.8.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................32712.8.5 Setting parameters................................................................................................................... 32712.8.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 32712.9 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.................................................................................... 32812.9.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG...................................................................................................... 32812.9.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 32912.10 Generic security application component AGSAL.....................................................................33012.10.1 Generic security application AGSAL...................................................................................... 330

Section 13 Basic IED functions......................................................................................... 33113.1 Self supervision with internal event list ....................................................................................33113.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 33113.1.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG............................................................................................ 33113.1.2.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 33113.1.2.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................33113.1.2.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................33113.1.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 33213.1.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST..........................................................................................33213.1.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................33213.1.3.2 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 33213.1.4 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 33213.1.4.1 Internal signals....................................................................................................................... 33413.1.4.2 Run-time model...................................................................................................................... 33513.1.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 33613.2 Time system....................................................................................................................................33613.2.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................33613.2.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN................................................................................ 33613.2.2.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................33613.2.2.2 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 33713.2.3 Time synchronization via SNTP...............................................................................................33713.2.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................33713.2.3.2 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 337

Table of contents


13.2.4 SYNCHPPS:1................................................................................................................................ 33713.2.4.1 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 33713.2.5 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN..................................................................... 33813.2.5.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................33813.2.5.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................33813.2.6 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND...........................................................................33813.2.6.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................33813.2.6.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................33913.2.7 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE............................................................................................ 33913.2.7.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................33913.2.7.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................33913.2.8 Time synchronization via IRIG-B.............................................................................................34013.2.8.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 34013.2.8.2 Settings................................................................................................................................... 34013.2.9 Operation principle...................................................................................................................34013.2.9.1 General concepts................................................................................................................... 34013.2.9.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation......................................................................................... 34213.2.9.3 Synchronization options.......................................................................................................34213.2.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 34313.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE......................................................................................... 34413.3.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................34413.3.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 34413.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 34413.3.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 34413.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 34513.3.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 34513.4 Change lock function CHNGLCK ................................................................................................34613.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................34613.4.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 34613.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 34613.4.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 34613.4.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 34713.4.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 34713.5 IED identifiers TERMINALID......................................................................................................... 34713.5.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................34713.5.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 34813.5.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................34813.6 Product information .................................................................................................................... 34813.6.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................34813.6.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 34813.6.3 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 34913.7 Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................................................................34913.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................34913.7.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 34913.7.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................34913.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI........................................................................................ 349

Table of contents


13.8.1 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 34913.8.2 Identification..............................................................................................................................35013.8.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 35013.8.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 35013.8.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 35213.8.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 35313.9 Global base values GBASVAL....................................................................................................... 35513.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................35513.9.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................35513.9.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 35513.10 Authority check ATHCHCK...........................................................................................................35613.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................35613.10.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................35613.10.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 35613.10.4 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 35713.10.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED....................................................................................... 35713.11 Authority management AUTHMAN............................................................................................ 35813.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................35813.11.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................35813.11.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 35813.12 FTP access with password FTPACCS.........................................................................................35813.12.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................35813.12.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................35813.12.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 35913.13 Authority status ATHSTAT...........................................................................................................35913.13.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................35913.13.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................35913.13.3 Function block............................................................................................................................35913.13.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 36013.13.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................36013.13.6 Operation principle ..................................................................................................................36013.14 Denial of service.............................................................................................................................36013.14.1 Functionality ............................................................................................................................. 36013.14.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT........................................ 36013.14.2.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 36013.14.2.2 Function block.........................................................................................................................36113.14.2.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 36113.14.2.4 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 36113.14.2.5 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 36113.14.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1......................................... 36213.14.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................36213.14.3.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 36213.14.3.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 36213.14.3.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................36213.14.3.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................36213.14.4 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 363

Table of contents


13.15 Source selection SRCSELECT...................................................................................................... 36313.15.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................36313.15.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................36313.15.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 36413.15.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 36513.15.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 36713.15.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 36713.16 Web server.......................................................................................................................................36813.16.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................36813.16.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 36813.16.3 Operation principle...................................................................................................................369

Section 14 IED physical connections............................................................................... 37114.1 Protective earth connections.......................................................................................................37114.2 Inputs................................................................................................................................................37114.2.1 Measuring inputs....................................................................................................................... 37114.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input................................................................................................. 37214.2.3 Binary inputs...............................................................................................................................37314.3 Outputs............................................................................................................................................37414.3.1 Outputs for signalling...............................................................................................................37514.3.2 IRF................................................................................................................................................. 37514.4 Communication interfaces.......................................................................................................... 37614.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection............................................................................................37614.4.2 Station communication rear connection .............................................................................37614.4.3 Optical serial rear connection................................................................................................. 37714.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection................................................................................................ 37714.4.5 Process bus rear connection .................................................................................................. 37714.4.6 Communication interfaces and protocols........................................................................... 37814.4.7 Recommended industrial Ethernet switches ......................................................................37814.5 Connection diagrams....................................................................................................................378

Section 15 Technical data................................................................................................. 37915.1 Dimensions .....................................................................................................................................37915.2 Power supply...................................................................................................................................37915.3 Measuring inputs .......................................................................................................................... 37915.4 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................................38015.5 Signal outputs ................................................................................................................................38115.6 Power outputs ............................................................................................................................... 38115.7 Data communication interfaces ................................................................................................ 38215.8 Enclosure class .............................................................................................................................. 38315.9 Ingress protection.........................................................................................................................38415.10 Environmental conditions and tests......................................................................................... 38415.11 Electromagnetic compatibility tests.........................................................................................38515.12 Insulation tests.............................................................................................................................. 38615.13 Mechanical tests............................................................................................................................ 38715.14 Product safety ............................................................................................................................... 38715.15 EMC compliance ............................................................................................................................387

Table of contents


Section 16 Glossary........................................................................................................... 389

Table of contents


16

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manualGUID-44873E8A-0624-49D3-AA84-4DA61C513D66 v3

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists functionblocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sortedper function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.2 Intended audienceGUID-0EFD9002-000E-43C2-A39F-D790486D43C1 v5

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, whouse technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of control and protection systems,control and protection equipment, control and monitoring functions and the configuredfunctional logic in the IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basicknowledge in handling electronic equipment.

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation setGUID-DBA0DD95-55A1-42D3-B161-8F1C487BA9AB v6

The user manual provides basic instructions on how to install and use Switchsync PWC600.The manual provides instructions for engineering, mechanical and electrical installing,commissioning and operating, to cover the common use cases of the product.

The communication protocol manual describes a communication protocol supported by theIED. The manual concentrates on vendor-specific implementations.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes setting up a secure system, includingpassword procedures and levels of access in the system.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists functionblocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sortedper function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.3.1.1 Related documentsGUID-42926503-028A-4885-96EA-39CE83211411 v5

Documents related to Switchsync PWC600 Identity numberCommunication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 269-UEN

Cyber Security deployment guidelines 1MRK 511 298-UEN

User Manual 1MRK 511 346-UEN

Technical manual 1MRK 511 275-UEN

MICS 1MRK 511 297-WEN

Table continues on next page

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 1Introduction


Documents related to Switchsync PWC600 Identity numberPICS 1MRG 018 800

PIXIT 1MRG 010 6581)

TICS 1MRG 010 6591)

1) Switchsync PWC600 1.0 is based on ABB 650 series, version 1.3. So the PIXIT and TICS from ABB 650 series,version 1.3 are applicable for Switchsync PWC600 1.0 too.

1.3.2 Document revision historyGUID-2FDA8977-F1F8-424B-B6E4-A68B78BD49C6 v8

Document revision/date Product version History

A/2017-12-26 1.0 First release

B/2019-02-13 1.0 Maintenance

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 SymbolsD0E747T201305151541 v1

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to theconcept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard whichcould result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project orhow to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand thatunder certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result indegraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that theuser fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventionsD0E809T201305141505 v2

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossaryalso contains definitions of important terms.

• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push buttonicons.

For example, to navigate between the options, use and .• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.

For example, select Main menu/Settings.• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.

For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .• Parameter names are shown in italics.

For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.

Section 1 1MRK 511 275-UEN CIntroduction


Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Control and monitoring functionsGUID-84ACFB7B-5C10-4BE6-8DFF-AC77419F26AB v2

IEC 61850 orfunction name

Function description Switchsync

PWC600 (MX00)

Control

DPGGIO IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions 20

POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10

VSGGIO Selector mini switch 99

SSCPOW Controlled switching strategy function 1

General calculation

ANSCAL Curve shape description 54

DPISTTIM Double point input status time monitoring 6

BINSTSAN Binary status to analog conversion 6

Logic

OR Configurable logic blocks 270

INVERTER Configurable logic blocks 100

PULSETIMER Configurable logic blocks 99

GATE Configurable logic blocks 99

XOR Configurable logic blocks 99

LOOPDELAY Configurable logic blocks 99

TIMERSET Configurable logic blocks 99

AND Configurable logic blocks 100

SRMEMORY Configurable logic blocks 100

RSMEMORY Configurable logic blocks 99

FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1

B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 16

B16IFCVI Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with Logic Node representation 16

IB16A Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 16

IB16FCVB Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node representation 16

MINMAX Logical function to determine the minimum and maximum value 20

Monitoring

CVMMXN Power system measurement 1

CMMXU Current measurement 1

VMMXU Voltage measurement phase-phase 2

CMSQI Current sequence measurement 1

VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 2

VNMMXU Voltage measurement phase-earth 2

AISVBAS General service value presentation of analog inputs 1


1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 2Available functions




PWC600 (MX00)

CNGTGGIO Event counter 3

DRPRDRE,A1RADR-A4RADR,B1RBDR-B6RBDR

Disturbance report 1

SPGGIO Generic communication function for single point indication 20

SP16GGIO Generic communication function for single point indication 16 inputs 8

MVGGIO Generic communication function for measured values 40

MVEXP Measured value expander block 90

MONEVG Monitoring Event Component for Acknowledgable alarms feature 4

OPERLOG Operation Log Function 15

CBCOMP Compensation of circuit breaker switching times 1

MONCOMP Provider of monitored data for circuit breaker operation 3

MONALM Multilevel threshold alarm generation function 4

ACBMSCBR Advanced circuit breaker operation and monitoring 3

CBLEARN Circuit breaker contact operation time learning function 1

GFGDE General Function to map to GDE 40

CLROPLOG Clear operation log data 1

2.2 Station communicationGUID-E24223CC-E583-4990-A616-6D1C7EC94D08 v1



PWC600 (MX00)Station communication

IEC61850-8-1 IEC61850 communication protocol 1

GOOSEBINRCV Goose binary receive 10

ETHFRNT Ethernet configuration of front port 1

GATEWAY Ethernet configuration of gateway 1

ETHLAN1PRP Ethernet configuration of LAN1 port 1

PRPSTATUS System component for parallel redundancy protocol 1

CONFPROT IED Configuration protocol 1

ACTLOG Activity logging parameters 1

AGSAL Generic security application component 1

GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 45

GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32

GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measure and value 45

GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 45

Section 2 1MRK 511 275-UEN CAvailable functions


2.3 Basic IED functionsGUID-ABCC4E51-F6C2-4858-8C8D-49A7517BF12A v1



PWC600 (MX00)Basic IED functions

INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list 1

SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list 1

TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization 1

SNTP Time synchronization 1

DTSBEGIN Time synchronization 1

DTSEND Time synchronization 1

TIMEZONE Time synchronization 1

IRIG-B Time synchronization 1

SYNCHPPS Time synchronization 1

SETGRPS Setting group handling 1

ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups 1

TESTMODE Test Mode Functionality 1

CHNGLCK Change lock function 1

TERMINALID IED identifiers 1

PRODINF Product information 1

SYSTEMTIME System time 1

RUNTIME IED Runtime Comp 1

PRIMVAL Primary system values 1

SMAI Signal Matrix for analog inputs 1

GBASVAL Global base values for settings 6

ATHSTAT Authority status 1

ATHCHCK Authority check 1

ATHMAN Authority management 1

SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping 1

FTPACCS FTP access with password 1

DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port 1

DOSLAN1 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port 1

DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control 1

SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function 1

SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol 1

BCSCONF Basic communication system 1

WEBSERVER WebServer 1

SRCSELECT Source selection between transformer module and merging unit 5

MONMEMSUP Monitoring component memory supervision configuration component 1

SSTCONF SST Configuration holder for unmapped parameters 1

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 2Available functions


22

Section 3 Analog inputsD0E3188T201305151403 v1

3.1 IntroductionD0E3189T201305151403 v1

Analog input channels in the IED must be set properly in order to ensure correct controlledswitching operations. The directions of the input currents must be defined in order to reflectthe way the current transformers are installed/connected in the field (primary and secondaryconnections). Control and monitoring algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities.Consequently, the setting values are expressed in primary quantities as well and therefore it isimportant to set the transformation ratio of the connected current transformers and voltagetransformers properly.

The availability of CT and VT inputs, as well as setting parameters are fixed for SwitchsyncPWC600.

The IED has the ability to receive sampled voltage and current values from one or more (up to4) merging units (MUs) via IEC 61850-9-2(LE) process bus. Mixed mode is possible, forexample, conventional voltage transformers and electronic current sensors via MU, or viceversa.

A reference PhaseAngleRef must be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analogchannels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information willbe shown in relation to this analog input. By default, PhaseAngleRef is assigned to TRM -Channel 5, which is used for the first reference voltage input (Source voltage L1) in the pre-configuration. If source voltage from TRM is not available (not connected), SST would nextselect TRM - Channel1 (Load current), MU1-L1U (Source voltage 9-2 LE) and MU1-L1I (Loadcurrent 9-2 LE). During testing and commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can bechanged to facilitate testing and service values reading.

3.2 Operation principleD0E3192T201305151403 v1

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically starconnected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or away from theobject. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into theobject.

• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from theobject.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see Figure 1).

• Forward means the direction is into the object.• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 3Analog inputs


Protected ObjectLine, transformer, etc

ForwardReverse

Definition of directionfor directional functions

Measured quantity ispositive when flowing

towards the object

e.g. P, Q, I

ReverseForward

Definition of directionfor directional functions

e.g. P, Q, IMeasured quantity ispositive when flowing

towards the object

Set parameterCTStarPoint

Correct Setting is"ToObject"

Set parameterCTStarPoint

Correct Setting is"FromObject" en05000456.vsd

D0E9312T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 1: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObjectaccording to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protectedobject, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.

The settings of the IED are given in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs aretherefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currentsand voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios.

The CT and VT ratings are entered in SST, under the Reference signals milestone. Channelnames are assigned in the pre-configuration. Manual changes can be done under Main menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the LHMI or WHMI.

Section 3 1MRK 511 275-UEN CAnalog inputs


3.3 SettingsD0E3201T201305151403 v1

PID-3935-SETTINGS v1

Table 1: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PhaseAngleRef TRM - Channel 1TRM - Channel 2TRM - Channel 3TRM - Channel 4TRM - Channel 5TRM - Channel 6TRM - Channel 7TRM - Channel 8TRM - Channel 9TRM - Channel 10AIM - Channel 1AIM - Channel 2AIM - Channel 3AIM - Channel 4AIM - Channel 5AIM - Channel 6AIM - Channel 7AIM - Channel 8AIM - Channel 9AIM - Channel 10MU1 - L1IMU1 - L2IMU1 - L3IMU1 - L4IMU1 - L1UMU1 - L2UMU1 - L3UMU1 - L4UMU2 - L1IMU2 - L2IMU2 - L3IMU2 - L4IMU2 - L1UMU2 - L2UMU2 - L3UMU2 - L4UMU3 - L1IMU3 - L2IMU3 - L3IMU3 - L4IMU3 - L1UMU3 - L2UMU3 - L3UMU3 - L4UMU4 - L1IMU4 - L2IMU4 - L3IMU4 - L4IMU4 - L1UMU4 - L2UMU4 - L3UMU4 - L4U

- - TRM - Channel 1 Reference channel for phase anglepresentation



D0E3312T201305151403 v1

Table 2: TRM_4I_6U Non group settings (basic)


CTStarPoint1 FromObjectToObject

- - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current













VTsec5 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim5 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage











Table 3: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)


SVId 0 - 35 - 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier

SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group









Section 3 1MRK 511 275-UEN CAnalog inputs


Table 4: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)


SynchMode NoSynchInitOperation

- - Operation Synchronization mode

GUID-242C96FD-E2AA-4B57-AD66-79571D067FCB v1

MU2_4I_4U, MU3_4I_4U and MU4_4I_4U have the same settings as MU1_4I_4U.



28

Section 4 Binary inputs and outputs

4.1 Binary inputsGUID-96B8BB9C-7C3D-48D9-95FB-A2E5C6377C21 v1

A binary input mirrors the status (on/off) of an electrical DC signal and reports every statuschange with time stamp.

The BIO module provides 9 optically isolated binary inputs. Some of them share a commonnegative terminal; see the connection diagram for details.

The PIO module provides 12 optically isolated precision binary inputs with time stampaccuracy of 100 microseconds.

All binary inputs are equipped with digital filters, to eliminate bouncing and oscillations on theinput signals.

4.1.1 Debounce filterD0E3037T201305151403 v1

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond when abinary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A debounced status change isforwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime value and the debouncedinput value is high, or when the time counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low.The default setting of DebounceTime is 5 ms.

A binary input ON-event is assigned the time stamp of the first rising edge after which thecounter does not reach 0 again. The same applies when the signal goes down to 0 again.

Each binary input has a filter time parameter DebounceTimex, where x is the number of thebinary input of the module in question (for example DebounceTime1). For precision binaryinputs, the debounce time can be specified separately for On and Off status changes.

The debounce time should be set to the same value for all channels on theboard.

4.1.2 Oscillation filterD0E3034T201305151403 v1

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields fromfor example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from thesystem when a binary input starts oscillating.

Each debounced change of input status increments an oscillation counter. Periodically (everyOscillationTime), the oscillation counter is checked and reset. If the counter value before resetis above the set OscillationCount value the signal is declared as oscillating and not valid. If thevalue is below the set OscillationCount value, the signal is declared as valid. During counting ofthe oscillation time the status of the signal remains unchanged, leading to a fixed delay in thestatus update, even if the signal has attained normal status again.

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 4Binary inputs and outputs


Each binary input has an oscillation count parameter OscillationCountx and an oscillation timeparameter OscillationTimex, where x is the number of the binary input of the module inquestion. For precision binary inputs, the filter parameters can be specified separately for Onand Off status changes.

4.1.3 Settings

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary inputsD0E3036T201305151403 v1

Table 5: BIO_9BI Non group settings (basic)


BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 6: BIO_9BI Non group settings (advanced)


Threshold1 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of stationbattery voltage for input 1

DebounceTime1 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 1

OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1

OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1






















Section 4 1MRK 511 275-UEN CBinary inputs and outputs















GUID-4D21A653-A108-4D4A-9B15-24CEEC483C34 v1

For Switchsync PWC600, Battery voltage is usually entered in SST, under thePower System milestone.

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for precision binary inputsPID-3915-SETTINGS v1

Table 7: PIO_12PBI Non group settings (basic)


BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 - 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 8: PIO_12PBI Non group settings (advanced)


Threshold1 15 - 221 - 1 65 Threshold in percentage of stationbattery voltage for input 1

DebounceTimeOn1 0.0000 - 0.1270 - 0.0001 0.0050 Debounce time On for input 1

DebounceTimeOff1 0.0000 - 0.1270 - 0.0001 0.0050 Debounce time Off for input 1

OscillationCntOn1 0 - 255 - 1 0 OscillationCountOn for input 1

OscillationCntOff1 0 - 255 - 1 0 OscillationCountOff for input 1

OscillationTimeOn1 0.000 - 600.000 - 0.001 0.000 OscillationTimeOn for input 1

OscillationTimeOff1 0.000 - 600.000 - 0.001 0.000 OscillationTimeOff for input 1





OscillationCntOff 2 0 - 255 - 1 0 OscillationCountOff for input 2











OscillationCntOff 3 0 - 255 - 1 0 OscillationCountOff for input 3








































































4.2 Binary outputs

4.2.1 Binary outputsGUID-5E9466BB-B479-4CDF-9FAD-7D0C6E2D0789 v1

The PSM02 or PSM03 module provides 10 output relay contacts. 6 of these are rated formaking and carrying high currents, and three of them include circuits for trip coil supervision.The remaining 4 relay contacts are intended for signaling; one of them is internally hardwiredto indicate Internal Relay Failure (IRF).

The BIO module provides 9 output relay contacts. Out of these, 3 are rated for making andcarrying high currents. The remaining 6 contacts are intended for signaling; some of themshare a common terminal, see the connection diagram for details.

The PIO module provides 6 fast static outputs that are rated for making and carrying highcurrents. The switching instants of these precision binary outputs can be controlled at 100microseconds’ accuracy, which makes them ideal for controlled switching of circuit breakers.

Binary outputs rated for making and carrying high currents allow connection directly tobreaker tripping and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage failure of thebreaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the coil current, parallel reinforcement by anexternal relay is required.



Section 5 Local HMI

5.1 Local HMI elementsD0E752T201305141540 v2

D0E1319T201305141540 V1 EN-US

Figure 2: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Display (LCD)• Buttons• LED indicators• Communication port for PCM600 or WHMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.1.1 DisplayD0E778T201305141540 v2

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. Thecharacter size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view depends on thecharacter size and the view that is shown.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 5Local HMI


IEC13000063-1-en.vsd

D0E1348T201305141540 V1 EN-US

Figure 3: Display layout

1 Path

2 Content

3 Status

4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to beshown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three dots.

• The content area shows the menu content.• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the

object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on the

right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in thedisplay horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

The function key panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function keys.Each function key has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the functionkey control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.

Section 5 1MRK 511 275-UEN CLocal HMI


D0E1308T201305141540 V1 EN-US

Figure 4: Function key panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs. Three alarmLED pages are available.

D0E1200T201305141540 V1 EN-US

Figure 5: Alarm LED panel

The function key and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is shown bypressing one of the function keys or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC button clears thepanel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that depends on the label stringlength that the panel contains.

5.1.2 LEDsD0E757T201305141540 v2

The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and Trip. In SwitchsyncPWC600, only the Ready and Start LEDs are used.

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate threestates with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to each three-color LEDare divided into three pages and can be browsed with the Multipage button.

There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LEDgroup can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there arethree LED groups. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can beselected with the LHMI or PCM600.

The functions and operation modes of the LEDs on page 1 are defined in the default pre-configuration.



5.1.3 KeypadD0E709T201305141540 v2

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views ormenus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications or providehelp.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons (function keys) that can be configuredeither as menu shortcut or control buttons. The first function key is assigned in the defaultpre-configuration for resetting the alarm LEDs.

18

19

20

21

17

1

23

2

3

4

22 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 166 75

D0E1311T201305141540 V2 EN-US

Figure 6: LHMI keypad (IEC variant) with object control, navigation and command push-buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function key

6 Close

7 Open

8 Escape

9 Left

10 Down

11 Up

12 Right

13 User Log on

14 Enter

15 Remote/Local

16 Uplink LED

17 Ethernet communication port (RJ-45)

18 Multipage

19 Main menu

20 Clear

21 Help

22 Programmable alarm LEDs

23 Protection status LEDs



5.2 Local HMI screen

5.2.1 IdentificationD0E5719T201305151403 v1

Function description IEC 61850identification

IEC 60617identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2device number

Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.2.2 SettingsD0E5950T201305151403 v1

Table 9: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)


DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 Min 10 60 Local HMI display timeout

ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display

DefaultScreen 0 - 0 - 1 0 Default screen

EvListSrtOrder Latest on topOldest on top

- - Latest on top Sort order of event list

AutoIndicationDRP OffOn

- - Off Automatic indication of disturbancereport

SubstIndSLD NoYes

- - No Substitute indication on single linediagram

InterlockIndSLD NoYes

- - No Interlock indication on single linediagram

BypassCommands NoYes

- - No Enable bypass of commands

5.3 Local HMI signals





Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

5.3.2 Function blockD0E5676T201305151403 v1

LHMICTRLCLRLEDS HMI-ON

RED-SYELLOW-SYELLOW-FCLRPULSELEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsdD0E13174T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 7: LHMICTRL function block



5.3.3 SignalsD0E5952T201305151403 v1

Table 10: LHMICTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description

CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

D0E5953T201305151403 v1

Table 11: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description

HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active

RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing

CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI arecleared

LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

5.4 Status LEDsD0E5632T201305151403 v1

There are three status LEDs on the LHMI, above the LCD screen: Ready (green), Start (yellow),Trip (red).

The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The yellow andred LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance reportis triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used toindicate a operation command.

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function, DRPRDRE,by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR binary input functionblock in PCM600 and configuring the SetLEDn setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particularsignal.

5.5 Indication LEDs





Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -

Individual LEDs in LHMI alarmgroups

GRP1_LED1 -GRP1_LED15GRP2_LED1 -GRP2_LED15GRP3_LED1 -GRP3_LED15

- -



5.5.2 FunctionalityD0E5633T201305151403 v1

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx (x=1-15) control, andsupply information about the status of the indication LEDs. Input and output signals of thefunction blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selectedindividually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, whichdetermines the color and the operating mode.

By applying logical 1 to one of the inputs, a LED is activated in the corresponding color. In casemore than one input is active at the same time, red has highest priority, followed by yellow andgreen.

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different sequences;two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended tobe used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with resetfunctionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting modewith acknowledgment functionality.


LEDGENBLOCKRESET

NEWINDACK


Figure 8: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1^HM1L01R^HM1L01Y^HM1L01G

D0E13180T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 9: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is shown as an example; each of the 15 LEDs in groups 1 - 3 has asimilar function block.

5.5.4 SignalsD0E5681T201305151403 v1

Table 12: LEDGEN Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs

RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

D0E5679T201305151403 v1

Table 13: GRP1_LED1 Input signals


HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1



D0E5682T201305151403 v1

Table 14: LEDGEN Output signals


NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set

ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

5.5.5 SettingsD0E5683T201305151403 v1

Table 15: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn

- - Off Operation Off/On

tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length

tMax 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Maximum time for the definition of adisturbance

D0E5680T201305151403 v1

Table 16: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)


SequenceType Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S

- - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMIalarm group 1

LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarmgroup 1 is off

LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarmgroup 1 is red

LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarmgroup 1 is yellow

LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarmgroup 1 is green

5.5.6 Operation principle

5.5.6.1 Operating modesD0E5634T201305151403 v1

Collecting mode

LEDs that are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated (latched on) continuouslyuntil the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as asimplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode

In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs andactivates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-startingmode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a



new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of theactivated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

5.5.6.2 Acknowledgment/resetD0E5635T201305151403 v1

From local HMI

Active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manualreset have the same meaning and refer to a common signal for all the operating sequencesand LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. Acknowledgment/reset

is performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.

From function input

Active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from the RESET input to the LEDGENfunction. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an externalpush button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that evenif the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indicationsactive at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset

Automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined to operate in re-starting modewith latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When automatic reset of the LEDs has beenperformed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.

5.5.6.3 Operating sequenceD0E5638T201305151403 v1

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the inputsignal continuously. For the Latched type the LED is switched ON whenever the correspondinginput signal is activated, and remains ON until the active indications are reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately.For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable.Sequence 3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement are only working in collecting mode.Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 isworking according to Latched type and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequencenames have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash.

Upon activation of the input signal, LED is switched ON in the color corresponding to theactivated input and operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= RedIEC09000311.vsd

D0E13156T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 10: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)D0E5419T201305151403 v1

This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It doesnot react to acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in itsoperation.



Activatingsignal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsdD0E10923T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 11: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)D0E5641T201305151403 v1

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is asdescribed above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel isshown in Figure 12.

Activatingsignal GREEN

LED

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd

G R GG

Activatingsignal RED

D0E13159T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 12: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)D0E5422T201305151403 v1

This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead ofshowing steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-SD0E5423T201305151403 v1

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independentof the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication startsflashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present anymore. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

Activatingsignal

LED

Acknow.en01000231.vsd

D0E10926T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 13: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-SD0E5648T201305151403 v1

When acknowledgment is given, all indications that have appeared before the indication withhigher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priorityindication appeared before or after acknowledgment. Figure 14 shows the sequence when asignal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on ahigher priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the highpriority signal resets.




LED

AcknowIEC09000313_1_en.vsd


R R G

D0E13162T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 14: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involvedD0E5655T201305151403 v1

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment ofindications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which are notvisible according to Figure 15.


LED

Acknow.IEC09000314-1-en.vsd

Activatingsignal YELLOW

G Y R R Y


D0E13165T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 15: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1D0E5662T201305151403 v1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priorityindication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to Figure16.




LED

Acknow.IEC09000315-1-en.vsd

Activatingsignal YELLOW

G G R R Y


D0E13168T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 16: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)D0E5426T201305151403 v1

This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light areswapped.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-SD0E5427T201305151403 v1

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of theinput signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediatelyafter the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of activesignals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.


Activating signal

LED

Reset

D0E10932T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-SD0E5669T201305151403 v1

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lowerpriority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to Figure 18.




LED

Reset



R G

D0E13171T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 18: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-SD0E5430T201305151403 v1

In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), areautomatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set toSequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will not beaffected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual resethas been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set forsequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6D0E5431T201305151403 v1

Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

IEC01000239_2-en.vsd

Activatingsignal 2

LED 2

Manualreset

Activatingsignal 1

Automaticreset

LED 1

Disturbance

tRestart

D0E10935T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within samedisturbance

Figure 20 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.




Activating signal 2

LED 2

Manual reset

Activating signal 1

Automatic reset

LED 1

Disturbance

tRestart

Disturbance

tRestart

D0E10938T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 20: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 21 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one hasreset but before tRestart has elapsed.


Activating signal 2

LED 2

Manual reset

Activating signal 1

Automatic reset

LED 1

Disturbance

tRestart

D0E10941T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 21: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within samedisturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.




Activating signal 2

LED 2

Manual reset

Activating signal 1

Automatic reset

LED 1

Disturbance

tRestart

D0E10944T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 22: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

5.6 Function keys





HMI Function Keys Control module FNKEYMD1 -FNKEYMD5

- -


Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function keys, directly to the left of the LCD,that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has anindication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function key provides a fast way to navigate between defaultnodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary signal.

Pressing any function key will first display the list of corresponding labels on the LHMI screen.Only when this list is displayed, the associated functions can be executed, see User manual formore information.


FNKEYMD1^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1

D0E13183T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 23: FNKEYMD1 function block



Only the function block for the first button is shown. There is a similar block for every functionkey.

5.6.4 SignalsD0E5692T201305151403 v1

Table 17: FNKEYMD1 Input signals


LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

D0E5691T201305151403 v1

Table 18: FNKEYMD1 Output signals


FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.6.5 SettingsD0E5690T201305151403 v1

Table 19: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)


Mode OffTogglePulsed

- - Off Output operation mode

PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled byLCDFn1

LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state

LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state


Table 20: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)


Type OffMenu shortcutControl

- - Off Function key type

MenuShortcut - 0 Menu shortcut for function key

5.6.6 Operation principleD0E5696T201305151403 v1

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMIfunction keys. When used in operation mode (Type setting) ‘Control’, pressing a function keycontrols the output signal of the respective function block. These binary outputs can in turn beused to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputsetc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters thatgovern its behavior. These settings and parameters are normally defined in the pre-configuration and can be modified by using the PST.



5.6.6.1 Operating sequence in Control modeD0E5697T201305151403 v1

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always keeps the output at 0 (low). Pressing the function key does not affect theoutput value.

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode, pressing the function key for minimum 0.5 seconds (detection period, notchangeable) toggles the output between 0 (low) and 1 (high). Key presses shorter than thedetection period are ignored.

0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s

Key press

Output


IEC17000251 V1 EN-US

Figure 24: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode, pressing the function key for minimum 0.5 seconds (detection period, notchangeable) changes the output to 1 (high). After a time defined by PulseTime, the output willreturn to 0 (low) irrespective of the status of the function key.

If the function key is pressed again, a new pulse will be generated only if the output is 0 at theend of the detection period. See Figure 25.

0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 sKey press

OutputPulseTime PulseTime PulseTime



Figure 25: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

5.6.6.2 Input functionD0E5704T201305151403 v1

The binary input LEDCTL is active only when Type is set to ‘Control’. In this mode, the status(ON/OFF) of the yellow LED on the function key directly follows the status of LEDCTL. Thisfunctionality is independent of the Mode setting.



52

Section 6 Web HMI (WHMI)

GUID-1644E12F-1CD1-4CB2-91E2-291C4DC5E219 v1

The WHMI provides a remote user interface on a common Internet browser via Ethernet link.The functionality is explained in the User manual.

Basic operation of the WHMI is configured by the WEBSERVER function block.

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 6Web HMI (WHMI)


54

Section 7 Controlled Switching and Monitoring

7.1 IntroductionGUID-7B9D8386-0CCA-4AB9-92E3-DE05405A0405 v1

The function blocks described in this section are at the core of the controlled switchingfunctionality. These function blocks have strong interdependency and are combined in thissection to explain the concept and the functional interactions.

Controlled switching is not a category of function blocks in PCM600 and LHMI.

Controlled switching (also known as point-on-wave switching or synchronous switching) isdefined as controlling the circuit breaker in such a manner that the instant of current inception(on closing) or contact separation (on opening) occurs at an instant that is optimal for thecircuit breaker, the load, and/or power quality. This section explains the operation principlefrom the product user’s view point.

The involved function blocks are listed in Table 21.

Table 21: Core application functions in the IED

Function name Description Instances Function category inPCM600 LHMI/WHMI

SSCPOW Determines and releasescontrolled switchingcommands to the circuitbreaker

1 CONTROL

ACBMSCBR Monitors switchingoperation of the circuitbreaker

3 (one per phase) MONITORING

MONCOMP Consolidates monitoreddata for logging

3 (one per phase) MONITORING

A Switchsync PWC600 IED controls the instants at which the circuit breaker operates,monitors the switching operation and logs the monitored data. To achieve this, variousfunction blocks perform specific functionalities. SSCPOW sets the switching target andcontrols the CB accordingly, ACBMSCBR monitors the switching and determines thecorrection(s) required, and MONCOMP assists in logging the data.

7.2 Operation principleGUID-87EB84D8-3AC2-466B-A323-FBB5FB9477D6 v1

A random instant of switching the circuit breaker might impact the load, power system orcircuit breaker contacts because of high voltage or current transients or re-ignitions/re-strikesin the CB. Conversely, controlled switching of the circuit breaker, and hence, the power systemequipment can avoid harmful transients in the network and also increase the life time of thecircuit breaker and/or the switched load.

Figure 26 shows an ideal circuit breaker closing on a grounded single phase reactive load.Considering no energy stored on reactor time, at the instant when CB is operated, the sourcevoltage wave shown in the figure will appear across the circuit breaker contacts until thecircuit breaker closes electrically. If a command is given at any random instant trsc to the

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 7Controlled Switching and Monitoring


circuit breaker, the circuit breaker will close electrically at trsi and mechanically after the circuitbreaker operating time TCB. However, the random point on wave Drsi at which this switchinghappens might create undesirable transients. In such circumstances, it is recommended tooptimize the switching targets based on the design and connection configuration ofconnected load that need to be switched. A point-on-wave controller such as PWC600 analyzesthe reference voltage signal and identifies a favorable switching target (Dosi, at time tosi) forthe reactive load. Now the controller delays the command by TCTD = tosi – trsi (controller timedelay) and releases it to circuit breaker at tosc. This will result into making of the current atinstant tosi considering the circuit breaker closing time of TCB.

trsc trsi

TCB

TCTD

tosc tosi

TCB

Vol

tage

(V)

Time(t)

Drsi

Dosi

IEC17000164-1-en.vsdx


Figure 26: Principle of controlled switching (single phase)

Where

trsc = instant of random switching command

tosc = instant of optimal (point-on-wave controlled) switching command

trsi = instant of random switching instant

tosi = instant of optimal switching instant

tCB = circuit breaker operating time

tCTD = controller time delay

Drsi = point on wave for random switching

Dosi = optimal (target) point on wave

Section 7 1MRK 511 275-UEN CControlled Switching and Monitoring


After releasing the switching command, the controller monitors the switching operation toevaluate various electrical and mechanical parameters of CB, like electrical operating time,mechanical operating time etc. These monitored parameters are used for assessing thesuccess of the performed operation and the health of the circuit breaker, as well as foradapting the operating parameters for subsequent operations so as to achieve optimal point-on-wave performance. Key parameters will also be logged for future analysis.

Actual switching operations can be monitored by analyzing the precision mechanical statusfeedback contacts (precision auxiliary contacts) and/or the primary current or load voltagesignals. Figure 27 and Figure 28 shows the single line diagram with possible feedback options.

SwitchsyncPWC600

Busbar

Electricalfeedback

Outputcommand

Inputcommand

Circuitbreaker

BusVT

CT

Load

Reference signal

Mechanicalfeedback



Figure 27: Controlled switching with current feedback



Switchsync PWC600

Busbar

Electricalfeedback

Outputcommand

Inputcommand

Circuitbreaker

BusVT

Load

Reference signal

Mechanicalfeedback

LoadVT



Figure 28: Controlled switching with load voltage feedback

To achieve the desired control, monitoring and data logging, the four functions work in a closecoordination. Figure 29 shows the interconnection between these functions. Controlfunctionality is mainly handled by SSCPOW function. Monitoring and data acquisition ishandled by ACBMSCBR and MONCOMP functions respectively. Individual phases are handledwith separate instances. CBCOMP takes the external parameters like idle time, drive pressure,temperature and spring charge as input and provides the corresponding compensation value.



SSC

PO

W

32

1

AC

BM

SCB

R

32

1 MO

NC

OM

P

Com

man

din

puts

Ref

eren

ceS

igna

lS

ourc

evo

ltage

/C

urre

nt

Coo

rdin

atio

nfo

rDat

aaq

uisi

tion

Coo

rdin

atio

nfo

rC

ontro

land

Mon

itorin

gC

oord

inat

ion

for

Dat

alo

ggin

g

Corr

ectio

n&

Adap

tatio

nda

ta

Mon

itore

dda

ta

Com

man

dou

tput

s

Logg

ing

trigg

er

Dat

ato

belo

gged

CB

CO

MP

Idle

time

L1\L

2\L3

Con

trol

volta

ge

Driv

eP

ress

ure

L1\L

2\L3

Spr

ing

char

geL1

\L2\

L3

Tem

pera

ture

L1\L

2\L3

Ele

ctric

alFe

edba

ckC

urre

nt/L

oad

volta

ge

Com

pens

atio

nL1

\L2\

L3

Mec

hani

calF

eedb

ack

IEC1

7000

167-

1-en

.vsd

x


Figure 29: Main application functions in the device

7.2.1 List of functionalitiesGUID-34209D2E-606D-42F4-865B-D864971025FA v1

The main functionalities can be categorized into:



1. Control2. Monitoring3. Data acquisition

7.2.2 ControlGUID-F45F7CE6-622A-4A1C-8373-BC80CACB6992 v1

Control (Switching target evaluation and command handling) is mainly handled by SSCPOW. Itsupports two modes of operation:

• Normal switching mode• CB learning mode

7.2.2.1 Normal switching modeGUID-C902E2A8-DD28-4A1C-9C16-600962A925ED v1

The primary objective of Switchsync PWC600 is to energize or de-energize loads at optimalpoints on wave to minimize switching transients and prevent re-ignitions or re-strikes. Innormal switching mode, SSCPOW function achieves this primary objective.

Reference signalsGUID-A172C8FD-8642-4331-99DF-A4B2F85E1585 v2

To perform a controlled switching, the function requires a valid reference signal against whichthe optimal point on wave control has to be achieved. The reference signal for closingoperations is always source voltage. The reference for opening operations can be selected bysetting OpenRefI as either source voltage or load current, as shown in Table 22.

Table 22: Selection of reference signal for controlled opening operations

Interface Type Available infunction

Description

OpenRefl Setting SSCPOW Defines the reference signal for controlled opening operation.There are two options for the setting:

• Voltage (meaning source voltage)• Current (meaning load current)

If voltage is used as reference, the source voltage signals can be provided from single-phase orthree-phase VTs, which measure either phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage. The actualVT configuration shall be selected through the settings detailed in Table 23.



Table 23: Voltage reference selection


Description

UConn Type Setting SSCPOW Specifies the connection type of the source voltagetransformer. It can be selected as

• One phase star — Either of the phase to ground voltagesignal is available

• Three phase star — All the phase to ground voltagesignals are available

• One phase delta — Either of the phase to phase voltagesignal is available

• Three phase delta — All the phase to phase voltagesignals are available

UConnPh Setting SSCPOW When UConnType is selected as “One phase star” or “Onephase delta”, the actually connected phase or phase to phaseinformation has to be specified here from the options

• L1/L1-L2• L2/L2-L3• L3/L3-L1

Selection in this setting is irrelevant if Three phase star orThree phase delta are selected for UConnType setting.

When only one phase voltage is available, the setting UConnPh is used to specify the phaseinformation that is connected. L1/L1-L2 when selected means that L1 phase is connected ifselection in UConnType is One phase star, or L1-L2 voltage is connected if selection inUConnType is One phase delta. The same is applicable for L2/L2-L3 and L3/L3-L1.

When One phase star or One phase delta is being used, that voltage signal shallalways be connected to the L1 voltage input of the IED irrespective of thephase/phases being connected in real filed to the voltage transformer.

The input interfaces to connect voltage and current signals are described in Table 24.

Table 24: Voltage and current inputs


Description

VoltCHA Input SSCPOW RMS Voltage input for phase L1/L1-L2

VoltCHB Input SSCPOW RMS Voltage input for phase L2/L2-L3

VoltCHC Input SSCPOW RMS Voltage input for phase L3/L3-L1

CurrCHA Input SSCPOW Current channel input for phase L1

CurrCHB Input SSCPOW Current channel input for phase L2

CurrCHC Input SSCPOW Current channel input for phase L3

U3P Input SSCPOW Reference voltage instantaneous sample inputs for threephases

I3P Input SSCPOW Reference current instantaneous sample inputs for threephases

For any reference source, the frequency and point-on-wave targets are ascertained by trackingthe signal for a number of half cycles. This can be configured using the NumOfHalfCyclesetting as described in Table 25. Higher values of NumOfHalfCycle are used to provide morestable tracking. Conversely, if the system frequency is expected to change rapidly, a lower



value of NumOfHalfCycle can be provided. Moreover in case of rapid changes in frequency, thelow value of the parameter may lead to inaccurate targeting.

Point-on-wave switching is not suggested to be used on rapidly changingsystem conditions.

Half cyclic algorithm for Frequency tracking: At every execution cycle the functions (SSCPOW& ACBMSCBR) check the latest 20 samples @ 80 samples / cycle, for change in polarity (frompositive to negative or vice versa), between 2 consecutive samples. Using linear interpolation,the time stamp of exact zero crossing point will be calculated between the 2 samples ofopposite polarity, and stored in a list (Cyclic) of zero crossings. The same procedure will berepeated for 2*NumOfHalfCycle execution cycles, appending every zero crossing time stampto the list. Upon completion of checking the set number of half cycles the average of storedzero crossing time stamp data will give the approximated time between zero crossings as wellas actual system frequency, which will be further used for point-on-wave switching operations.

Table 25: Number of half cycles for tracking


Description

NumOfHalfCycle Setting SSCPOW Number of half cycles to be considered for half cycleaverage time period evaluation.

Any selected reference signal is validated to be healthy before being used. If the referencesignal cannot be used, reference missing condition is declared and switching will either bebypassed or blocked according to the ContingencyMode setting (see below). The healthinessof a reference signal is ascertained by comparing its RMS magnitude against a configurablethreshold called the dead value setting. If the RMS magnitude of the signal is lower than thethreshold, the signal cannot be used as a reference. Separate settings are available to checkthe healthiness of source voltage and load current as reference.

For a three-phase reference signal, the healthiness of each phase is checked individually. Onlyif all phases are found healthy then the entire reference signal is declared healthy.

Table 26: Dead value settings


Description

UDead Setting SSCPOW Threshold level for input source voltage signal in percent ofUBase. If the RMS voltage is less than this threshold level,source voltage cannot be used as reference.

IDead Setting SSCPOW Threshold level for input current signal in percent of IBase. Ifthe RMS current is less than this threshold level, load currentcannot be used as reference.

GlobalBaseSel Setting SSCPOW Selection of GBASVAL function instance from which UBaseand IBase are taken

SSCPOW expects that UBase and IBase in GBASVAL (selected by GlobalBaseSel)are set as rated phase-to-ground voltage and maximum steady-state currentinto the load, respectively. For controlled switching of transformers,transmission lines, or cables, the steady-state current shall be given as thenominal charging current with no further load connected.

The conditions for using the available reference signal and for declaring missing reference aresummarized in Table 27 below.



Table 27: Use and status of reference signals

CB status Load type OpenRefl Assessment ofsource voltagesignal

Assessment ofload currentsignal

Missingreference

Reference signalused

Open (any) (any) healthy (any) no source voltage

Open (any) (any) not healthy (any) yes none

Closed (any) Voltage healthy (any) no source voltage

Closed (any) Voltage not healthy (any) yes none

Closed (any) Current (any) healthy no load current

Closed (preset) Current healthy not healthy no source voltage

Closed (user-defined) Current healthy not healthy yes none

Closed (any) Current not healthy not healthy yes none

In case of missing reference, incoming switching commands will be bypassed through orblocked as per the ContingencyMode selection, see below. SSCPOW will declare loss ofreference at its output REFSIGLOS if enabled by the RefSignalLossAlm setting, see Table 28.

Table 28: Loss of reference signal


Description

REFSIGLOS Output SSCPOW Status of the reference signal: Logical 1 means referencesignal is missing.

RefSignalLossAlm Setting SSCPOW Enable or disable the REFSIGLOS alarm

Handling of switching commandsGUID-48CEA456-E1C7-4370-8A6F-A4F50572B9F9 v2

SSCPOW reacts to switching commands received on the inputs described in Table 29. Thereare two inputs for initiating a CB opening operation and two inputs for initiating a CB closingoperation. In case commands are received on both the inputs (for example, when theapplication is configured to receive commands from binary inputs and GOOSE interfaces inparallel), the command that has been received earlier will be executed and the other one isignored. When a switching command has been accepted, no further commands are accepteduntil the function completes the earlier command by logging the data.

Table 29: Command inputs


Description

CMDOPEN Input SSCPOW Initiating input 1 (from binary input) for CB openingoperation

CMDOPENG Input SSCPOW Initiating input 2 (from GOOSE command) for CB openingoperation

CMDCLOSE Input SSCPOW Initiating input 1 (from binary input) for CB closingoperation

CMDCLOSEG Input SSCPOW Initiating input 2 (from GOOSE command) for CB closingoperation

The specific reaction to a received command is controlled by different settings and inputs asshown in Table 30. Blocking means that no command will be forwarded to the CB. Bypassmeans that the CB will be operated without point-on-wave control.



Table 30: Operation Modes


Description

CntrldOperType Setting SSCPOW This setting is used to select the type of operations to beenabled (performed). It can be selected as

• Open• Close• Open and Close

If Open option is selected, closing operations are blocked.Similarly, if Close option is selected, opening operationsare blocked.

ByPassMode Setting SSCPOW The operation type(s) selected in this setting arebypassed if they are enabled in CntrldOperType setting.Options are,

• Disable (that is, no bypassing)• Open• Close• Open and Close

BLKOPOPR Input SSCPOW Opening operations (if enabled by CntrldOperTypesetting) will be blocked if this input is high.

BLKCLOPR Input SSCPOW Closing operations (if enabled by CntrldOperType setting)will be blocked if this input is high.

BLKSYNSW Input SSCPOW If this input is high, operations enabled by CntrldOperTypewill be blocked or bypassed as per the ContingencyModesetting.

ContingencyMode Setting SSCPOW During conditions not suitable for performing controlledswitching, as explained above, contingency mode isactivated and all permitted operations are either blockedor bypassed depending on the selection in this setting. Itcan be selected as

• Block opening and block closing• Bypass opening and bypass closing• Block opening and bypass closing• Bypass opening and block closing

Different combinations of switching are possible with the settings and inputs described inTable 30. Table 31 describes the overall effect of these on opening and closing operations.

Table 31: Switching combinations

CntrldOperType

ByPassMode BLKOPOPR

BLKCLOPR BLKSYNSW orcontingencycondition

ContingencyMode Openingoperation

Closingoperation

Open Disable /Close

0 (any) 0 (any) Controlled Blocked

Open Disable /Close

0 (any) 1 Block open (anyoption for close)

Blocked Blocked

Open Disable /Close

1 (any) (any) (any) Blocked Blocked

Open Disable /Close

0 (any) 1 Bypass open (anyoption for close)

Bypassed Blocked

Open Open / Open& Close

0 (any) 1 Block open (anyoption for close)

Blocked Blocked




CntrldOperType

ByPassMode BLKOPOPR

BLKCLOPR BLKSYNSW orcontingencycondition

ContingencyMode Openingoperation

Closingoperation


1 (any) (any) (any) Blocked Blocked


0 (any) 0 (any) Bypassed Blocked


0 (any) 1 Bypass open (anyoption for close)

Bypassed Blocked

Close Disable /Close

(any) 0 0 (any) Blocked Controlled


(any) 0 1 Block close (anyoption for open)

Blocked Blocked


(any) 1 (any) (any) Blocked Blocked


(any) 0 1 Bypass close (anyoption for open)

Blocked Bypassed

Close Open / Open& Close

(any) 0 1 Block close (anyoption for open)

Blocked Blocked


(any) 1 (any) (any) Blocked Blocked


(any) 0 0 (any) Blocked Bypassed


(any) 0 1 Bypass close (anyoption for open)

Blocked Bypassed

Open & Close Disable 0 0 0 (any) Controlled Controlled

Open & Close Disable 0 1 0 (any) Controlled Blocked

Open & Close Disable 1 0 0 (any) Blocked Controlled

Open & Close Close 0 1 0 (any) Controlled Blocked

Open & Close Close 0 0 0 (any) Controlled Bypassed

Open & Close Close 1 0 0 (any) Blocked Bypassed

Open & Close Open 1 0 0 (any) Blocked Controlled

Open & Close Open 0 0 0 (any) Bypassed Controlled

Open & Close Open 0 1 0 (any) Bypassed Blocked

Open & Close Open/Close 1 0 0 (any) Blocked Bypassed

Open & Close Open/Close 0 1 0 (any) Bypassed Blocked

Open & Close Open/Close 0 0 0 (any) Bypassed Bypassed

Open & Close (any) 1 1 0 (any) Blocked Blocked

Open & Close (any) (any) (any) 1 Block open&close Blocked Blocked

Open & Close (any) 0 0 1 Blockopen-Bypassclose

Blocked Bypassed

Open & Close (any) 0 0 1 Bypassopen-Blockclose

Bypassed Blocked

Open & Close (any) 0 0 1 Bypass open&close Bypassed Bypassed

If any command is blocked or bypassed as per Table 31, the outputs BLKOPL1 / BLKOPL2 /BLKOPL3, BLKCLL1 / BLKCLL2 / BLKCLL3, OPBYPASS or CLBYPASS, go high for the respectiveopen or close operation. If the condition for blocking or bypassing is persisting (example:BLOCK input is high or Bypass setting is enabled), these outputs remain high; conversely, if theconditions are temporary, for example, because of loss of reference signal etc., they are



generated for as long as the condition persists, minimum one execution cycle. The outputs aredefined in Table 32.

Table 32: Block and bypass information outputs


Description

BLKOPL1BLKOPL2BLKOPL3

Output SSCPOW Indication that open command has been blocked for phaseL1 / L2 / L3

BLKCLL1BLKCLL2BLKCLL3

Output SSCPOW Indication that close command has been blocked for phaseL1 / L2 / L3

OPBYPASS Output SSCPOW Indication that opening command has been bypassed(uncontrolled opening)

CLBYPASS Output SSCPOW Indication that closing command has been bypassed(uncontrolled closing)

UNCONTSWT Output SSCPOW Indication (alarm) for last switching operation (opening orclosing) performed uncontrolled

UncontSwitchAlm Setting SSCPOW Enable or disable the UNCONTSWT alarm

For controlled switching operations, SSCPOW will delay the release of the output commandsto the three phases of the circuit breaker to achieve a point on wave switching that isdesirable for the selected application. Minimum controller delay is one power cycle anddepends on operating time and switching angle.

All output commands are issued on three individual outputs for opening and three outputs forclosing operations. These output signals include time stamp information to switch on theIED’s static outputs on the PIO card at the specified times. The outputs are described in Table32.

The STRDPOW output indicates the controlled switching status, that is, a valid operationcommand (Close or Open) was received and the command is for controlled operation of thebreaker. STRDPOW will not be set if a bypass command was received. The output is set to highimmediately after detecting a valid controlled operation command, and reset when the lastcontrol output is switched off at the end of the operation.

Table 33: Output interfaces for commands


Description

OPCMDL1OPCMDL2OPCMDL3

Output SSCPOW Controlled opening command outputs for phase L1 / L2 / L3

CLCMDL1CLCMDL2CLCMDL3

Output SSCPOW Controlled closing command outputs for phase L1 / L2 / L3

STRDPOW Output SSCPOW Indication of point on wave controlling start

Application selectionGUID-83E87F12-A0DF-4E6B-8C3C-FB09BC0BB94A v1

SSCPOW function can be configured to automatically execute a preset switching strategybased on application information, or to switch at user defined targets. LoadType settingallows the user to do this selection between a choice of predefined loads or user definedsetting. If user defined load is selected, the user can manually specify exact target pointswhere the three phases are to be switched, separately for opening and closing. The settingsare described in Table 34.



Table 34: Application selection


Description

LoadType Setting SSCPOW This setting specifies the connected load. Refer to Table 35for further selection of the load type for reactors andtransformers. Available options are,

• Capacitor• Reactor• Coupled reactor• Power transformer• Coupled transformer• Transmission line / power cable• User defined

Grounding Setting SSCPOW For all load types other than ”User defined”, this settingspecifies the effective grounding of system and load.Available options are,

• Star grounded• Ungrounded / Delta• Impedance grounded (only for reactor and transformer

load types)

See Table 36 for details.

ImpRatio Setting SSCPOW If LoadType is selected as ’Reactor’, ’Powertransformer’, ’Coupled reactor’ or ’Coupled Transformer’and Grounding is specified as ’Impedance grounded’, thenImpRatio specifies the ratio of grounding impedance tophase impedance.

Table 35: Load selection for reactors and transformers

Actual Load Core configuration Secondary/Tertiarywinding

LoadType in SSCPOW

Reactor Individual bank n/a Reactor

Reactor Common core 4/5-limb n/a Reactor

Reactor Common core 3-limb n/a Coupled Reactor

Tansformer Individual bank No delta winding Power transformer

Tansformer Common core 4/5-limb No delta winding Power transformer

Tansformer Common core 3-limb No delta winding Coupled transformer

Tansformer Individual bank At least one winding isdelta

Coupled transformer

Tansformer Common core 4/5-limb At least one winding isdelta

Coupled transformer

Tansformer Common core 3-limb At least one winding isdelta

Coupled transformer

Table 36: Grounding options

Source Grounding Load connection (of primary windingfor transformers)

Grounding in SSCPOW

Ungrounded (any) Ungrounded/Delta

Solidly grounded Star grounded (Yn) Star grounded

Solidly grounded Ungrounded star (Y) / Delta (Δ) Ungrounded star / Delta

Solidly grounded Star (Y) connected, groundedthrough neutral reactor

Impedance grounded



For the purpose of controlled switching, “primary winding” of a transformerrefers to the winding that is switched under point-on-wave control.

For all predefined load types (LoadType other than ‘User defined’), the function automaticallycalculates the optimal point-on-wave switching targets (which are described in the Usermanual), tracking the actual system voltage and frequency. However, if ‘User defined’ load isused, the switching is performed at user defined phase angles specified by the settingsdescribed in Table 37.

Table 37: User defined controlled switching targets


Description

PhFixSelectOpen Setting SSCPOW Selection of lead phase for controlled openingoperations as random or fixed (L1*)

LeadTargetOpen Setting SSCPOW Opening (that is, contact separation) target inelectrical degrees relative to a positive-goingzero crossing of the selected reference signal,for the lead phase

FirstFollowOpen Setting SSCPOW Opening (that is, contact separation) target inelectrical degrees relative to LeadTargetOpen,for the first following phase

SecondFollowOpen Setting SSCPOW Opening (that is, contact separation) target inelectrical degrees relative to LeadTargetOpen,for the second following phase

PhFixSelectClose Setting SSCPOW Selection of lead phase for controlled closingoperations as random or fixed (L1*)

LeadTargetClose Setting SSCPOW Current making target in electrical degreesrelative to a positive-going reference voltagezero crossing, for the lead phase

FirstFollowClose Setting SSCPOW Current making target in electrical degreesrelative to LeadTargetClose, for the firstfollowing phase

SecondFollowClose Setting SSCPOW Current making target in electrical degreesrelative to LeadTargetClose, for the secondfollowing phase

* In PWC600 1.0.1, fixed lead phase selection L1 is erroneously shown as L2 in PST.

As defined by the controlled switching strategy, SSCPOW staggers the switching of the threepoles to achieve optimal energization or de-energization of the load. The pole which iscontrolled to operate first is called the lead phase. Controlled switching targets for the leadphase are defined by LeadTargetOpen and LeadTargetClose settings. The first following andsecond following phases are defined as the phases which lag the lead phase by 120° and 240°,respectively. Refer to Table 38 for descriptions.

Table 38: Definition of lead phase and following phase

System phase rotation Lead phase First following phase Second following phase

Normal (L1-L2-L3) L1 L2 L3



Reverse (L3-L2-L1) L1 L3 L2





Figure 30 illustrates optimal energizing targets for a star grounded reactor bank, viz. thepositive voltage peaks, with L1 lead phase in a system with normal phase rotation. Table 39describes the settings to be applied for a user defined switching strategy.

90°

90°

90°

120°

240°

Volta

ge(V

)

Time (t)

Lead Phase

First followingphase

Secondfollowing phase

Time (t)

Time (t)



Figure 30: Optimal energization targets for star grounded reactor bank

Table 39: Example of user-defined controlled closing strategy

Setting Value Description

LeadTargetClose 90° L1 phase switches at 90° after itsown phase zero crossing

FirstFollowClose 120° L2 phase switches 120° after L1phase has switched

SecondFollowClose 240° L3 phase switches 240° after L1phase has switched

Target selection for closing operationsGUID-DFA06B61-ECF2-4796-A802-FD90105F6D3E v2

For controlled closing operations, SSCPOW chooses the ideal switching strategy depending onload and system configuration defined in section Application selection.

The selection of the target phase angles for energization (also referred as making targets)depends on the basic capacitive or reactive nature of the load. Capacitive loads need to beenergized at voltage zero across the circuit breaker. This switching strategy ensures lowinrush currents and low transient voltages. Refer to Equation 1 for relation of voltage acrossthe capacitive load and current through it. If the switching happens at zero voltage, theinstantaneous current drawn will be marginal.



i

C)sin( tVv m w=

i

L)sin( tVv m w=



Figure 31: Capacitive and inductive loads

dvi Cdt

= ´

IECEQUATION17033 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)

Inductive loads, without residual magnetic flux, are energized at a reference voltage maximum(peak) . This switching strategy ensures symmetric current and thus prevents inrush current bypreventing core saturation, refer to Equation 2 for the relation of voltage across the inductiveload and current through it. If the switching occurs at voltage peak, the current will besymmetric.

1 .i v dtL

= ´ òIECEQUATION17034 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)

Table 40 to Table 45 describe the preset target angles used for switching of predefined loads.All the switching angles have been described with L1 lead phase, assuming PhFixSelectClosewas set to Fixed L1. If PhFixSelectClose was set to Random, lead phase will be selecteddynamically (Lead phase will be the phase which can be switched first with the given switchingstrategy) and the following phases are rotated accordingly.

Table 40: Capacitor making angles (preset strategies) assuming L1 lead phase

Capacitor bank configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target

Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive-going zero crossingof L1 phase-to-groundvoltage

120° after lead phase 240° after lead phase

Y (wye/star, ungrounded) orΔ (delta)

Positive-going zero crossing of L1-L2 (phase-phase) voltage 270° after lead phase

Table 41: Reactor making angles (preset strategies) assuming L1 lead phase

Reactor configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target

Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive peak of L1 phase-to-ground voltage



Positive peak of of L1-L2 (phase-phase) voltage 90° after lead phase

Y (wye/star) with neutralgrounding reactor

Positive peak of L1 phase-to-ground voltage

ΦC after lead phase 240° after lead phase



Table 42: Coupled reactor making angles (preset strategies) assuming L1 lead phase

Coupled reactor configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target






Positive peak of L1 phase-to-ground voltage

ΦC after lead phase 240° after lead phase

Table 43: Power transformer making targets (preset strategies) assuming L1 lead phase

Transformer configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target




Positive peak of L1-L2 (phase-phase) voltage 90° after lead phase

Table 44: Coupled transformer making targets (preset strategies)

Coupled transformerconfiguration

L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target





Table 45: Transmission line / cable making targets (preset strategies)

Line/cable configuration L1 (lead phase) making target L2 making target L3 making target

Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive-going zero crossingof L1 phase-to-groundvoltage


ΦC is the optimized closing angle for the second phase to close when neutral groundingreactors are used. The optimal switching angle requires to be shifted to counter the neutralvoltage shift. ΦC is calculated as

180 390 .arctan 211

C kk

fp

= ++

+

o

o


Where k is the ratio of neutral grounding impedance to phase impedance,

neutral

phase

LkL

=


Similarly, in case of 3-limb cores for transformers or reactors or a transformer with secondary/tertiary delta connection, charging of one phase induces voltage in other phases. Makingtargets are appropriately modified to optimize the switching angles.



Whenever a Power transformer is being energized from star grounded side andat least one of its secondary or tertiary winding is delta connected, theapplication should be selected as Coupled transformer.

The above mentioned targets are ideal point-on-wave angles at which load energization(current inception) should occur. However, for a practical circuit breaker, the primary contactsclose with a certain velocity and thereby reducing the gap between the contacts with time. Atany point of time, if the gap’s dielectric strength is less than the instantaneous voltageappearing across the contacts, the dielectric breaks down and a pre-strike happens, therebyenergizing the load through an electrical arc. For practical purposes, the rate of decay ofdielectric strength (RDDS) is assumed constant, see Figure 32.

RDDS

TCB

T1

MAX. DIELECTRICSTRENGTH

Mechanical contacttouch

Electrical switchinginstant

Vol

tage

(V)

Time(t)



Figure 32: Closing of non-ideal circuit breaker

From Figure 32, it is evident that current inception happens before the mechanical contacttouch. Hence, the optimal switching command release as described in section Operationprinciple is further delayed by time T1, to occur at tasc, as illustrated in Figure 33.



TCBTCTD

trsc tosc tosi

Dosi

T1

tasc

T1 TCB

RDDS

TCTD


Electrical makinginstant

Vol

tage

(V)

Time(t)

System voltage



Figure 33: Actual command release compensating the RDDS of circuit breaker

Further factors that affect the actual command release are the uncertainty (statistical scatter)in mechanical operating times, RDDS of the circuit breaker, degradation in dielectric strengthand operating characteristics. Modern circuit breakers have been designed for stableoperating times. However, even slight deviations from the optimal energization instant canresult in higher electrical stress, depending on whether the actual switching time is shortenedor elongated. Figure 34 shows this for a capacitive application, where the effect of scatter ismore predominant.

Dosi

D’osi

D’’osi

V’’V’V

Time(t)

Vol

tage

(V) Nominal RDDS



Figure 34: Mechanical and dielectric scatter of circuit breaker influencing actual currentmaking instant

Where,

RDDS = RDDS of circuit breaker if there is no scatter

RDDS’ = RDDS of circuit breaker when scatter delays the operation

RDDS” = RDDS of circuit breaker when scatter advances the operation

V = Energization voltage with no scatter



V’ = Energization voltage when scatter delays the operation

V”= Energization voltage when scatter advances the operation

Dosi = Ideal point on wave of current inception (no scatter)

D’osi = Point-on-wave of current inception when scatter delays the operation

D”osi = Point-on-wave of current inception when scatter advances the operation

From Figure 34, it is evident that, given symmetrical scatter, V” is significantly higher than V’.Therefore, the target instant of mechanical contact touch is delayed such that currentinception would ideally occur at Dosi, to minimize the highest pre-strike voltage on either side.This is illustrated in Figure 35. For capacitive loads, the actual switching point is delayed fromoptimal switching point.

Dosi

D’osi

D’’osi

V

Time(t)

Volta

ge(V

) Nominal RDDS



Figure 35: Shifting of target angle to compensate the influence of mechanical scatter

Similarly, for inductive loads, the actual switching point is advanced from optimal switchingpoint so that current inception occurs as close to voltage peak as possible.

TCBTCTD

trsc tosc tosi

Dosi

T1

tasc

T1

TCB

RDDS

TCTD


Electrical switchinginstant

Vol

tage

(V)

Time(t)

System voltage

T6

T6

Dasi

tasi



Figure 36: Shifting of mechanical target switching instant to compensate the influenceof mechanical scatter



The statistical scatter of the mechanical operating times and of the RDDS is consideredspecific for each circuit breaker type. Furthermore, certain environmental and operatingconditions like temperature of the drive, control voltage of the operating mechanism, idle timeof the circuit breaker, drive pressure etc. may impact the operating times. For every circuitbreaker type, tests can be conducted to know the dependence of operating times on each ofthese parameters, as described in IEC 62271-302. If this information is made available,compensation of scatter and other influences as defined above can be directly applied. Theamount of correction to be provided is calculated by the ACBMSCBR and CBCOMP functionblocks. ACBMSCBR calculates the correction related to scatter in RDDS, T6. In addition to thestatic correction, ACBMSCBR also evaluates the dynamic correction required because ofchanges in system voltage and frequency. When information is made available andcompensation is enabled, CBCOMP function evaluates the correction value T2 that isattributable to environmental parameters like control voltage, drive pressure, drivetemperature etc. Up to two additional compensation characteristics can also be configured bythe user based on the application requirements. SSCPOW takes the information from thesetwo functions and calculates the overall correction to be applied.

Apart from the factors described above, the circuit breaker making time can vary with time, forexample, because of ageing. ACBMSCBR monitors every operation to identify the amount ofdeviation of the actual making instant from the target making instant. A fraction β of thedeviation is compensated for the next operations to ensure that the target converges to theoptimum target instant. This functionality enables adaptive correction independently for bothelectrical and mechanical errors. Equation 5 gives the calculation of adaptive correction.

3 ( ) ( )elec mechT electrical error mechanical errorb b= × + ×


Where,

βelec = Factor for electrical error compensation

βmech = Factor for mechanical error compensation

electrical error = Difference between target making instant and actual current making instant

mechanical error = Difference between target and actual (estimated) instants of primarycontact touch

For calculating the predicted operating time for the next operation, the new correction value isadded to the predicted operating time of the last operation.

New predicted operating,

3new oldT T T= +


Applying only electrical or mechanical adaptation will still influence both theelectrical and mechanical targets because of the influence of prestrikecharacteristics of the circuit breaker. Setting βelec or βmech as zero ensures thatthe corresponding electrical error or mechanical error are not being used foradaptive correction.

The primary contact’s closing instant is obtained from the timing information of NO (52a) andNC (52b) auxiliary contacts, when available, based on the contact displacement settings. It is



sufficient to have only one auxiliary contact information to estimate the primary contacttiming. However, the information is more reliable and accurate if NO (52a) contact informationis available and further more accurate if both the auxiliary contact information is madeavailable. Calculation of the mechanical operating time is described in Section Mechanicalmonitoring.

The overall target release instant for closing is thus calculated as

1 2 3 6asc rsc CTDt t T T T T T= + + + + +IECEQUATION17039 V1 EN-US (Equation 7)

Where,

tasc = Target command release time (output to circuit breaker)

trsc = Random command received time

T1 = Prestrike time

T2 = Compensation for known influences of circuit breaker operating time.

T3 = Adaptive correction as a fraction of previous closing target error

T6 = Scatter angle correction

TCTD = Controller time delay for energizing the selected load type by an ideal breaker.

CBCOMP calculates the compensation T2 of known influences on circuit breaker operatingtime and provides the information to SSCPOW function. ACBMSCBR function evaluates thescatter correction T6, adaptive correction T3, prestrike time T1, and provides the information toSSCPOW function.

The settings and signals used to define the closing parameters are given in Table 46.

Table 46: Correction and compensation interfaces for close operations


Description

INPRICLL1INPRICLL2INPRICLL3INPRICLLX

Input SSCPOWSSCPOWSSCPOWACBMSCBR

TCB – circuit breaker default mechanical closing time,that is, from command release to primary contact touch,for phase L1 / L2 / L3

INNOCLLX Input ACBMSCBR Default time from command release to closing of NO(52a) auxiliary contact for close operation

INNCCLLX Input ACBMSCBR Default time from command release to opening of NC(52b) auxiliary contact for close operation

RDDSLX Setting ACBMSCBR Nominal Rate of Decay of Dielectric Strength of circuitbreaker, in kV/ms

ScatterMechClLX Setting ACBMSCBR Scatter of mechanical closing time (maximum scatter oneither side of the nominal closing time of circuit breaker)in ms

ScatRDDSPercLX Setting ACBMSCBR Scatter of RDDS in percent of nominal value

BetaAdjustElec Setting ACBMSCBR Fraction for adaptive correction of electrical target error

BetaAdjustMech Setting ACBMSCBR Fraction for adaptive correction of mechanical targeterror





Description

DELTAT1L1DELTAT1L2DELTAT1L3

InputOutput

SSCPOWACBMSCBR

T1 – Prestrike time correction


InputOutput

SSCPOWCBCOMP

T2 – compensation for known influences of circuitbreaker operating time information


InputOutput

SSCPOWACBMSCBR

T3 – Adaptive correction information


InputOutput

SSCPOWACBMSCBR

T6 – Scatter correction information

CMPLOSINLOSCOPSG

InputOutput

SSCPOWCBCOMP

Indication for loss of compensation signal

COPSIGLOS Output SSCPOW Indication for loss of compensation signal

T2ALSTSALMSTS

InputOutput

ACBMSCBRCBCOMP

Alarm from sensors or measured signals used forcompensation; see 11.15.7.2 Sensor status. Can be usedfor blocking the compensation function to preventwrong targeting.

Target selection for opening operationsGUID-FEDBC10F-1961-49DA-A15B-BFFA4D97A180 v2

For controlled opening operations, SSCPOW chooses the ideal switching strategy dependingon load and system configuration defined in section Application selection.

The selection of the target phase angles for de-energization (also referred as interruptingtargets) depends on the basic capacitive or reactive nature of the load. Capacitive loads needto be de-energized such that by the time the current is interrupted at its natural zero, thecircuit breaker contacts have separated sufficiently far for the dielectric strength of thecontact gap to exceed the voltage appearing across it. This switching strategy ensures thatthe capacitive load doesn’t restrike.

Figure 37 shows the CB primary contacts opening at time topen. The current continues to flowtill its natural current zero (tint). Restrike can be avoided if the circuit breaker regains itsdielectric strength after current interruption such that it is always greater than the voltageappearing across it.

For de-energizing capacitive loads, the arcing time (Tarc = tint – topen) is considered such that itallows the circuit breaker to gain as much dielectric strength as possible by the time ofinterruption, subject to the condition that mechanical scatter doesn’t shift topen beyond thepreceding current zero crossing.



Vol

tage

(V)

Time(t)

Cur

rent

(A)

RRDS locusGap strength

Source voltage

Current

Voltage acrosscircuit breaker

topen tint



Figure 37: Capacitive load de-energization

Inductive loads, upon interruption of current, create high-frequency Transient RecoveryVoltages (TRV). Similar to the case of de-energization of capacitive loads, the circuit breakershould have gained sufficient dielectric strength to avoid re-ignitions after currentinterruption.



Figure 38: Reactor de-energization

From inductive switching type tests, the re-ignition free window of a circuit breaker can bededuced for the specific circuit. Re-ignition free window is defined as the range of arcingtimes wherein the circuit breaker doesn’t re-ignite. Providing high arcing times can increasethe current chopping thus creating higher TRV. Providing low arcing times can help in reducingthe TRV but the circuit breaker might not gain sufficient dielectric strength. By default,PWC600 applies a compromise strategy of opening the primary contacts in the middle of there-ignition free window defined for the specific circuit breaker model.

In case of a transformer, the charging current is usually so small that a modern circuit-breakerwill extinguish it by chopping within a very short time, usually not exceeding a millisecond.

Table 47 defines the settings specifying the minimum and maximum arcing times required forreactive loads. The same settings are also used for capacitive loads. For transformer, thearcing time information is provided by a separate setting.



Time(t)

Cur

rent

(A)

topen

max. arcing time

min. arcing time



Figure 39: Re-ignition free window, defined by earliest and latest opening times(corresponding to maximum and minimum arcing times)

Table 47: Interfaces for controlled opening


Description

INPRIOPL1INPRIOPL2INPRIOPL3INPRIOPLX

Input SSCPOWSSCPOWSSCPOWACBMSCBR

TCB – circuit breaker default mechanical opening timefor phase L1 / L2 / L3

INNOOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Default time from command release to opening of NO(52a) auxiliary contact for opening operation

INNCOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Default time from command release to closing of NC(52b) auxiliary contact for opening operation

EarliestOpeningTime

Setting ACBMSCBR Maximum arcing time that can be allowed for inductiveloads. If opening is done before this time from the nextzero crossing, the circuit breaker might have a fast re-ignition

LatestOpeningTime

Setting ACBMSCBR Minimum arcing time that can be allowed for inductiveloads. If opening is done after this time from the nextzero crossing, the circuit breaker might have a re-ignition

ArcTimeTrafoLX Setting ACBMSCBR Expected arcing time for de-energizing transformerloads

Table 48 to Table 51 describe the preset switching strategies for controlled de-energization ofpredefined loads. All the switching angles have been described with lead phase as L1,assuming PhFixSelectClose was set to Fixed L1. If PhFixSelectClose was set to Random, leadphase will be selected dynamically and the following phases are rotated accordingly.

Table 48: Interrupting targets for capacitor loads (preset strategies), assuming L1 lead phase

Capacitor bankconfiguration

L1 (lead phase)interruption target

L2 interruption target L3 interruption target

Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive-going zerocrossing of L1 phasecurrent


Y (wye/star,ungrounded) or Δ (delta)

Positive-going zerocrossing of lead phasecurrent

90° after lead phase



Table 49: Target arcing times for de-energization of capacitor banks

System frequency Minimum arcing time Maximum arcing time

50 Hz 4.5 ms 6.5 ms

60 Hz 3.6 ms 5.6 ms

Table 50: Interrupting targets for reactor and coupled reactor loads (preset strategies), assuming L1 leadphase

Reactor configuration L1 (lead phase)interruption target


Yn (wye/star, grounded) Positive-going zerocrossing of L1 phasecurrent



Positive-going zerocrossing of lead phasecurrent

90° after lead phase

Yn (wye/star) withneutral groundingreactor)

Positive-going zerocrossing of L1 phasecurrent

120° after lead phase ΦO after lead phase

Table 51: Target arcing times for de-energization of shunt reactors, assuming L1 lead phase

Yn (wye/star, grounded) (Tamin + Tamax) / 2 (Tamin + Tamax) / 2 (Tamin + Tamax) / 2


(1.5·Tamin + Tamax) / 2 (0.87·Tamin + Tamax) / 2 (0.87·Tamin + Tamax) / 2


((1+K/4)·Tamin +Tamax) / 2

(Tamin + Tamax) / 2 ((1+K/4)·Tamin +Tamax) / 2

Where,

Tamin = Minimum arcing time

T amax = Maximum arcing time

Table 52: Interrupting targets for transmission line and cable loads (preset strategies), assuming L1 lead phase

Capacitor bankconfiguration

L1 (lead phase)interruption target


(any) Positive-going zerocrossing of L1 phasecurrent


Table 53: Target arcing times for de-energization of transmission lines and power cables

System frequency Minimum arcing time Maximum arcing time

50 Hz 4.5 ms 6.5 ms

60 Hz 3.6 ms 5.6 ms

ΦO is the optimized opening angle for the second phase to open when neutral groundingreactors are used. The optimal switching angle requires to be shifted to counter the neutralvoltage shift. ΦO is calculated as



∋ (1 1180 3 180120 tan tan 3(1 2 )211

O kkk

εο ο

, ,< , ≥ < ≥ ∗∗

∗

ν ν

ν


Where k is the impedance ratio, calculated as per Equation 8.

The above mentioned targets are optimal phase angles at which load de-energization (currentinterruption) should occur. However, for a practical circuit breaker, the primary contacts openwith a certain velocity and thereby increasing the gap between the contacts with time. Asexplained above, the contacts should be opened such as to interrupt the current at the timesspecified in Table 48 to Table 51. SSCPOW function hence considers the arcing times asspecified in Table 47to release the commands as shown in Equation 9.

2asc rsc arc CTDt t T T T= + + -


Where,

tasc = Target command release time (output to circuit breaker)

trsc = Random command received time

Tarc = The arcing time to be considered for a certain load. For transformers it is equal to theArcTimeTrafo setting. For all other loads the arcing time will be as mentioned above in Table49 through Table 53.

T2 = Compensation for known influences of circuit breaker operating time information

TCTD = Controller time delay for achieving contact separation of an ideal breaker at the targetinterruption instant

As current will usually flow until a natural zero during CB opening, it is not possible to deducethe actual instant of primary contact separation from the primary voltage and current signals.Thus, no direct adaptive correction can be performed. However, if any re-strike/re-ignition isdetected by ACBMSCBR, SSCPOW increases the target arcing time by 1ms for every detection.The user can limit this arcing time extension by specifying how much correction is allowed, inthe MaxReStrikeCorr setting. Hence the actual target interruption instant is defined as given inEquation 10.

2 7asc rsc arc CTDt t T T T T= + + - +


Where T7 is the cumulated arcing time extension.

CBCOMP calculates the compensation for known influences of circuit breaker operating timeand ACBMSCBR function evaluates arcing time and arcing time extension correction. Bothfunctions provide their information to SSCPOW function.

Various settings and inputs used to define the opening parameters are given in Table 54.



Table 54: Correction and compensation interfaces for controlled opening operations


Description

INPRIOPL1INPRIOPL2INPRIOPL3

InputInput

SSCPOWACBMSCBR

TCB - Circuit breaker ideal mechanical opening time,that is, from command release to primary contactseparation, for phase L1 / L2 / L3


InputOutput

SSCPOWACBMSCBR

Tarc – arcing time correction information (sameinterface as used for closing operations)


InputOutput

SSCPOWCBCOMP

T2 – compensation for known influences of circuitbreaker operating time information (same interfaceas used for closing operations)


InputOutput

SSCPOWACBMSCBR

T7 – arcing time extension correction information

MaxReStrikeCorr Setting ACBMSCBR Maximum restrike correction allowed, inmilliseconds

7.2.2.2 CB timing test (learning) modeGUID-AFF33553-179B-4979-A894-1BBAC51168B7 v1

In CB learning mode, the CBLEARN function evaluates and learns the timing of the circuitbreaker primary and (if connected) auxiliary contacts. The commands to the three phases aredelayed by setting TimeOutAlarmDelay, to allow every pole to complete its operation beforeoperating the next pole. CBLEARN sends requests to SSCPOW to operate a specific CB pole.(Generally, L1 pole is operated first followed by L2 and L3 poles). SSCPOW upon receiving thisrequest, releases the command to the circuit breaker pole. CBLEARN function receives thecommand and feedback information to evaluate the contact timing information.

The contact timing information evaluated by the CBLEARN is communicated to functionsACBMSCBR and SCCPOW for switching and monitoring purpose.

The intefaces in SSCPOW and ACBMSCBR related to CBLEARN functionality are:

Table 55: CBLEARN interfaces in SSCPOW and ACBMSCBR

Interface Type Available in function Description

INNOOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate NO contact for phase LX openoperation (from CBLEARN)

INNCOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate NC contact for phase LX openoperation (from CBLEARN)

INPRIOPLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate main contact for phase LX openoperation (from CBLEARN)

INNOCLLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate NO contact for phase LX closeoperation (from CBLEARN)

INNCCLLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate NC contact for phase LX closeoperation (from CBLEARN)

INPRICLLX Input ACBMSCBR Time to operate main contact for phase LX closeoperation (from CBLEARN)

INPRIOPL1 Input SSCPOW Time to operate main contact for phaseL1 openoperation







INPRICLL1 Input SSCPOW Time to operate main contact for phaseL1 closeoperation



During the learning mode, SSCPOW and ACBMSCBR do not perform normal monitoring andcontrolling operations.

SSCPOW identifies the CB learning mode when its CBTSMODE input is active and it receivesthe request to operate from CRDBLSSX input interface.

7.2.3 MonitoringGUID-AA55ADCF-C4E2-4D51-A079-B6E54C7D885D v1

Monitoring is an important aspect of controlled switching for two reasons.

1. It provides the information about the degree of success of each operation performed.2. It allows adjusting the targets for subsequent operations, to optimize controlled

switching performance.

Operations monitoring is performed for both mechanical and electrical parameters. Variousinformation and alarms are generated depending upon the monitored parameters, asdescribed in the sections "Electrical monitoring" and "Mechanical monitoring".

7.2.3.1 Electrical monitoringGUID-DA62E815-2587-40C8-86CB-3A61BDC30190 v2

Electrical monitoring of circuit breaker operations can be performed depending upon the loadconnected and available feedback signals. Figure 27 and Figure 28 show the options forelectrical feedback that can be used. Electrical monitoring is performed for identifying theprestrike angles (current inception), arcing times (current interruption), electrical operatingtimes, electrical status, circuit breaker interrupter wear, target deviation for performingadaptive correction, etc.

Table 56 lists the function block interfaces that determine the function of basic electricalmonitoring.

Table 56: Function block interfaces for electrical monitoring


I3P Input ACBMSCBR Feedback current instantaneous sampleinputs for three phases

U3PL Input ACBMSCBR Feedback load voltage instantaneoussample inputs for three phases

LoadRef Setting ACBMSCBR Selection of feedback signal forelectrical monitoring. Should be setbased on the connected signal. Thereare two options:

• Load current (all 3 phases)• Load voltage (must be phase-to-

ground voltage in all 3 phases)





IDead Setting ACBMSCBR Dead current setting to determine if thefeedback current signal is healthy ordead noise samples. It is represented aspercentage of global base current.

UDead Setting ACBMSCBR Dead voltage setting to determine ifthe feedback voltage signal is healthyor dead noise samples. It is representedas percentage of global base voltage.

NumOfHalfCycle Setting ACBMSCBR The setting defines the number of halfcycle time of the reference signal to beaveraged . The averaged half cycle timeis used for further calculations.

GlobalBaseSel Setting ACBMSCBR The setting defines the global basegroup to be used for monitoringpurpose. The base voltage, currentdefined under this group is used todetermine the absolute value of IDeadand UDead.Example: If Idead is 20% of global basecurrent value, the absolute value ofIdead is 0.2*Global Base current value.

Table 57 and Table 58 lists the features that can be monitored based on the available feedbackfor different load types.

Table 57: Electrical monitoring information

Information Description

Currentinception

Identification of instant at which current inception has occurred during CB closingoperation. This includes evaluating the point-on-wave phase angle with respect to thereference signal.Current inception instant is defined as the instant at which the selected monitoringfeedback signal exceeds a fixed percentage of the corresponding base value.

Currentinterruption

Identification of instant at which the load current was finally interrupted during CBopening operation.Current interruption instant is defined as the instant at which the selected monitoringfeedback signal finally drops below a fixed percentage of the corresponding base value.

Arcing time Arcing time is the time between mechanical opening instant and current interruptioninstant.The mechanical opening instant is obtained directly by adding the mechanical operatingtime value, received from CBLEARN, to the received trip output command timestamp fromSSCPOW.As the mechanical opening time is directly received as input from CBLEARN function, thearcing time calculation is independent of the auxiliary contacts availability.

Electrical status Assumption of the circuit breaker status (open/closed), based on presence or absence ofthe selected feedback signal: If the RMS value is greater than IDead x IBase or UDead xUBase, respectively, the circuit breaker is declared electrically closed, otherwise electricallyopen.

Electricaloperating time

Defined as the time from command release to the instant of current inception (for closingoperation) or current interruption (for opening operation).

Re-strike/re-ignition

Re-strike or re-ignition is declared if re-occurrence of the selected electrical signal isdetected after initial interruption. See explanation below.

Interrupter wear Cumulated wear (contact ablation, nozzle erosion) of the circuit breaker interrupter, basedon interrupted current. See detailed description below.

For reliable electrical monitoring from primary current signals, the secondarycurrent through the PWC600 analog inputs should be greater than 50 mA.



Table 58: suitability of electrical monitoring information based on connected physical load

Information Current feedback Load voltage feedback Transformer Transmission

line / Cable”Fixed” loads(Capacitorand Reactor)

Transformer Transmissionline / Cable

”Fixed” loads(Capacitorand Reactor)

Currentinception

No Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes

Currentinterruption,arcing time


Electricalstatus

No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Electricaloperatingtime


Re-strike/re-ignition


Interrupterwear

No Yes* Yes No No No

* For transmission line or power cable, electrical monitoring can be performed only if the charging currentRMS is significant that is, greater than the dead current value setting (IDead x IBase) in ACBMSCBR function.In PWC600 1.0.1.2 and earlier, first 5 operation cycles will be monitored to ascertain if the current is significantand steady to be used for monitoring purposes. If the current is not steady, current signal is not used forelectrical monitoring even if it is greater than the dead current setting. (Current is evaluated as steady only ifthe RMS values after 5 cycles post inception, or just prior to interruption, have been constant within ±10% for5 consecutive initial operations. This evaluation is restarted whenever one of the SSCPOW settings definingthe load application is changed). This “load learning” is not performed in PWC600 1.0.1.3 and it is the user’sresponsibility to select the appropriate load feedback signal.

When the command is received, ACBMSCBR evaluates the target and predicts the electricaloperating time, prestrike angle, and arcing time information as appropriate for closing oropening operations, and forwards them to the MONCOMP function block. The same isperformed for the actual values acquired during the operation. After completing themonitoring, MONCOMP calculates the error information and consolidates data for logging.Different outputs that provide the predicted, monitored and error information is described inTable 59.

Table 59: Monitored electrical parameters


Description

PELORTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted electrical operating time (Open or Close) forthe respective phase (L1, L2, or L3)

AELORTMX Output MONCOMP Actual electrical operating time (Open or Close)

ERELORTX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of electricaloperating time (Open or Close)

ERELOTOX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of electricaloperating time (Open)

ERELOTCX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of electricaloperating time (Close)

PPRESTRAX Output MONCOMP Predicted prestrike angle

APRESTRAX Output MONCOMP Actual prestrike angle

ERPSAX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of prestrikeangle

PARCTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted arcing time





Description

AARCTMX Output MONCOMP Actual arcing time

ERARGTIMX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted value of arcing time

SWALX Output ACBMSCBR Steady-state RMS current before last open operation

LOOPPILX Output ACBMSCBR Peak current interrupted during last open operation

Figure 40 and Figure 41 shows a graphical representation of the electrical operationinformation for closing and opening operations, respectively.

CMDCLOSE

Com

ma

nd

tim

e

Curr

en

t in

ception

insta

nt

Time(t)

Cu

rre

nt (A

)

AELORTMX

APRESTRAX

Time(t)

Vo

lta

ge (

V)



Figure 40: Electrical monitoring information for close operation



Com

ma

nd

tim

e

Conta

ct s

epa

ratio

n

insta

nt

Time(t)

Cu

rre

nt (A

)

CMDOPEN

Arc

extin

ctio

n

insta

nt

AARCTMX

AELORTMX



Figure 41: Electrical operating information for open operation

For every operation, ACBMSCBR function monitors the operation parameters, forwards thedata to operation log through MONCOMP, and provides the electrical target correction toSSCPOW. For opening operations, perform the additional calculations to detect the presenceof any re-strikes/re-ignitions and provide correction of target arcing time (if configured).

Re-strike/Re-ignition detectionGUID-E8200784-01DB-4236-9323-FA6C5DEC42F7 v1

Figure 42 shows a typical representation of re-strike/re-ignition during CB opening.



Trs

Time(t)

Cur

rent

(A) Tna

Tarc

tcs

IEC17000255-1-en.vsdxIEC17000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 42: Re-strike/Re-ignition detection

Following the opening command, the primary contacts separate at instant tcs. Instantaneouslyan electrical arc is drawn, which keeps the current flowing in the circuit until interruption(usually near natural current zero). The time from contact separation until initial currentinterruption is called arcing duration or arcing time, Tarc. If the following current interruptionand the dielectric strength of the circuit breaker does not exceed the recovery voltage acrossits terminals, the arc will re-ignite. This breakdown will make the circuit conducting again andcurrent will flow till the next natural zero crossing. Trs(for single re-strike), Trs1

....Trsn(for

multiple re-strike) is the duration for which the current flows due to the re-strike/re-ignition.Tna is the no-arc duration between initial interruption and re-strike/re-ignition. Equation 11defines the monitored arcing time at successful first interruption. Equation 12 defines themonitored arcing time when (single or multiple) re-strike/re-ignition was detected.

arcAARCTMX T=IEC17000261 V1 EN-US (Equation 11)

1 2... .. ...

narc rs arc rs rs rsAARCTMX T T T T T T= + = + +IEC17000262 V1 EN-US (Equation 12)

To detect the occurrence of re-strike/re-ignition, use the either or both of these conditions:

1. (AARCTMX – PARCTMX) > 1/2 cycle2. Trs > 0 and Tna ≥ 1/8 cycle

Checking for re-strikes/re-ignitions are performed for 550 milliseconds from reception of theincoming open command.

The settings and interfaces that are related to re-strikes/re-ignitions are listed in Table 60.



Table 60: Re-strike/Re-ignition detection interfaces


Description

RTKCTLXRTKCTX

OutputInput

ACBMSCBRMONCOMP

Total number of operations with re-strikes/re-ignitions.

RTKCTOX Output MONCOMP Total number of operations with re-strikes/re-ignitions, for logging in operation log.

RSTRDETLX Output ACBMSCBR Indication for re-strike/re-ignition detected in the lastcontrolled opening operation.

MaxRkRiAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Disables/enables both the restrike/re-ignitiondetection and also the restrike/re-ignition count alarm.

MAXRALOLX Output ACBMSCBR Indication for limit of re-ignition/re-strike countreached.Note: Limit supervision is done in MONALM and therange information returned to ACBMSCBR at itsALMS... inputs.

MAXRCALLX Output ACBMSCBR Indication that the value for adaptive re-ignition /re-strike correction has reached its maximum valueMaxReStrikeCorr.

MaxReStrikeCorr Setting ACBMSCBR Limit of adaptive correction of target arcing time,based on detection of re-strikes/re-ignitions.

MaxReStrCorrAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enable or disable MAXRCALLX alarm indication.

Resetting of Re-strike/Re-ignition detectionGUID-441CC8B3-3FE2-43DF-9BE9-96CE1A0DE688 v1

When re-strikes/re-ignitions are detected and the limit for correction has been reached, analarm(MAXRCALLX) is generated. Subsequent controlled opening operations will use themaximum correction value and no more correction is allowed. If further re-strikes/re-ignitionsare detected, it is advised to either review the settings or check the circuit breaker.

When the circuit breaker has been attended (example: overhauled, orinterrupter replaced, or insulating gas replaced), it is advised to review thesettings, considering that the maximum allowed restrike correction is alreadybeing applied.

Resetting the maximum restrike correction modifies the allowable arcing timeof the breaker during the open operation.

To modify the settings, either increase the arcing time or the maximum allowed corrections. Inboth cases, noted that if the maximum restrike correction is reset, the correction appliedcomes back to zero. It is suggested to change the settings accordingly, preferably in the IEDthrough LHMI/WHMI or in PST.

Interrupter wearGUID-19E91A3A-0F01-4EAF-9837-5F5BAE7683E4 v1

In new condition, a circuit breaker is rated for a certain number of mechanical operations, thatis, no interrupting or very low currents. It is also rated for a certain (low) number of operationsinterrupting maximum fault current. In between these extremes, the interrupted current inevery Open operation will cause some erosion of the contacts and/or ablation of the nozzles,until CB has lost its ability to reliably switch off current. This interrupter wear characteristic isoften generated in the form of a curve such as Figure 43.



IntTh2

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 7010

100

1000

10000

Nu

mbe

r o

f sw

itch

ing

ope

rati

ons

Interrupted current (kA)IntTh1



Figure 43: Example of interrupter wear characteristic of a circuit breaker rated for 10000mechanical operations (interrupting currents up to 3000 A) or 20interruptions of 63 kA fault current

ACBMSCBR calculates interrupter wear as the equivalent number of mechanical operationsthat the circuit breaker has lost after interrupting a specific current. The algorithm forcalculation of interrupter wear works in several steps. For every CB open operation,

1. The samples xi of interrupted current are numerically integrated to yield a value Y,

1

nkii

xY

k== å

IEC17000263 V1 EN-US (Equation 13)

where n is the breaker type specific exponent (setting CumCurrPower, default value n = 2)and k is the total number of arcing current samples. Summation starts at the estimatedinstant of contact separation and ends at the time of final current interruption (includingadditional periods of current flow due to re-ignition or re-strike).

2. The nth root of integrated current Y is categorized against two threshold values,MinCurrentLimit and OvercurrentLimit x IBase. MinCurrentLimit is defined as theminimum current interrupted up to which the wear of contacts can be approximated toone mechanical operation. OvercurrentLimit x IBase is defined as the maximum currentabove which the wear of contacts can be approximated to saturated level of mechanicaloperations lost. For more information, see Figure 43 .

3. Depending on the category, interrupter wear for the operation is calculated as follows:



1n Y MinCurrentLimit Wear< ® =


31 2 40 1 2 3 4

n

pp p p

MinCurrentLimit Y OvercurrentLimit IBaseWear C C Y C Y C Y C Y

′ ′ ≥

⇑ < ∗ √ ∗ √ ∗ √ ∗ √


n Y OvercurrentLimit IBase Wear AblatCalShEst= ≥ ↑ <IECEQUATION17083 V1 EN-US (Equation 16)

All threshold values, coefficients (Cz, Pz, corresponding to settings AblationCoeffz, andPowerCoeffz, where suffix z represents the co-efficient number), and saturation value(AblatCalShEst ) are specific to a CB type. Where available, they are provided in the circuitbreaker library.

4. Finally, the individual Wear values from all operations are added up into a cumulated wearvalue.

5. If cumulated interrupter wear exceeds the set thresholds AblationWarnLevel orAblationAlarmLevel, a warning or alarm will be raised.

Coefficients AblationCoeffz and PowerCoeffz are determined based on the circuit breaker’sloading dependency on interrupted current. Standard curve fitting methods can be used todetermine the coefficients such that at any given interrupted current value in thecharacteristics, the wear per operation is evaluated according to above equations.

For example, according to Figure 43, using a standard curve fitting method, the coefficientsand thresholds can be approximated as

AblationCoeff0 = C0 = 0

AblationCoeff1 = C1 = 0.10085

AblationCoeff2 = C2 = -0.07959

AblationCoeff3 = C3 = -1.44630

AblationCoeff4 = C4 = 0.15915

PowerCoeff1 = P1 = 1.02393


PowerCoeff3 = P3 = -0.78450


MinCurrentLimit = 3 kA

OvercurrentLimit · IBase = 63 kA

AblatCalShEst = 1000

Using curve fitting methods, various solutions are possible. Selection ofcoefficients should be such that error in approximation is minimum at the mostlikely interrupted currents. It is recommended to contact ABB for obtaining theoptimal coefficients for any circuit breaker type that is not included in the CBlibrary of SST.



Contact wear calculation is done by the function ACBMSCBR when current is used as electricalfeedback. Relevant interfaces are described in Table 61.

Table 61: Contact wear interfaces


Description

Ablation Setting ACBMSCBR Enables or disables contact wear calculation ifcurrent is used as feedback signal

PowerCoeff1 Setting ACBMSCBR Power coefficient 1 for calculating interrupter wear inthe intermediate range

PowerCoeff2 Setting ACBMSCBR Power coefficient 2



AblationCoeff0 Setting ACBMSCBR Ablation coefficient for calculating interrupter wearin the intermediate range

AblationCoeff1 Setting ACBMSCBR Ablation coefficient 1




MinCurrentLimit Setting ACBMSCBR Defines the lower level of integrated current, belowwhich for each opening operation the contact wearvalue is considered equivalent to one mechanicaloperation.

OvercurrentLimit Setting ACBMSCBR Defines the upper level of integrated current, abovewhich for each opening operation the contact wearvalue is considered equivalent to the saturated valuedefined by AblatCalShEst setting.The value is entered in percent of IBase. Hence, caremust be taken to adjust OvercurrentLimit wheneverIBase is changed.

AblatCalShEst Setting ACBMSCBR Saturated loss of mechanical operations whencurrent interrupted is above OvercurrentLimitsetting.

InitialCumAblLX Setting ACBMSCBR Initial value of cumulated interrupter wear when theCB wear is cleared through LHMI/WHMI.

CumCurrPower Setting ACBMSCBR Current exponent setting for integrating theinterrupted current.

LOOPABLLX Output ACBMSCBR Interrupter wear value calculated for the last openingoperation.

AblationWarnLevel Setting ACBMSCBR Warning threshold limit for interrupter wear. If thecumulated wear exceeds the limit, a warning israised.

AblationAlarmLevel Setting ACBMSCBR Alarm threshold limit for interrupter wear. If thecumulated wear exceeds the limit, an alarm is raised.

AblationAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Setting to enable/disable ALABLLX output.

WRABLLX Output ACBMSCBR Activated when the cumulated interrupter wear isbetween AblationWarnLevel and AblationAlarmLevel.

ALABLLX Output ACBMSCBR Activated when the cumulated interrupter wearexceeds AblationAlarmLevel.

Overcurrent (Fault current) detectionGUID-D095AF24-4F47-4441-B64A-C0C7F6DFF1E7 v1

ACBMSCBR can be configured to indicate if the RMS current through the circuit breaker ishigher than a set value. This functionality is always active, not just during switching



operations. It can be useful to identify conditions where controlled switching was notperformed in steady-state situations.

The interfaces for fault detection are listed in Table 62. There is no setting for disabling thefault current indication output.

Table 62: Fault detection interfaces


FaultCurrentPercent Setting ACBMSCBR Threshold for instantaneous currentmagnitude (in percent of IBase) abovewhich an alarm will be raised

FLTDETLX Output ACBMSCBR Activated when the current magnitudeexceeds FaultCurrentPercent x IBase

The function always monitors within a moving observation window of one power cycle. If theinstantaneous current magnitude is greater than FaultCurrentPercent x IBase, the current isdeclared to be fault current. The function will not consider the instantaneous spikes or noisefor fault current detection.

7.2.3.2 Mechanical monitoringGUID-6701B89F-553F-4830-809D-388E062355F4 v2

Mechanical monitoring of the circuit breaker is based on timing information of the NO (52a)and NC (52b) auxiliary contacts in the drive. Depending upon the connected inputs, theACBMSCBR function monitors different mechanical information in normal operation (that is,not in CB learning mode), see Table 63 for more information.

NO (52a) is the auxiliary contact that follows the state of the circuit breaker. By definition, it isclosed when the primary contact is fully conducting. A contact of this type is normally used tointerrupt the trip coil current.

NC (52b) is the auxiliary contact that follows the inverse state of the circuit breaker. Bydefinition, it is closed when the primary contacts are electrically isolated. A contact of this typeis normally used to interrupt the close coil current.

For practical monitoring purposes, the auxiliary contacts’ status is acquired by precisionbinary inputs on the PIO hardware module.

To assure accurate contact opening instant detection in case of long cablesbetween CB drive and the PWC600 IED, discharge resistors should beconnected to each IED input terminal to quickly discharge the cablecapacitance. Recommended ratings are given in the User manual.

Table 63: Circuit breaker auxiliary contact information


AuxPosAvailable Setting ACBMSCBR Specifies which of the NO (52a) and NC(52b) auxiliary contacts are connected to thefunction

INPNOLX Input ACBMSCBR NO (52a) status signal from CB phase LX

INPNCLX Input ACBMSCBR NC (52b) status signal from CB phase LX

TotalDispLX Setting ACBMSCBR Total mechanical contact displacement (inmm) between fully open and fully closedpositions, for phase LX





PriDispLX Setting ACBMSCBR Primary contact’s change-over pointdisplacement (in mm) from fully openposition for phase LX

NODispLX Setting ACBMSCBR NO contact’s change-over pointdisplacement (in mm) from fully openposition for phase LX

NCDispLX Setting ACBMSCBR NC contact’s change-over pointdisplacement (in mm) from fully openposition for phase LX

Use the mechanical monitoring to identify mechanical problems in the circuit breaker andmanage the maintenance schedule. Different information that can be evaluated based onauxiliary contact timing is tabulated in Table 64 to Table 66. See also Figure 44 and Figure 45for more information.

Table 64: Mechanical monitoring information

Information Description

Initial mechanicaldelay

Time taken by the circuit breaker’s operating mechanism to start moving. This ismeasured as the time from command release till opening of the appropriate auxiliarycontact (NC for closing, NO for opening).

Moving time Time taken by the circuit breaker’s primary contact to move from closed to open orfrom open to closed position. This is measured as the time from opening of the firstauxiliary contact to closing of the second auxiliary contact.

Linear contactvelocity

Average speed at which the primary contacts move. Calculated as displacementbetween auxiliary contacts’ changeover points divided by Moving time.

Mechanical operatingtime

Time from command release to estimated primary contact touch / separation.

Unstable operationdetected

If the circuit breaker’s mechanical operating time is varying consistently by morethan 10% for two consecutive closing, opening, or closing & opening operations, thecircuit breaker is declared as unstable. See below explanation.

See Table 65 for availability of features.

Supervision of the mechanical monitoring information is done by the MONALMfunction block. Use SST for calculating the monitoring thresholds from theactual operation times entered for the circuit breaker.

Table 65: Mechanical monitoring for closing (C) and opening (O) operations, depending on auxiliary contactsconnected to the IED

Auxiliary contacts Initialmechanicaldelay

Moving time Linear contactvelocity

Mechanicaloperating time

Unstableoperation times

NO NC C O C O C O C O C O

No No - - - - - - - - - -

No Yes X - - - - - - X - -

Yes No - X - - - - X - - -

Yes Yes X X X X X X X X X X



Only items marked with X are evaluated.

When a command is received, ACBMSCBR evaluates the target and predicts mechanicaloperating time information. ACBMSCBR evaluates both the actual and predicted mechanicalparameters and communicates the information to the MONCOMP. MONCOMP evaluates themechanical error information as described in Table 66. The error information, actual andpredicted mechanical parameters are available as an output of the MONCOMP. Theinformation will be available at MONCOMP function outputs till the next operation isperformed.

Table 66: Mechanical monitoring output interfaces


PMCORTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted mechanical operating time(Open or Close) for phase LX.The predicted mechanical operating timeis calculated as the summation of breakermain contact operating time (recievedfrom CBLEARN) and externalcompensation (received from CBCOMP).

AMCORTMX Output MONCOMP Actual mechanical operating time (Openor Close) for phase LX.

ERMCORTX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted valueof mechanical operating time (Open orClose) for phase LX.

ERMCOTOX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted valueof mechanical operating time (Open) forphase LX.

ERMCOTCX Output MONCOMP Error of actual value from predicted valueof mechanical operating time (Close) forphase LX.

OPTOPNOLXAMCOTMOX

Output ACBMSCBRMONCOMP

Actual mechanical operating time (Open)for phase LX.The actual mechanical operating time iscalculated as the time difference betweenthe received trip command instant andbreaker main contact separation instant.The breaker main contact separationinstant is calculated considering thechangeover instants of the auxiliarycontacts(if available), refer Equation 20,21 and 22.In case of unavailability of any of theauxiliary contacts, the mechanicaloperating time is not evaluated.

OPTCLSOLXAMCOTMCX


Actual mechanical operating time (Close)for phase LX.The actual mechanical operating time iscalculated as the time difference betweenthe received close command instant andbreaker main contact touching instant.The breaker main contact touchinginstant is calculated considering thechangeover instants of the auxiliarycontacts(if available), refer Equation 17,18 and 19.In case of unavailability of any of theauxiliary contacts, the mechanicaloperating time is not evaluated.

AIMCDX Output MONCOMP Actual initial mechanical movement delay(Open or Close) for phase LX.





RCTTOPOLXAIMCDOX


Actual initial mechanical delay (Open) forphase LX.The actual initial mechanical delay iscalculated as the time difference betweenthe trip command and NO contactchangeover instant.This output is only available if NO signal isavailable to the function.

RCTTCLOLXAIMCDCX


Actual initial mechanical delay (Close) forphase LX.The actual initial mechanical delay iscalculated as the time difference betweenthe close command and NC contactchangeover instant.This output is only available if NC signal isavailable to the function.

AMCMVX Output MONCOMP Actual mechanical moving time (Open orClose) for phase LX.

AUXSWTOLXAMCMVOX


Actual mechanical moving time (Open) forphase LX.The actual mechanical moving time iscalculated as the time difference betweenthe auxiliary contacts (NO and NC)changeover instants.This output is only available if both NOand NC signals are available to thefunction.

AUXSWTCLXAMCMVCX


Actual mechanical moving time (Close)for phase LX.The actual mechanical moving time iscalculated as the time difference betweenthe auxiliary contacts (NC and NO)changeover instants.This output is only available if both NOand NC signals are available to thefunction.

ACVX Output MONCOMP Actual linear contact velocity for phaseLX.

OPSPOPOLXACVOX


Actual linear contact velocity (Open) forphase LX.The actual linear contact velocity iscalculated by dividing the distancebetween the auxiliary contacts (NODispLx– NCDispLx) to the time differencebetween the auxiliary contact changeoverinstants.In case of unavailability of any of theauxiliary contacts, the contact velocity isnot evaluated.

OPSPCLOLXACVCX


Actual linear contact velocity (Close) forphase LX.The actual linear contact velocity iscalculated by dividing the distancebetween the auxiliary contacts (NODispLx– NCDispLx) to the time differencebetween the auxiliary contact changeoverinstants.In case of unavailability of any of theauxiliary contacts, the contact velocity isnot evaluated.

Based on available auxiliary contacts feedback, ACBMSCBR calculates the mechanicaloperating times as follows.



Close operation

• If both NO and NC auxiliary contacts are available:

. NO NC

NC

T TOPTCLSOLX T INPRICLLX INNCCLLX

INNOCLLX INNCCLLX

IECEQUATION17106 V2 EN-US (Equation 17)• If only NO auxiliary contact is available:

NOOPTCLSOLX T INPRICLLX INNOCLLX

IECEQUATION17107 V2 EN-US (Equation 18)• If only NC auxiliary contact is available:

NCOPTCLSOLX T INPRICLLX INNCCLLX


Open Operation

• If both NO and NC auxiliary contacts are available:

. NO NC

NO

T TOPTOPNOLX T INPRIOPLX INNOOPLX

INNCOPLX INNOOPLX

IECEQUATION17109 V2 EN-US (Equation 20)• If only NO auxiliary contact is available:

NOOPTOPNOLX T INPRIOPLX INNOOPLX

IECEQUATION17110 V2 EN-US (Equation 21)• If only NC auxiliary contact is available:

NCOPTOPNOLX T INPRIOPLX INNCOPLX


Where,

• OPTCLSOLX = calculated mechanical closing time (from CB operation command toprimary contact touch)

• OPTOPNOLX = calculated mechanical opening time (from CB operation command toprimary contact separation)

• TNc = actual time from CB operation command to changeover of NC auxiliary contact• TNO = actual time from CB operation command to changeover of NO auxiliary contact• INPRICLLX = nominal time from CB closing command to primary contact touch• INPRIOPLX = nominal time from CB opening command to primary contact separation• INNCCLLX = nominal time from CB closing command to NC auxiliary contact opening• INNOCLLX = nominal time from CB closing command to NO auxiliary contact closing• INNCOPLX = nominal time from CB opening command to NC auxiliary contact closing• INNOOPLX = nominal time from CB opening command to NO auxiliary contact opening

The nominal times are read from CBLEARN.



Figure 44 and Figure 45 shows a graphical representation of initial mechanical delay, movingtime, and mechanical operating time and travel curve for a closing and opening operation,respectively.

AIMCDCX

AMCMVCX

Com

man

dtim

e

NC

chan

geov

erin

stan

t

NO

chan

geov

erin

stan

t

Cur

rent

ince

ptio

nin

stan

t

Time(t)

Cur

rent

(A)

CLCMDLx

Travel curve


NC(52b)

NO(52a)


Figure 44: Mechanical monitored information for close operation



Com

man

d tim

e

NC

cha

ngeo

ver

inst

ant

NO

cha

ngeo

ver

inst

ant

Prim

ary

cont

act

sepa

ratio

n in

stan

t

Time(t)

Cur

rent

(A

)

AIMCDOX

AMCMVOX

OPCMDLx

Travel curve

NC(52b)

NO(52a)


Figure 45: Mechanical monitored information for open operation

Based on the monitored information, ACBMSCBR function tracks the deviation of mechanicaloperating times between consecutive operations of the same type (Close or Open). If thedifference is higher than 10% twice in a row, a CB Unstable alarm will be raised on theUNSTOPOLX output.



If such a deviation is identified, the function declares the circuit breaker as unstable and stopsSSCPOW from issuing further controlled switching commands. All subsequent operationsfollow the ContingencyMode setting (that is, they are either bypassed or blocked). Controlledswitching will be allowed only after Unstable mode is reset. Table 67 lists the alarm output andits enabling setting.

Table 67: Circuit breaker unstable mode interfaces


Description

UNSTOPOLX Output ACBMSCBR Circuit breaker unstable alarm indication

UnstOpChrAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enables or disables circuit breaker unstable alarmindication

Disabling the ‘Circuit breaker unstable’ alarm only prevents the outputUNSTOPOLX from going high. This will neither prevent the functions fromentering the unstable mode nor will it exit from unstable mode. Once the causehas been resolved, unstable mode must be cleared in the LHMI under Clear/Clear CB indicators/Clear unstable mode, for each affected CB poleindividually. The same clearing procedure should be followed after changingthe active (that is, set or learned values) mechanical operating times.

7.2.3.3 Combined monitoringGUID-E62BD628-E0A7-4A01-877E-9E7C3F9D0999 v1

Some of the circuit breaker operation characteristics are evaluated based on both electricaland mechanical monitoring. For example, if auxiliary contacts are not connected to the IED, thestatus Open/Closed) of the circuit breaker can be determined from load current. This electricalstatus can be used as equivalent mechanical status for compensation and other calculationand detections.

Status monitoringGUID-EED6B1B1-E51F-4F3B-8902-E3A42908F1FE v1

As described above, the status of the circuit breaker can be determined based on mechanicaland electrical inputs. A circuit breaker can be detected to be electrically closed if the RMScurrent flowing through the circuit is above IDead x IBase. However, this is done only when theload type is set as capacitor, reactor or coupled reactor. For other preset load types(transformer, line/cable) the load current may vary and hence this method is not applied. Ifuser-defined load type is selected, based on the first 10 operations, load monitoring algorithmevaluates whether the load will draw a fixed current or variable current. During that time, noelectrical status detection is done. The evaluation is restarted when one of the settingsdefining the load in SSCPOW (LoadType, Grounding) is changed.

The load monitoring algorithm computes and evaluates the RMS value of current for 550 ms,and if the average RMS calculated with in this time is equal, then the load will be evaluated asfixed load. If the calculated current RMS average is not equal, the load will be evaluated asvariable load. The same procedure will be repeated for 10 successive operations (5 Closeoperations and 5 Open operations).

Once the load is identified as fixed, either by setting or by learning for user defined loads,ACBMSCBR uses the electrically detected status to internally evaluate the circuit breakerstatus and to update output interfaces CBSTNOLX and CBSTNCLX, which are equivalent NO(52a) and NC (52b) of the circuit breaker. The interfaces used for this functionality are listed inTable 68.

If the mechanical status and electrical status contradict each other, that is, if the currentflowing, mechanical status is Open, the CB position is indicated as intermediate (“CBInter”mode) and the status indication interfaces in Table 67 reflect the positions of the auxiliarycontacts.



The inputs and outputs signifying the breaker status are:

Table 68: Status monitoring interfaces


Description

CBSTNOLX Output ACBMSCBR The circuit breaker’s equivalent NO (52a) statusbased on electrical and mechanical monitoring.

CBSTNCLX Output ACBMSCBR The circuit breaker’s equivalent NC (52b) statusbased on electrical and mechanical monitoring.

CntrlPosAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enable or disable the indication for contradictoryposition between electrical and mechanical status.

CBSTSCFLX Output ACBMSCBR Consolidated circuit breaker position, may take thefollowing values:

• 0 =Cbinter- electrical status conflicts withmechanical status, provided both electrical andmechanical status are evaluated as valid

• 1 = Open- valid Open status indication from allavailable and valid status indications (electricaland/or mechanical)

• 2 =Closed- valid Closed status indication fromall available and valid status indications(electrical and/or mechanical)

• 4/5/6 = N/A Not applicable mode (currentcannot be used for status monitoring)

CBSTSLX Output ACBMSCBR Combined output for both electrical and mechanicalstatus of the circuit breaker. The output values thatcan be seen in LHMI or WHMI are:

• 0 = Unknown• 4 = Electrically open, mechanically invalid• 5 = Electrically open, mechanically open• 6 = Electrically open, mechanically closed• 7 = Electrically open, mechanically faulty• 8 = Electrically closed, mechanically invalid• 9 = Electrically closed, mechanically open• 10 = Electrically closed, mechanically closed• 11 = Electrically closed, mechanically faulty

Invalid means that either both the auxiliary contactsare not available (AuxPosAvailable = None) or bothINPNOLX and INPNCLX inputs are 0.Faulty means that both INPNOLX and INPNCLXinputs are 1.

CNTPOSOLX Output ACBMSCBR Indicates contradicting electrical and mechanical CBposition, that is, current flowing through mechanicalstatus is Open.

Operation CountGUID-96ADAE79-69F6-4813-8400-8147305B53D2 v1

Every CB close-open cycle is counted as a single operation. Operations are evaluated inACBMSCBR for each circuit breaker pole individually. As soon as the monitoring of each phaseis completed, the operation counter is updated. The update happens after every openingoperation. The operation count interfaces are:



Table 69: Circuit breaker operation count interfaces


OPRCNTRST Output ACBMSCBR Total number of circuit breaker C&Ooperation cycles, updated on every detectedclosing/opening operation cycle. Can be resetby RESOPCNT (Refer Table 71 for LHMI path).

OPRCNTL1OPRCNTL2OPRCNTL3

Output SSCPOW Same as OPRCNTRST output from ACBMSCBRfor phase L1, L2 or L3

OPRCNTCLS Output ACBMSCBR Total count of CB closing operations. Can bereset by RESOPCNT (Refer Table 71 for LHMIpath).

OPRCNTOPN Output ACBMSCBR Total count of CB opening operations. Can bereset by RESOPCNT (Refer Table 71 for LHMIpath).

RESOPCNT Input ACBMSCBR Boolean input to reset operation count

INOPCNCLX Output ACBMSCBR Total count of synchronous closingoperations. Can be reset by RESOPCNT (ReferTable 71 for LHMI path).

INOPCNOLX Output ACBMSCBR Total count of synchronous openingoperations. Can be reset by RESOPCNT (ReferTable 71 for LHMI path).

OperationsMon Setting ACBMSCBR Number of erroneous operations to bemonitored to raise an alarm

OpCntAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enable or disable the alarm for operationcount. (The setting for this limit is inMONALM function.)

OPCWRNOLX Output ACBMSCBR Number of operations has exceeded thewarning level (limit settings are in MONALMfunction).

OPCALMOLX Output ACBMSCBR Number of operations has exceeded thealarming level (limit settings are in MONALMfunction).

The function also raises an alarm and warning for operation count beyond warning and alarmlevels. With every energizing and de-energizing operation of the circuit breaker, the operationcounter is increased. The energization and the de-energization of the breaker is confirmedafter electrical and mechanical (if available) monitoring. This operation count is used for thebelow evaluation:

• Operation count alarm and warning: The user can configure to raise an alarm or warningbased on the number of operations that has taken place in the breaker. These alarmingand warning thresholds can be set in the function MONALM. The alarm and the warning isissued by the ACBMSCBR function and this can be enabled or disabled based on thesetting OpCntAlm.

The operation count can also be reset to zero through LHMI. The LHMI path is Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond. Indicators/Clear operation count.

By clearing this counter, the function is instructed to start counting the number of breakeroperation from zero again. This also resets the operation counter based alarm and warning.

The corresponding interface descriptions are provided in the Table 70.



Table 70: Alarms and warning interfaces for operation count


Description

OperationsMon Setting ACBMSCBR Number of erroneous operations to be monitoredto raise an alarm.

OpCntAlm Setting ACBMSCBR Enable or disable the alarm for operation count.(The setting for this limit is in MONALM function).

OPCWRNOLX Output ACBMSCBR Number of operations has exceeded the warninglevel (limit settings are in MONALM function).

OPCALMOLX Output ACBMSCBR Number of operations has exceeded the alarminglevel (limit settings are in MONALM function).

7.2.3.4 Resetting the calculated and acquired valuesGUID-CF3EEBBC-4F76-4FBD-A58A-5A0786CA645B v1

If the operating environment changes, for example, the circuit breaker has undergonemaintenance or the IED is being used to switch a different breaker, it is recommended to resetthe internal values of accumulated parameters to avoid erroneous calculations. If the circuitbreaker was changed or overhauled during maintenance and the values are not reset, thefunctionality may raise alarms. The clear or resetting options can be accessed through LHMI bynavigating to Clear/Clear CB indicators. For controlling reset functions from the application,the following interfaces are available:

Table 71: Parameter resetting inputs

Reset input Available infunction

Description LHMI path string

RESADCOMP ACBMSCBR Resets the adaptivecorrection of closing times(T3) to 0.0

/Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.Indicators/Clear adaptive comp

RESETABL ACBMSCBR Resets the cumulatedinterrupter wear (ablation)to InitialCumAblLX

/Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.Indicators/Clear CB wear

RESETUNST ACBMSCBR Clears unstable mode /Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.Indicators/Clear unstable mode

RESOPCNT ACBMSCBR Resets the open, close andsynchronous operationcounts to 0

/Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.Indicators/Clear operation count

RESRCNT ACBMSCBR Resets the re-strike/re-ignition count to 0

/Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.Indicators/Clear re-strike count

RESRESTRC ACBMSCBR Resets the correction valuefor target arcing time (re-strike/re-ignitioncorrection) to 0.0

/Main menu/Clear/Clear CB cond.Indicators/Clear re-strike correction

7.2.4 Data AcquisitionGUID-8557D387-9D3B-472E-AF6B-77CE0CF1BF29 v1

Monitored parameters are stored in the operation log, see the section on Operation Log.MONCOMP acts as the data provider by consolidating the parameters for every circuit breakeroperation and retaining them at its outputs until all values are ready for storing in operationlog. SSCPOW triggers the operation log only after completion of monitoring in all threephases. The monitored values and the information evaluated in ACBMSCBR are given as inputsto MONCOMP, which forwards them to OPERLOG for storing in the database. The inputinformation provided by ACBMSCBR to MONCOMP are:



Table 72: Information provided by ACBMSCBR to MONCOMP


ELORTMXELORTMLX

InputOutput

MONCOMPACBMSCBR

Actual/predicted electrical operating timeof the breaker

MCORTMXMCORTMLX

InputOutput

MONCOMPACBMSCBR

Actual/predicted mechanical operatingtime of the breaker

CONVELXCONVELLX

InputOutput

MONCOMPACBMSCBR

Linear contact velocity of the breaker

PRESTRAXPRESTRALX

InputOutput

MONCOMPACBMSCBR

Actual/predicted prestrike angle duringclosing operation

ARCTMXARCTMLX

InputOutput

MONCOMPACBMSCBR

Actual/predicted arcing time duringopening operation

ITMCDLXITMCDLLX

InputOutput

MONCOMPACBMSCBR

Initial mechanical delay time of the breaker

MCMOVTMXMCMOVTMLX

InputOutput

MONCOMPACBMSCBR

Mechanical moving time of the breaker

The information outputs of MONCOMP forwarded to the operation log are listed in Table 73.

Table 73: Signals from MONCOMP to the operation log


PMCORTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted mechanical operating time

PELORTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted electrical operating time

PPRESTRAX Output MONCOMP Predicted pre-strike angle for closingoperation

PARCTMX Output MONCOMP Predicted arcing time for opening operation

AMCORTMX Output MONCOMP Actual mechanical operating time

AELORTMX Output MONCOMP Actual electrical operating time

APRESTRAX Output MONCOMP Actual pre-strike angle for closing operation

AARCTMX Output MONCOMP Actual arcing time for opening operation

ACVX Output MONCOMP Actual linear contact velocity

AIMCDX Output MONCOMP Actual initial mechanical delay time

AMCMVX Output MONCOMP Actual total mechanical moving time

ERELORTX Output MONCOMP Calculated difference between actual andpredicted electrical operating times

ERMCORTX Output MONCOMP Calculated difference between actual andpredicted mechanical operating times

The PWC600 pre-configuration includes three instances of ACBMSCBR and ofMONCOMP for three phases. The individual breaker pole (phase) is monitoredand data logged independent of other phases.

Every operation is categorized under one of several different modes after reviewing the datamonitored. The mode of a particular operation is defined by the function SSCPOW through theoutput OPLOGMODE, see Table 73 below. Whereas MONCOMP acts as the data provider to theoperation log and triggering of the operation log is done by SSCPOW.

In addition to acquiring data and publishing them towards the operation log, MONCOMP andOPERLOG retain the information of the initial operations. These are also termed asfingerprints. Comparison of the present operations with the fingerprint operations indicates



the deviation that has occurred since initial commissioning. MONCOMP stores a certainnumber (defined by setting InitialRecords) of initial operations as fingerprint records. Theinitial operations until InitialRecords are treated as a fingerprint. There are some additionalcriteria to fix the number of energizing and de-energizing operations as fingerprints. Anadditional setting in MONCOMP, OptCombEqual, determines the fingerprint records incontext of energizing and de-energizing operation. The details of OptCombEqual are specifiedin Table 73. The interfaces for triggering the operation log are:

Table 74: Operation log triggering output


Description

OPLOGTRIG Output SSCPOW Trigger for operation log:The operation log is triggered with the time stamp ofthe incoming command.

OPLOGMODE Output SSCPOW Operation type detected for the record beingtriggered in operation log. Refer to Table 76 fordetails.

BLOCKLOG Input SSCPOW Boolean input to block the triggering of operation log.

BLKLOGOUT Output SSCPOW Output to OPLOG function, to block the triggering ofoperation log when BLOCKLOG is high.

InitialRecords Setting MONCOMP Maximum number of operations to be stored asfingerprint records

OptCombEqual Setting MONCOMP This setting along with the InitialRecords determinethe number of energizing and de-energizingoperations for fingerprint records.The enums provided under this setting are:

• EqualOpnClsRcrds: This enum option limits thefingerprint records to be an equal number(InitialRecords/2 each) of closing and openingoperations. InitialRecords/2 energizingoperations and InitialRecords/2 de-energizingoperations are considered as fingerprintrecords.

• CombinedTotalRcrds: This enum option recordsany sequence of opening and closing operationsas fingerprint records, up to InitialRecords.Either energizing or de-enrgizing operation isconsidered as fingerprint record, until the totalnumber of operation reaches the InitialRecordscount.

Furthermore, MONCOMP calculates the average values of the data in fingerprint records andthe deviation of the last operation from these average values, see Table 75.

Table 75: Average and deviation outputs


Description

AVPMCOTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the predicted mechanical operating timeof fingerprint open operations.

AVPELOTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the predicted electrical operating time offingerprint open operations.

AVAELOTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual electrical operating time(interrupting time) of fingerprint open operations.

AVAMCOTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual mechanical operating time offingerprint open operations.





Description

AVACVOX Output MONCOMP Average of the linear contact velocity of fingerprintopen operations.

AVAARGTX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual arcing time of fingerprint openoperations.

AVAIMDOX Output MONCOMP Average of the initial mechanical delay time offingerprint open operations.

AVAMCMTOX Output MONCOMP Average of the mechanical moving time offingerprint open operations.

AVPMCOTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the predicted mechanical operating timeof fingerprint close operations.

AVPELOTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the predicted electrical operating time offingerprint close operations.

AVPPSAX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual prestrike angle of fingerprintclose operations.

AVAELOTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual electrical operating time(making time) of fingerprint close operations.

AVAMCOTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual mechanical operating time offingerprint close operations.

AVACVCX Output MONCOMP Average of the linear contact velocity of fingerprintclose operations.

AVAPSAX Output MONCOMP Average of the actual prestrike angle of fingerprintclose operations.

AVAIMDCX Output MONCOMP Average of the initial mechanical delay time offingerprint close operations.

AVAMCMTCX Output MONCOMP Average of the mechanical moving time offingerprint close operations.

DVPMCOTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest predicted mechanical operatingtime from average of fingerprint records

DVPELOTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest predicted electrical operatingtime from average of fingerprint records

DVPPSAX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest predicted prestrike angle fromaverage of fingerprint records

DVAELOTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual electrical operating timefrom average of fingerprint records

DVAMCOTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual mechanical operating timefrom average of fingerprint records

DVACVX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual linear contact velocity fromaverage of fingerprint records

DVAPSAX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual prestrike angle fromaverage of fingerprint records

DVAARGTX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest actual arcing time from averageof fingerprint records

DVAIMDX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest initial mechanical movementdelay from average of fingerprint records

DVAMCMVX Output MONCOMP Deviation of latest total mechanical movement timefrom average of fingerprint records

This helps the user to monitor changes in operating characteristics of the circuit breaker overtime and operations.



The different modes of operation that can be viewed in WHMI or LHMI, are listed in Table 76. Ifseveral modes are applicable to one operation, the one with the lowest order number isreported.

Table 76: Operation modes as recorded in Operation log

Order/Priority

Mode Numericmode

Description of conditions

1 Blocked 1451 • Block inputs for a particular command are high when thecommand is received

• A contingency exists and the contingency mode has beenselected to block the particular type of operation.

• Synchronous switching commands are blocked by theBlkSynSw (block synchronous switching) input of SSCPOWand the contingency mode has been selected to block theparticular operation.

2 RefMiss 1448 When the command was received, there was no proper referencesignal available (see section "Reference signals").

3 Cancel 1446 In case of time synchronization issues, the PIO module may rejectto execute the time stamped output commands as issued by theSSCPOW function and indicate this through the Cancel interface.SSCPOW may then attempt to re-issue updated switchingcommands.

4 CBInter 1450 For constant load type, disagreement between electrical andmechanical status of the circuit breaker during switching wasdetected. If mechanical status is unknown/faulty, electrical statusis considered and CBInter mode is not declared.For other load types CBInter mode is not applicable.

5 CBUnstable 1449 When the mechanical operating times are inconsistent (varying by10% over previous operating time) for two consecutive operations.Close operations are compared with close operations only, andlikewise for opening operations.when this mode is detected and declared for the first time, allfurther operations are declared as either bypassed or blocked(according to contingency mode) until the CBUnstable mode isreset by the user.

6 Redundnt 1473 • When a closing command is received while the circuit breakeris already monitored to be in closed condition.

• When an opening command is received while the circuitbreaker is already monitored to be in open condition.

A circuit breaker is considered to be closed under certainconditions.

• For constant loads, electrical status takes preference.• For other loads, mechanical status takes preference if

available.

Absence of auxiliary contacts or detection of intermediate statewill not generate Redundant mode but may generate Failed mode.

7 Failed 1474 When a switching command has been issued and no feedback ofmechanical or electrical status change is detected:

• For closing operations, within 12.5 cycles for pre-defined load,or within 25 cycles for user-defined load, from the time thecommand has been issued by the IED.

• For opening operations, 7 cycles from the time the primarycontacts are supposed to have separated for all the loads.




Order/Priority

Mode Numericmode

Description of conditions

8 Bypassed 1443 • When the Bypass setting is selected to bypass a particularcommand.

• When contingency has been detected and contingency modesetting is to bypass the command.

9 BlkSynSw 1464 Synchronous switching commands are bypassed, by the BlkSynSw(block synchronous switching) input of SSCPOW function andcontingency mode setting to bypass a particular command.

10 External 1444 A switching operation is detected to have been controlledexternally, that is, the command was not issued by PWC600 butmechanical and/or electrical CB status change is detected.

11 Actual 1441 A controlled switching operation was completed with all switchingtargets within specified limits.

12 Actual*CBUnstab*CBInter*

145214551456

• When the modes Table 76 have electrical target error alarmsdetected above the specified limits. (Electrical target error isdefined as the error between predicted and actual electricaloperating times with thresholds set in MONALM function.)

• Modes with electrical target error alarm “*” supersede theoriginal modes.

In case of more than one condition per row, each condition individually maygenerate that mode.

Apart from the operation mode, the data seen in the WebHMI are listed in Table 77.

Table 77: Signals published in WebHMI

WHMI information name Signal Description

Electrical target error ERELORTX Difference between actual and target electricaloperating times

Electrical operating time AELORTMX actual electrical operating time (making time,interrupting time) monitored

Predicted electrical operating time PELORTMX Predicted electrical operating time

Current making angle APRESTRAX Actual monitored pre-strike angle on phasevoltage for close operation

Target current making angle PPRESTRAX Predicted pre-strike angle on phase voltage forclose operation

Arcing time AARCTMX Actual monitored arcing time for open operation

Target arcing time PARCTMX Predicted arcing time for open operation

Mechanical target error ERMCORTX Difference between actual and targetmechanical operating times.

Mechanical operating time AMCORTMX Actual mechanical operating time (closing time,opening time) monitored

Predicted mechanical operatingtime

PMCORTMX Predicted mechanical operating time

Initial mechanical delay time AIMCDX Actual monitored initial mechanical delay

Mechanical moving time AMCMVX Actual mechanical moving time

Primary contact velocity ACVX Actual contact velocity

Controller delay time CNTRLDEL actual monitored controller delay




WHMI information name Signal Description

Operation count OPRCNTLX operation count in each phase

Interrupter wear LOOPABLLX Calculated contact ablation for the last openingoperation

Cumulated interrupter wear ABLSUMLX Accumulated contact ablation including thelatest opening operation



110

Section 8 Control

8.1 Selector mini switch VSGGIO





Selector mini switch VSGGIO - -


The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a varietyof applications, as a general purpose switch. It can be used for two purposes:

• Acquiring an external switch position at its inputs. This information can be represented onthe single line diagram by a controllable switch symbol, or used further in the application.

• Issuing switching commands on its outputs. Here, VSGGIO can be controlled from themenu or from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.


VSGGIOBLOCKPSTOIPOS1IPOS2

BLOCKEDPOSITION

POS1POS2

CMDPOS12CMDPOS21


8.1.4 SignalsD0E7324T201305151403 v1

Table 78: VSGGIO Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input

IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 8Control


D0E7325T201305151403 v1

Table 79: VSGGIO Output signals


BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked

POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer

POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal

POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal

CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2

CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

8.1.5 SettingsD0E7326T201305151403 v1

Table 80: VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn

- - Off Operation Off / On

CtlModel Dir NormSBO Enh

- - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control modelaccording to IEC 61850

Mode SteadyPulsed

- - Pulsed Operation mode

tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and executesignals

tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght


Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for dual purpose, in the same way asswitch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 andIPOS2 inputs and distributed in the application through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or toIEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.

• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in theconfiguration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the localHMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the localHMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated with acontrollable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the screen. Asymbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local/Remote switch for selecting the operator's location,either from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE connection from Fixedsignal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation,where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.

Section 8 1MRK 511 275-UEN CControl


The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of thestring that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00

1 0 Position1 P01

0 1 Position2 P10

1 1 PosBadState P11

8.2 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functionsDPGGIO





IEC 61850 generic communicationI/O functions

DPGGIO - -


The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO function block is used to senddouble point indications to other systems or equipment in the substation via IEC61850 stationbus. It is especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.


DPGGIOOPENCLOSEVALID

POSITION


Figure 46: DPGGIO function block

8.2.4 SignalsD0E6532T201305151403 v1

Table 81: DPGGIO Input signals


OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication

CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication

VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

D0E6533T201305151403 v1

Table 82: DPGGIO Output signals


POSITION INTEGER Double point indication



8.2.5 SettingsD0E6053T201305151403 v1

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and ControlIED Manager (PCM600).


Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions(DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or systemthat requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 or other tools must be usedto define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

8.3 Strategy switching SSCPOWGUID-2D8D445E-F93C-4465-89ED-848A75F35263 v1

8.3.1 IdentificationGUID-D1A30927-812E-4809-A199-559582939FD6 v1

Table 83: Identification




Strategy switching of PWC600 SSCPOW — —

8.3.2 FunctionalityGUID-6AD604C0-8AA8-40A0-A797-B5962069837D v2

The strategy switching (SSCPOW) function of PWC600 provides selection of the relevantswitching sequence based on the inputs. The default switching sequence for closing/openingoperations is based on switching command at the relevant voltage zero or peak of the firstpossible phase or in accordance to the phase rotation principle.

SSCPOW processes the voltage/current input and identifies the sequence of zero crossings forthe selection of switching strategy. If the application type is defined with relevant grounding,the product automatically selects the optimum switching strategy and performs theoperations. However, if there is an application where these strategies may not result inoptimum switching and requires settings, the switching positions where the operationsshould be done can be selected. The switching can also be made adaptable.

The switching strategies mentioned previously can be divided into five subparts.

1. System Application and switching pattern detection (Static Application SwitchingStrategy)

2. Source selection and Zero crossing detection (Signal Processing)3. Case Control Strategy4. Co-ordination Logic5. Output Logic

The switching operation also undergoes a circuit breaker learning mode which confirms theintegrity of the wiring, the predicted time stamps and co-ordination logic between breakerlearning logic (a separate function code) and strategy switching logic.



8.3.3 Function blockGUID-E2DD5003-2878-40CD-9915-C0FC4006FE42 v1

SSCPOWBLOCKU3P*I3P*BLOCKALLBLKSYNSWBLOCKLOGCMDOPENCMDCLOSECMDOPENGCMDCLOSEGBLKOPOPRBLKCLOPRDELTAT1L1DELTAT1L2DELTAT1L3DELTAT2L1DELTAT2L2DELTAT2L3DELTAT3L1DELTAT3L2DELTAT3L3DELTAT6L1DELTAT6L2DELTAT6L3DELTAT7L1DELTAT7L2DELTAT7L3CRDMCTSL1CRDMCTSL2CRDMCTSL3CRDBCTSXCRDACSSL1CRDACSSL2CRDACSSL3CRDBLSSXINNOOPL1INNCOPL1INPRIOPL1INNOOPL2INNCOPL2INPRIOPL2INNOOPL3INNCOPL3INPRIOPL3INNOCLL1INNCCLL1INPRICLL1INNOCLL2INNCCLL2INPRICLL2INNOCLL3INNCCLL3INPRICLL3CNOPCMDL1CNOPCMDL2CNOPCMDL3CNCLCMDL1CNCLCMDL2CNCLCMDL3RESETRESETFPCBSTSCFL1CBSTSCFL2CBSTSCFL3CBTSMODEELCERRGL1ELCERRGL2ELCERRGL3CBOPCAPINCMPLOSINLOCCNTLINVOLTCHA*VOLTCHB*VOLTCHC*CURRCHA*CURRCHB*CURRCHC*

STRANGL1STRANGL2STRANGL3OPCMDL1OPCMDL2OPCMDL3CLCMDL1CLCMDL2CLCMDL3

OPCMDINPCLCMDINP

CRDSSMCL1CRDSSMCL2CRDSSMCL3CRDTSMCL1CRDTSMCL2CRDTSMCL3

DLTOPL1DLTOPL2DLTOPL3DLTCLL1DLTCLL2DLTCLL3

OPBYPASSCLBYPASS

BLKOPL1BLKOPL2BLKOPL3BLKCLL1BLKCLL2BLKCLL3

STRDPOWTIMEEXED

BLKLOGOUTLOCCNTRLPOWCAPL1POWCAPL2POWCAPL3SWTPOSL1SWTPOSL2SWTPOSL3

OPLOGMODEOPLOGTRIG

CNTRLDELRSTOUT

RSTFPOUTOPERCNTL1OPERCNTL2OPERCNTL3CLOPRGNLOPOPRGNLREFSIGLOS

UNCONTSWTCOPSIGLOS

QCLOSEQOPENDRTRIG

CBOPCAPL1CBOPCAPL2CBOPCAPL3

EMERTRIP

IEC12000081-1-en.vsdIEC12000081 V1 EN-US

Figure 47: Function block



8.3.4 SignalsPID-3896-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 84: SSCPOW Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking binary outputs

U3P GROUPSIGNAL

- Three phase voltage input

I3P GROUPSIGNAL

- Three phase current input

VoltCHA GROUPSIGNAL

- VoltCHA

VoltCHB GROUPSIGNAL

- VoltCHB

VoltCHC GROUPSIGNAL

- VoltCHC

CurrCHA GROUPSIGNAL

- Current ChannelA

CurrCHB GROUPSIGNAL

- Current ChannelB

CurrCHC GROUPSIGNAL

- Current ChannelC

BLOCKALL BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking all switching operations

BLKSYNSW BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking all synchronous switching operations

BLOCKLOG BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operation log triggering

BLKOPOPR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking open operations

BLKCLOPR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for blocking close operations

CNOPCMDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Cancel open command from PIO board for unsuccessful opencommand operation for phaseL1



CNCLCMDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Cancel close command from PIO board for unsuccessful closecommand operation for phaseL1



CMDOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open command input

CMDCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close command input

CMDOPENG BOOLEAN 0 Open command GOOSE input

CMDCLOSEG BOOLEAN 0 Close command GOOSE input

RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear all outputs except initial finger printrecords

RESETFP BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear all outputs including initial finger printopen/close records outputs

CBTSMODE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker test mode status indication

CMPLOSIN BOOLEAN 0 Loss of compensation input signal

CRDBCTSX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input from CBCOMP to SSCPOW





CRDBLSSX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input from CBLEARN to SSCPOW

CRDACSSL1 INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input for phaseL1 from ACBMSCBR to SSCPOW



CRDMCTSL1 INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input for phaseL1 from MONCOMP to SSCPOW



OPRCNTL1 INTEGER 0 Operation count input for phase L1



CBSTSCFL1 INTEGER 0 Circuit breaker position input from ACBMSCBR for phaseL1



ELCERRGL1 INTEGER 0 Electircal range error from MONALM to generate operationlog mode for phaseL1



CBOPCAPIN INTEGER 0 Cicruit breaker operating capability input from MONALM

LOCCNTLIN BOOLEAN 0 Local/remote control indication input signal

INPRIOPL1 REAL 0.0 Time to operate main contact for phaseL1 open operation



INPRICLL1 REAL 0.0 Time to operate main contact for phaseL1 close operation



DELTAT1L1 REAL 0.0 Electrical switching correction delay from switching instantfor phaseL1



DELTAT2L1 REAL 0.0 Switching compensation delay from switching instant forphaseL1



DELTAT3L1 REAL 0.0 Adaptive switching correction delay for restrike and prestrikefor phaseL1



DELTAT6L1 REAL 0.0 Switching strategy delay from switching instant for handlingmechanical scatter for phaseL1







DELTAT7L1 REAL 0.0 Switching delay for open opers if restrikes/reignitiondetected as per user set value for phaseL1



PID-3896-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 85: SSCPOW Output signals


OPCMDL1 BOOLEAN Time activated control open synchronous switchingcommand for phaseL1



CLCMDL1 BOOLEAN Time activated control close synchronous switchingcommand for phaseL1



OPCMDINP BOOLEAN Open command input received to the function latched output

CLCMDINP BOOLEAN Close command input received to the function latched output

EMERTRIP BOOLEAN Emergency trip indication for immediate trip operation

OPBYPASS BOOLEAN Bypassing openingswitching criteria when no valid strategyselected or controlledswitching disabled

CLBYPASS BOOLEAN Bypassing closingswitching criteria when no valid strategyselected or controlledswitching disabled

DRTRIG BOOLEAN Trigger to disturbance record

OPLOGTRIG BOOLEAN Trigger input to operation log

OPLOGMODE INTEGER Mode output from SSCPOW to operation log

RSTOUT BOOLEAN Reset output to clear all outputs except initial finger printrecords

RSTFPOUT BOOLEAN Reset output to clear all outputs including initial finger printopen/close records outputs

BLKLOGOUT BOOLEAN Block signal for operation log

BLKOPL1 BOOLEAN Block opening command for phaseL1



BLKCLL1 BOOLEAN Block closing command for phaseL1



STRDPOW BOOLEAN Indication of point on wave controlling start





TIMEEXED BOOLEAN Indication for maximum allowed time for operation exceeded

LOCCNTRL BOOLEAN Local control behaviour

CLOPRGNL BOOLEAN Close command general output

OPOPRGNL BOOLEAN Open command general output

REFSIGLOS BOOLEAN Loss of reference signal indication output

UNCONTSWT BOOLEAN Uncontrolled switching indication output

COPSIGLOS BOOLEAN Loss of any enabled compensation signal indication output

QCLOSE BOOLEAN Close command query used to request for corrections fromother functions

QOPEN BOOLEAN Open command query used to request for corrections fromother functions

DRCLTIML1 BOOLEAN Synchronous close command time of phaseL1 for disturbancerecording



DROPTIML1 BOOLEAN Synchronous open command time of phaseL1 for disturbancerecording



CBOPCAPL1 INTEGER Circuit breaker operating capability for phaseL1



OPRCNTL1 INTEGER Operation count output for phase L1



SWTPOSL1 INTEGER Switch position indication for phaseL1



POWCAPL1 INTEGER Point on wave switching capability indication for phaseL1



CRDSSACL1 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to ACBMSCBR forphaseL1



CRDSSMCL1 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to MONCOMP forphaseL1

CRDSSMCL2 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to MONCOMP for phaseL2

CRDSSMCL3 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to MONCOMP forphaseL3





CRDTSMCL1 INTEGER Co-ordination output from SSCPOW to MONCOMP forphaseL1



CNTRLDEL REAL Controller delay output

DLTOPL1 REAL Difference time from first command input to open controlswitching command for phaseL1

DLTOPL2 REAL Difference time from first command input to open controlswitching command for phase L2

DLTOPL3 REAL Difference time from first command input to open controlswitching command for phaseL3

DLTCLL1 REAL Difference time from first command input to closesynchronous switching command for phaseL1



STRANGL1 REAL Strategy switching angle for phaseL1



8.3.5 SettingsPID-3896-SETTINGS v3

Table 86: SSCPOW Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn

- - Off Operation Mode Off / On

CntrldOperType CloseOpenOpen & Close

- - Close Switching operation(s) to becontrolled

UConnType One phase starThree phase starOne phase deltaThree phase delta

- - One phase star Connection type of reference voltagetransformer

UConnPh L1/L1-L2L2/L2-L3L3/L3-L1

- - L1/L1-L2 Connected phase of voltage if singlephase connection of voltage isselected in uConnType

OpenRefI VoltageCurrent

- - Voltage Reference selection for openingoperations to be either voltage orcurrent

UDead 5.00 - 80.00 %UB 1.00 20.00 Dead voltage setting

IDead 5.00 - 80.00 %IB 1.00 20.00 Dead current setting





LoadType CapacitorReactorPowertransformerTransmissionline/CableUser definedCoupled ReactorCoupledtransformer

- - Capacitor Load type of this function forselecting opening and closingstrategy

Grounding Star groundedUngrounded/DeltaImpedancegrounded

- - Star grounded Type of grounding for switched loadvalid only if load type is selected asCapacitor or Reactor

ImpRatio 0.0 - 19.9 - 0.1 0.0 Impedance ratio of grounding in caseof impedance grounded

RefSignalLossAlm DisableEnable

- - Disable Enable or disable selection forreference signal lost alarm indication

CompSigLossAlm DisableEnable

- - Disable Compensation signal loss alarmoption

ContDelayExdAlm DisableEnable

- - Disable Enable or disable selection formaximum controller delay exceededalarm indication

UncontSwitchAlm DisableEnable

- - Disable Uncontrolled switching alarm option

GlobalBaseSel 1 - 6 - 1 1 Global selection for function groups

Table 87: SSCPOW Non group settings (advanced)


PhFixSelectClose DisableL2

- - Disable Fixed phase selection for closingoperation

PhFixSelectOpen DisableL2

- - Disable Fixed phase selection for openingoperation

NumOfHalfCycle 2 - 16 - 1 10 Number of half cycles to beconsidered for half cycle average timeperiod evaluation

MaxContDelay 45.00 - 200.00 ms 1.00 50.00 Maximum controller delay set forcontroller delay value exceeded alarmindication

ByPassMode DisableCloseOpenOpen & Close

- - Disable By pass open or close operationsoverrules CntrldOperType

LeadTargetOpen 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Opening target setting in degrees(relative to positive zero crossing) forlead phase

FirstFollowOpen 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Opening target setting in degrees(relative to LeadTargetOpen) for firstfollowing phase

SecondFollowOpen 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Opening target setting in degrees(relative to LeadTargetOpen) forsecond following phase

LeadTargetClose 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Closing target setting in degrees(relative to positive zero crossing) forlead phase





FirstFollowClose 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Closing target setting in degrees(relative to LeadTargetOpen) for firstfollowing phase

SecondFollowClose 0.0 - 3600.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Closing target setting in degrees(relative to LeadTargetOpen) forsecond following phase

CmdOffStatus DisableEnable

- - Disable Setting to enable or disable selectionof time to switch off command andcurrent time

CmdOffTime 100.0 - 2000.0 ms 1.0 100.0 Command off time setting to providetime to switch off command

ContingencyMode Block open&closeBypassopen&closeBlockopen-BypasscloseBypassopen-Blockclose

- - Bypassopen&close

Contingency mode selection foruncontrolled switching

POWCapSet N/ANoneCloseOpenClose&Open

- - N/A Point of wave capability of a circuitbreaker selection



8.3.6 Operation principleGUID-740CEE93-142B-4C7C-8A45-902FDD84D69F v2

Application

Switching

Strategy(static)

(5.1)

Signal

Processing

(5.2)

Output Logic

(5.4)

Co-ordination

Logic

(5.5)

Application

Switching

Strategy(dynamic)

(8)

(7)

(6)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

Case Command

handling (0)

(5.3)

Input

Setting

Input

Setting

ACBMSCBR

Query Logic

Output



Figure 48: Strategy switching block diagram



Selection Criteria Logic

coorASSTS

deltaT1L1

deltaT1L2

deltaT1L3

Summation Logic





Operating time Logic

deltaSummation

tpHalfCycle

cbCloseTime

cbOpenTime

deltaT2L1

deltaT2L2

deltaT2L3

deltaT3L1

deltaT3L2

deltaT3L3

deltaT4L1

deltaT4L2

deltaT4L3

deltaT6L1

deltaT6L2

deltaT6L3

deltaT1L1

deltaT1L2

deltaT1L3

deltaT2L1

deltaT2L2

deltaT2L3

deltaT3L1

deltaT3L2

deltaT3L3

deltaT4L1

deltaT4L2

deltaT4L3

deltaT4L1

deltaT4L2

deltaT4L3

openL3commandL1

openL3commandL2

openL3commandL3

closeL3commandL1

closeL3commandL2

closeL3commandL3



Figure 49: Delta summation

8.3.6.1 System application and switching pattern detection (Static applicationswitching strategy)

GUID-BC5FC6CB-39F4-4CE3-8FC6-F1B39C4C2836 v1

Different loads and their grounding methods require different switching strategy. There arenine parameters determining the strategy opening or closing angles.

1. Load type (capacitive or inductive)2. Load configuration (Star grounded/Star ungrounded/Delta)3. Phase sequence (Positive/Negative)4. Operation type (Open/Close)5. Lead operating phase6. Reference triggering phase for strategy calculation7. Phase reference trigger (Positive/Negative)8. Polarity sensitivity for closing (Positive/Negative/Any)9. Switching phase

The parameters 1...4 and 8 are handled in the static application switching strategy and theother parameters are handled in the case control strategy.

8.3.6.2 Source selection and zero-crossing detectionGUID-9A34518B-0F95-40A7-A346-9595F8F07B3F v1

The point-on-wave control systems require the input source to be freely selectable. The threephase-to-earth voltage inputs for closing operation and three phase-to-earth current inputsfor opening operation are required. However, for practical purposes, all three-phase voltagesmay not be available at the control kiosk or phase-to-phase voltages may be available. Hence,



it becomes important to be able to adapt to the inputs being provided and derive the requiredsignals out of the available signals, by referring to phase to ground voltages phase to phasevoltages positive zero crossing can be derived which is represented in Figure 55 andappropriate phase voltages and phase to phase voltages are represented in Figure 49. Also,current inputs at times might not be significant in quantity to be considered for analysispurpose, at such times, falling back on voltage signals might be a better choice. Due to theabove mentioned points, there is a requirement to choose, reconstruct and analyze differentinputs available to achieve the desired outputs for zero crossing detection.

Once the signal source is selected, the zero crossings are detected and the time stamp iscalculated. This is based on the sample number and the time stamp information of the initialsample made available.

Latest Sample

1 2 . i i+1 i+2 i+3 . . n-1 n

First SampleTime Stamp = x

IEC12000074-1-vsd


Figure 50: Zero crossing sample information

Reference Selection

Zero Crossing Detection Algorithm

tp Half Cycle

uConnPh

openRef

avgNumOfHalfCycle

uConnType

Zero Crossing 3-Phase Evaluation

A

B

C

A

B

C

IEC12000075-1-vsd

U1/U12/I1 ( X Channel ID

U2/U23/I2 ( Y Channel ID

U3/U31/I3 ( Z Channel ID

Co-ordination Reference

No Reference Signal L1/L2/L3

AFL_DATE_TIME T4X

AFL_DATE_TIME T4Y

AFL_DATE_TIME T4Z

tpHalfCycle

Co-ordination ZC

X - Channel ID

Y- Channel ID

Z – Channel ID

RMS U3PN

RMS I3P

T4L1

T4L2

T4L3

U1

U2

U3

I1

I2

I3


Figure 51: Reference selection and zero-crossing detection block diagram

As shown in Figure 48, signal processing block is divided into four functional blocks as shownin Figure 51.



• Reference selection block• Zero-crossing detection block• Zero-crossing 3-phase evaluation block• tp half-cycle block

Internal signal flow between four of the functional blocks is shown in Figure 51. Also, signalinformation handshaking is performed using coordination signals between functional blocksto maintain synchronous data transfer.

Reference selection logicGUID-91FCE7B8-695A-4695-826C-EDD01D8FDE6C v1

The reference selection logic is shown in Figure 52. Based on the setting selected for thereference signal (Voltage/Current), the logic enables the reference signals to pass by afterchecking for the signal amplitude compared to the dead values. If the level comparison fails,the signal cannot be used as reference signal. The setting selection information of uConnTypeand uConnPh is passed through the internal coordination signal (coorRSZC3E) to zero-crossing 3-phase evaluation logic.

uConnPh

openRef

uConnType

a

ba > b

0.0 U

AND

IDead

a

ba > b

a

ba > b

NOT AND

UDead

a

ba > b

a

ba > b

a

ba > b

AND

AND

OR

F

F

F

T

T

T

F

F

F

T

T

T

BitPackCode

PutSamples_A

1

NoOfValues ChannelIDNewSampleValuechannelIdIn

IEC12000076-1-vsd

Open Reference Success

Close Reference Success

U1/U12/I1 X Channel ID

U2/U23/I2 Y Channel ID

U3/U31/I3 Z Channel ID

coorRSZC3E

IL1 RMS

IL2 RMS

IL3 RMS

UL1 RMS

UL2 RMS

UL3 RMS

UL1 CHID

UL2 CHID

IL1 CHID

IL2 CHID

IL3 CHIDUL3 CHID


Figure 52: Reference selection logic

Zero-crossing detection logicGUID-CF26C862-69E5-4249-AE1D-5C52FC6F2B6E v1

Referring to Figure 50, a zero-crossing is detected between the ith and (i+1)th samples in theframe received. Given that the information from the base software (BSW) is available for thetime stamp of the first sample, which is shown as x, the zero-crossing time can be calculated.

zc sValueSOldT x T

ValueSOld ValueSNewæ ö

= + ç ÷-è ø

g




( )10

1halfcycle

m

zcj zcjj

TP T Tm +

== -å


Where

Ts Sampling time period

TPhalfcycle half-cycle time period (averaged)

m Number of half cycles to be considered for averaging half cycle time period

Tzc Time for zero crossing

ValueSOld Previous sample value

ValueSNew Present sample value

Zero-crossing detection algorithm logic is shown in Figure 53. This logical diagram describesthe evaluation of zero-crossing time with and without polarity sensitivity. However, in thisfunction the zero-crossing reference is used for target-switching correction. The informationabout the polarity sensitivity is detected in the algorithm latest zero-crossing time evaluated,which is positive zero crossing or negative zero crossing.

GetSamples_A

2

channelID NumberOfSamplesInTask

NewSampleValue

YChannelID

sampleValue

GetSamples_A

3

channelIDNumberOfSamplesInTask

NewSampleValue

ZChannelID

sampleValue

tzY

tzZ

GetSamples_A

1

channelIDNumberOfSamplesInTask

NewSampleValue

LOOP

a

ba>b

a

ba<=b

a

ba<b

a

ba=>b

AND

125.0 U

0 U

AND

OR

F

F

F

T

T

T

- 1Z

Init =0.0

-1Z

Init= 0.0

-1Z

Init= 0.0

-1Z

Init= 0.0

- 1Z

Init =0.0

F

T

-1Z

Init= 0.0

noOfSamplesXChannelID

sampleTimeInterface

microSeconds

zeroVal

sampleValue

delayedSampleValue

positiveZC

negativeZC

trigZC

t 1

t 0

V 1

V 0

tzX

F

T

-1Z

Init= 0.0

t4ZL1

Similar logic as the ‘XChannelID’

Similar logic as the ‘XChannelID’

t4ZL2

t4ZL3

0 ( 1 0) / ( 1 0)tz t Vo t t V V


Figure 53: Logical representation of the zero-crossing

Half-cycle evaluationGUID-DD0DF090-6F1F-463D-8B52-ECEE8F0C6604 v2

The half-cycle time period evaluation is based on the latest zero-crossing time detected usingthe presented algorithm. If zero-crossing trigger is detected by zero-crossing time blocking, itis recorded to a buffer. Based on the length of the buffer, the defined tpHalfCycle is evaluatedas shown in Figure 54.



tz X,Y,Z

trigZC

tp Half Cycle Buffer

Length of the buffer = no. of half cycles

= Sum of the buffer values

Length of the buffertp HalfCycle

IEC12000077-1-vsd


Figure 54: Representation of half-cycle time period evaluation

Zero-crossing 3-phase evaluationGUID-B56EF703-CA2F-4E80-8EBC-F11B549C75B6 v2

Zero-crossing information is evaluated for all three phases if their phase-to-earth values areavailable. If the phase-to-earth signal values are not available, the actual values are evaluatedby adding or subtracting an appropriate value to form the zero-crossing time values as shownin Figure 55 in sync with the coordination signal coorRSZC3E.

coorRSZC3E

Note: *Opening strategy will change for current selectionIEC12000078


Figure 55: Zero-crossing 3-phase evaluation



-2

-1.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

0° 60° 120° 180° 240° 300° 360°

U1-NU2-NU3-NU1-U2U2-U3U3-U1


Figure 56: Waveform patterns

8.3.6.3 Case Control StrategyGUID-45E5216A-F56D-4B74-9DA8-DC801D4B5D45 v2

The case control strategy consists of ten sub blocks.

General logic Dynamic application switching strategyCase command control

Query logic BC open queryBC close queryBC close response and ACBMSCBR voltage-based open queryACBMSCBR voltage-based open response and ACBOM current-based open queryACBMSCBR current-based open response and ACBOM voltage close queryACBMSCBR voltage-based close response and delta T5 open querydelta T5 open response and delta T5 close querydelta T5 close response

Dynamic application switching strategy determines the parameter 5,6,7 and 9 of systemapplication and switching pattern detection section. The selection of the correct parametersdetermines the switching strategy.

The Case Command Control block defines the operational procedure for bypass command,synchronous switching command, cancel command and command turn off logic. Figure 57shows the overall block diagram of the case command handling logic.

The bypass command block defines the operational procedure for the ByPassMode settingeither in open or closed condition. The synchronous switching command block sends out theopen or close command at a defined time stamp corresponding to the strategy selected. Onreceiving the cancel command from PIO, this block issues the correct retrigger commands foropen or closed operation.

In case of command control logic, the command turn-off block puts off the closed or openoperation command bit low after the predicted future time.

The sub blocks 1...8 of Figure 48 are the query blocks which puts the query in one task time andreceives the response in the next task time.



Close OpenClose Open

By-pass

command

Close Open

Sync. Switching

commandCancel command

Close Open

Command Turn-off logic

IEC12000079-1-vsd


Figure 57: Block diagram representation of case command handling logic

Cancel Command Handling Block

Cancel command handling block receives six input cancel commands from the PIO. Dependingon the execution of control operation, either open or close cancel commands generated by PIOis received as the feedback signal to start the cancel command handling logic internally. Basedon the cancelOperMode setting, cancel command handling logic executes the operationalcondition when cancel commands, that is, abort operation, try once and try twice are receivedfrom PIO.

Abort operation

Abort operation executes the emergency trip to give out the three phases open commands.

Try once

Try once operation executes command re-try once to give out the controlled switchingoperation. If cancel commands are received again to the cancel command handling block then,emergency trip is executed to give out the three phases open commands.

Try twice

Try twice operation executes command re-try once to give out the controlled switchingoperation. If cancel commands are received to the function then this logic re-tries one moretime to execute the controlled switching. If cancel commands are received again to the cancelcommand handling block then, emergency trip is executed to give out the three phases opencommands.

Contingency conditions

During non-operational conditions existing such as unstable CB characteristics or referencesignal missing for execution of controlled switching based on the contingency mode selectiontwo operations are possible.

• Block commands• Uncontrolled switching

Uncontrolled switching

Based on the load selected, uncontrolled switching operation leads to the switchingcommands with out any control strategy. This operating condition will be indicated using aunCntSwitching signal to the user to understand due to non-operational conditionsuncontrolled switching happened to the input command received to the function.

Block commands



Based on the selection of contingency mode the output switching commands can be blockedirrespective of the operation type selected, when the non-operational conditions exists toexecute the controlled switching.

Bypass Mode

When user selects the bypass mode, the input commands received to the function is executedwith out any controlled switching strategies.

Block sync switching

When blocking of controlled switching is enabled, uncontrolled switching is indicated statingthat the controlled switching strategy is handled when the input command is received to thisfunction.

CB test mode

The function can also operate in circuit breaker learning mode. This mode confirms theintegrity of the wiring and prediction of time stamps of the function. This mode acts with co-ordination of the breaker learning function. It accepts the coorBLSSX input signal andCBTestMode inputs from breaker learning function to undergo the learning procedure.CBTestMode gives an indication for circuit breaker learning mode to this function and thecoorBLSSX input presents the required output to be operated on.

coorBLSSX is a six-bit code, with each bit being either 0 or 1. The first three bits from the LSBside gives the input for open command for the three phases and the rest three bits from MSBside gives the input for close command for the three phases.

R Phase

openB Phase

close

Y Phase

close

R Phase

close

B Phase

open

Y Phase

open

0252 42 3222

12


GUID-1AD197B9-D0F1-4635-9143-D8A043BD946E V1 EN-US

Figure 58: CB test mode

The coorBLSSX input conveys the strategy switching function the operation to be carried on.If the value of coorBLSSX is 7, which means the first three inputs from the LSB side are high, itconveys that it is a emergency trip condition for which all the CBs are operated simultaneously.

TIMEEXED

TIMEEXED is an IEC 61850 mandatory data object. SSCPOW generates this signal.

• Criteria or conditions for activating this signal: Whenever the contDelayExceeded settingis enabled and the controller exceeds the specified maxContDelay setting time, theTIMEEXED alarm is initiated. This condition arises when the IED takes a longer time torespond to a controlled switching command.

• Activation Time: This signal remains active for 5 milliseconds, after which time it isautomatically reset.



132

Section 9 General calculation

9.1 Analog scaling ANSCALGUID-B152E247-16D6-4D05-B85B-40A1D8756AE7 v1

9.1.1 IdentificationGUID-513EA31D-9E2F-456B-BA7A-2527E136D059 v1

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 devicenumber

Analog scaling ANSCAL - -

9.1.2 FunctionalityGUID-80971F0E-5815-4412-BF76-6CEF76E44AE8 v1

The Analog scaling ANSCAL function transforms an input signal, for example, from amonitoring function or input interface, either through linear or non-linear scaling orinterpolation between known relational values for further use. ANSCAL function is divided intothree parts:

• Limit module: limits the input value to either LowLimit or HighLimit whenever the inputvalue falls below or exceeds the set limits.

• Chart function: scales the output value based on linear interpolation and constantextrapolation.

• Equation function: evaluates the output as a function of the input based on the constantsdeclared in Equation 25.

.m n f xy ax bx c d e ×= + + +IECEQUATION-0091 V1 EN-US (Equation 25)

Where

x is the input

y is the output

a, b, c, d, e, f, m and n are constants

9.1.3 Function blockGUID-0E692849-9DB6-48A4-9967-85F52FC33A24 v1

ANSCALBLOCKBLKFUNCINSENSTSINPUT

WARNINGANGSCALE




1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 9General calculation



Table 88: ANSCAL Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs

BLKFUNC BOOLEAN 0 Block function

INSENSTS BOOLEAN 0 Input sensor status not healthy

INPUT REAL 0.0 Input signal


Table 89: ANSCAL Output signals


WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal for out of range output.

ANGSCALE GROUP SIGNAL Group output containing scaled value and alarm

GUID-D34D4C65-22B1-424C-B9C0-412C2B8485EF v1

Table 90: Breakdown of ANSCAL group signal


OPSIGNAL REAL Analog output after conversion

ALARM BOOLEAN Combined alarm signal, TRUE (1) if any of the following conditions isdetected:

• Faulty sensor• Settings for curve point input values in Chart mode are out of

sequence• INPUT value is lower than LowLimit or higher than HighLimit• BLKFUNC input is 1

SENSTSOUT BOOLEAN Sensor status output for IEC 61850 reporting purpose:TRUE (1) – Sensor status is unhealthyFALSE (0) – Sensor status is healthy


Table 91: ANSCAL Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


FnType ChartEquation

- - Chart Functional mode selection

LowLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 -1.0 Input signal lower limiting value

HighLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 1.0 Input signal higher limiting value

LimitScaleVal Limit valueLimit value w/oalmDefault value

- - Limit value Select output to be limited to scalevalue or default value in case the inputvalue is out of range


Section 9 1MRK 511 275-UEN CGeneral calculation



DefValue -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.000 Default value to be shown in output incase of sensor status not healthy,block, or input signal out of range (ifselected)

a -9999.999 -9999.999

- 0.001 0.000 Constant a in equation output = ax^m+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)

b -9999.999 -9999.999

- 0.001 0.000 Constant b in equation output = ax^m+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)

c -9999.999 -9999.999

- 0.001 0.000 Constant c in equation output = ax^m+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)

d -9999.999 -9999.999

- 0.001 0.000 Constant d in equation output = ax^m+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)

e -10.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Constant e in equation output = ax^m+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)

f -10.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Constant f in equation output = ax^m+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)

m -10.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Constant m in equation output =ax^m + bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)

n -10.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Constant n in equation output = ax^m+ bx^n + c + d*e^(f*x)

CurvePoints 2 - 8 - 1 2 Number of curve points to beconsidered for interpolation

X1 -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Input value for curve point 1








Y1 -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Output value for curve point 1








9.1.6 Operation principleGUID-D7923CEE-68D3-4567-8672-7DB82CC7AC71 v1

Analog scaling ANSCAL function transforms an input signal, for example, from a monitoringfunction or input interface, either through linear or non-linear scaling or interpolation betweenknown relational values for further use.

The overall functionality is defined in the logic diagram as shown in Figure 60. The limitmodule limits the input value, whenever the input value falls below or exceeds the set limits.The chart and equation function blocks scale the output value based on either linear



interpolation and constant extrapolation or as a function of the input based on the constantsdeclared. Use FnType setting to choose between Chart mode and Equation mode.

AnalogScaling_A

input

input

curvePoints

inVal1

inVal2

inVal3

inVal4

inVal5

inVal6

inVal7

inVal8

outVal1

outVal2

outVal3

outVal4

outVal5

outVal6

outVal7

outVal8

Limit

Module

lowLimit

highLimit

F

TdefaultValue

limitScaleValue = defaultValue

output

a

b

c

d

e

f

m

n

output

NOTfunctionType

NOTblock

output

alarm

err

or

warning

Analog Scaling

0

50

100

150

200

0 20 40 60 80 100

input

ou

tpu

t

xfnmedcxbxay

....

AND

inpSenSts

sensorStatusOut

limitScaleValue

NOT

ANDblock

ANDNOTblock

ANDblock

AND

OR

OR

blockFunc

NOT

NOT

NOTAND



Figure 60: Functional overview of ANSCAL

9.1.6.1 Limit moduleGUID-8EF2E0E7-E719-45B2-9844-74CC7483E7FA v1

The limit module limits the input value to the range between the low limit and the high limitvalues specified by the settings LowLimit and HighLimit. The ALARM output is set to highwhenever the input falls below the LowLimit or exceeds the HighLimit value and the outputvalue from limit module is restricted to LowLimit or HighLimit value respectively.

LimitScaleVal setting enables the user a choice to limit the output to scaled value or defaultvalue as defined by setting DefValue, in case the input value exceeds the range defined byLowLimit and HighLimit.

9.1.6.2 Chart functionGUID-2AD060DE-E15D-4B93-95C4-3AF700B702B1 v1

Set FnType to Chart mode to enable this functionality. In this mode, the output is evaluatedbased on linear interpolation and constant extrapolation. The function has eight settableinput/output relation values. These input and output values are specified by the settingsX1,Y1 and X2,Y2 up to X8,Y8. Set CurvePoints to select the required number of input andoutput relations based on the functionality. The functionality provides linear interpolationbetween the points and constant extrapolation beyond the defined points. The minimumsetting points required to define a linear relationship is 2 and is defined to be the minimumvalue for CurvePoints.



The setting points shall be set in such a manner that X2 is greater than X1, X3 isgreater than X2 and so on till X8 is greater than X7. The settings of LowLimitand HighLimit limit the input values. Hence the setting of X1 below LowLimitresults in output value for a limited proportional input value of LowLimit. Sameis the case for the last selected curve points based on the setting CurvePoints.

For example, if the input value is lower than X1 , the output is set to Y1. For every setting n forCurvePoints defined, the output is set to Yn if the input is greater than Xn. For every inputvalue greater than X1 and less than Xn, the output is calculated according to the followingconditions:

Maximum incremental value of i starting from 2 till maximum of n (n ≤ 8):

Xi such that INPUT ≥ Xi and

Xi +1 such that INPUT < Xi+1

1 1(( ) ( )) / ( )i i i i i iINPUT X Y Y X XOUTPUT Y + ++ - × - -=

IECEQUATION-0094 V1 EN-US (Equation 26)

The WARNING output goes high whenever the input signal is outside the compensation rangebut still within the supervision limits. See Table 91.

Range of INPUT signal OPSIGNAL WARNING ALARM

INPUT < LowLimit Y1 or DefValue (as selected byLimitScaleVal)

0 1

LowLimit ≤ INPUT < X1 Y1 1 0

X1 ≤ INPUT ≤ Xn scaled value 0 0

Xn < INPUT ≤ HighLimit Yn 1 0

INPUT > HighLimit Yn or DefValue (as selected byLimitScaleVal)

0 1

9.1.6.3 Equation functionGUID-4A294515-E959-4956-8364-A6D6728A59B7 v1

Set FnType to Equation mode to enable this functionality. In this mode, the output iscalculated as a function of the input based on the constants declared in equation 27:

m n f xy ax bx c d e ×= + + + ×IECEQUATION-0092 V1 EN-US (Equation 27)

Where,

a,b,c,d,e,f,m and n = Constants (settings)

x = Input value

y = Output value

If x is large and m, n, e are not set to small, the output will overflow. Similarly, ifx can be negative then m and n must be natural numbers.

In equation mode, the WARNING output goes high when large output value numbers, typicallyabove 8388607 (absolute), are rounded to the last decimal point.



9.2 Double point input status time monitoring DPISTTIMGUID-7D43CC6A-D4C6-4812-BF8D-87E4ABED0D55 v1

9.2.1 IdentificationGUID-26CEB250-137A-469E-9FC9-3131E79B5200 v1



ANSI/IEEE C37.2 devicenumber

Double point input statustime monitoring

DPISTTIM - -

9.2.2 FunctionalityGUID-69D61F41-58D4-41FC-B487-405B9F43869D v1

The Double point indication status times DPISTTIM function computes the status times of adouble point indication (DPI) by counting the times since the last status changeovers. Theinputs for this function are two boolean signals of a DPI. The outputs provide the time either inmilliseconds, seconds, minutes, or hours from the last status changeover. DPISTTIM functioncan be used for computing the idle times, that is, time since the last open and close operationsof a switch.

9.2.3 Function blockGUID-084A5974-6295-4BFF-8ECD-A572351F0114 v1

DPISTTIMBLOCKBLKFUNCNC*NO*RSTTIMS

OPNTIMECLSDTIME

ALMSTSCNTWRN

IEC12000032-1-vsd


Figure 61: DPISTTIM function block


Table 92: DPISTTIM Input signals




NC BOOLEAN 0 Status input information of NC contact in DPI

NO BOOLEAN 0 Status input information of NO contact in DPI

RSTTIMS BOOLEAN 0 Reset position timers to zero


Table 93: DPISTTIM Output signals


OPNTIME REAL Time count from previous closed status

CLSDTIME REAL Time count from previous open status

ALMSTS BOOLEAN Alarm for invalid status of input NO and input NC

CNTWRN BOOLEAN Warning for output having alarm stage since last update




Table 94: DPISTTIM Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


TimeToAlm 0.000 - 100.000 - 0.001 0.000 Time setting to declare invalid orfaulty status alarm

ModeStsCntSenErr Reset to defaultFreeze countersKeep counting

- - Reset to default Setting mode for status countersduring sensor error condition

DefValue -999999.0 -999999.0

- 1.0 0.0 Default value to be set upon resetdepending on the errStsCountMode

TimeScale milliSecondsSecondsMinutesHours

- - milliSeconds Setting for output times scaleselection

9.2.6 Operation principleGUID-C6669B23-377E-4B59-86F4-F6CD8AC81AFF v1

The Double point indication status times DPISTTIM function computes the status times of adouble point indication (DPI) by counting the times since the last status changeovers. Theinputs for this function are two boolean signals of a DPI. DPISTTIM function is intended forcomputing the idle times (that is, time since the last open and close operations) of a switch.

The function interprets DPI input combinations as switch status according to Table 95.

Table 95: Input status combination in DPISTTIM

NO NC Status

0 0 Invalid

0 1 Open

1 0 Closed

1 1 Invalid

Invalid input status combinations will generate an alarm or warning if applied for longer than agrace period defined by TimeToAlm. ALMSTS directly indicates detection of an invalid inputstatus. CNTWRN indicates that an invalid condition has been detected even though theoutputs show valid time count values; it will be reset on a valid status transition.

The outputs provide the elapsed time from the last status changeover in the unit specified byTimeScale (milliseconds, seconds, minutes, or hours). OPNTIME gives the time since the lastclosed → open transition; CLSDTIME gives the time since the last open → closed transition.

A rising edge (0 to 1 change) on the RSTTIMS input will reset both OPNTIME and CLSDTIME to0.0. The setting ModeStsCntSenErr controls the behavior of the internal counters and theoutputs when an invalid input status is detected for longer than TimeToAlm.

• If ‘Reset to default’ is selected then both counters will be reset to DefValue.• If ‘Freeze counters’ is selected the counter outputs are frozen at the current values.

However, internally the counters continue as per the previous valid input status. If theinput status is restored to the same valid status, the outputs are re-activated to show the



updated counter values. If the input status is restored to the opposite valid status thenthe counters behave as during a regular change between valid statuses.

• If ‘Keep counting’ is selected the counters continue counting the last valid status.

Table 96 summarizes the behavior of the DPISTTIM function block.

Table 96: DPISTTIM truth table

Inputstatus

Previous inputstatus

ModeStsCntSenErr

Input statusbeforepreviousinvalid

OPNTIME CLSDTIME ALMSTS CNTWRN

Open Closed (Any) - Time countfrom lastvalid closed→ openstatuschange

0.0 0 0

Invalid Freezecounters

Open Time countfrom lastvalid closed→ openstatuschange

0 1

Keep counting

Freezecounters

Closed Time countfrom lastinvalid →openstatuschange

0 1

Keep counting

Reset todefault

(Any) Time countfrom lastinvalid →openstatuschange

0 0

Closed Open (Any) - 0.0 Time countfrom lastvalid open →closed statuschange

0 0

Invalid Freezecounters

Open Time countfrom lastinvalid →closed statuschange

0 1

Keep counting

Freezecounters

Closed Time countfrom lastvalid open →closed statuschange

0 1

Keep counting

Reset todefault

(Any) Time countfrom lastinvalid →closed statuschange

0 0




Inputstatus

Previous inputstatus

ModeStsCntSenErr

Input statusbeforepreviousinvalid

OPNTIME CLSDTIME ALMSTS CNTWRN

Invalid Open Freezecounters

- OPNTIMEvaluefrozen atthe time ofdetectinginvalidstatus

0.0 1 1

Closed - 0.0 CLSDTIMEvalue frozenat the timeof detectinginvalidstatus

1 1

Open Keep counting - Time countfrom lastvalid closed→ openstatuschange

0.0 1 1

Closed - 0.0 Time countfrom lastvalid open →closed statuschange

1 1

(Any) Reset todefault

- DefValue DefValue 1 0

Once started, the counters will internally continue the count as per the previous valid inputstatus even through a power cycle of the IED.

9.3 Binary status to analog conversion BINSTSANGUID-DA82632E-9AA4-48AA-B156-7D9B47B69F62 v1

9.3.1 IdentificationGUID-24C267F0-E961-4524-B6F5-0AE7A24A1804 v1




Binary status signal to analogconversion

BINSTSAN - -

9.3.2 FunctionalityGUID-78A21286-3731-40C3-9733-1064149C4A0C v1

The binary status signal to analog conversion BINSTSAN function evaluates the equivalentanalog value for a combination of eight binary input signals that show the status levels ofanalog quantities. The output signal value is used for further processing in other functions.

There are three modes which can be used to calculate output signals:



• 1 of n: only one of the inputs can be set to high. If more than one input is high, an error isdetected and the output value is set to the default output.

• Incremental: inputs can go high sequentially and the output value is a sum of the scaledinput values. If the inputs are not going high sequentially, an error is detected as theinputs are invalid and the output value is set to the default output.

• Summation: one or more inputs are high in a random order and the output is thecumulative sum of the scaled input values.

At least one input must be high for a valid output. Else, NOINP signal is set toTRUE and the output value is set to the default output.

9.3.3 Function blockGUID-6AAE3296-50DA-44D9-998F-E6BA6487CCE7 v1

BINSTSANBLOCKBLKFUNCINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8

NOINPERROR

ANALOUT




Table 97: BINSTSAN Input signals




INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 status









Table 98: BINSTSAN Output signals


NOINP BOOLEAN Signal for input not detected

ERROR BOOLEAN Signal for indicating wrong combination of inputs detected

ANALOUT REAL Analog output after conversion




Table 99: BINSTSAN Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


Mode 1 of nIncrementalSummation

- - 1 of n Mode selection

DefValue -999999.999 -999999.999

- 0.001 0.000 Default Value

InputScale1 -999999.999 -999999.999

- 0.001 0.000 Equivalent output for input status 1

InputScale2 -999999.999 -999999.999


InputScale3 -999999.999 -999999.999


InputScale4 -999999.999 -999999.999


InputScale5 -999999.999 -999999.999


InputScale6 -999999.999 -999999.999


InputScale7 -999999.999 -999999.999


InputScale8 -999999.999 -999999.999


9.3.6 Operation principleGUID-5109DC7C-CA16-46C3-B376-F57F820ECDB7 v1

The binary status signal to analog conversion BINSTSAN function evaluates the equivalentanalog value for a combination of eight binary input signals that shows the status levels ofanalog quantities. The output signal value is used for further processing in other functions.

The overall functionality is defined in the logic diagram as shown in Figure 63.



INPUT1

Logic

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4

INPUT5

INPUT6

INPUT7

INPUT8

Inpu

tSca

le1

Inpu

tSca

le2

Inpu

tSca

le3

Inpu

tSca

le8

Inpu

tSca

le7

Inpu

tSca

le6

Inpu

tSca

le5

Inpu

tSca

le4

Mod

e

NOINP

ERROR

ANALOUT


BLOCK

BLKFUNC


Figure 63: Functional overview of BINSTSAN

BINSTSAN functionality is explained using an example, where the status switches of an analogsource are connected to BINSTSAN function and is configured for input scaling a shown inTable 100.

If the output value exceeds 8388607, an error is detected and the ERRORoutput is set to TRUE.

Table 100: BINSTSAN example settings

Input InputScale

1 5

2 10

3 20

4 40

5 80

6 160

7 320

8 640

9.3.6.1 Calculating output values using 1 of n modeGUID-29B09528-C9BE-43A2-9964-79C2385B0F55 v1

Set Mode to 1 of n to enable this functionality. In this mode, only one of the inputs can go highat any given time. If more than one input goes high, an error is detected and the ERROR outputis set TRUE. If none of the inputs are high, the input is not detected and the NOINP output isset to TRUE. The output is set to the default output if ERROR and/or NOINP outputs are TRUE.The output evaluated as per the setting of input mode is as shown in Table 101.



Table 101: BINSTSAN setting mode 1 of n

Input Status

Mode - 1 of n

1 1 0 0 0 0

2 0 1 0 0 0

3 0 0 0 0 0

4 0 0 0 0 1

5 0 0 1 0 0

6 0 0 0 0 0

7 0 0 0 0 0

8 0 0 0 1 1

Output 5 10 80 640 DefValue

9.3.6.2 Calculating output values using incremental modeGUID-A61587EE-8BBB-487E-BB3C-FDD692FDC160 v1

Set Mode to Incremental to enable this functionality. In this mode, inputs are set to highsequentially starting with INPUT1, and the output value is a sum of the scaled input values. Ifthe inputs are not set to high sequentially, an error is detected as the inputs are invalid and theERROR output is set TRUE. If none of the inputs are high, the input is not detected and theNOINP output is set to TRUE. The output is set to the default output if ERROR and/or NOINPoutputs are TRUE. The output evaluated as per the setting of input mode is as shown in Table102.

Table 102: BINSTSAN setting mode Incremental

Input Status

Mode - Incremental

1 1 1 1 1 1

2 0 1 1 1 1

3 0 0 1 1 0

4 0 0 1 1 1

5 0 0 1 1 1

6 0 0 1 1 1

7 0 0 1 1 1

8 0 0 0 1 1

Output 5 15 635 1275 DefValue

9.3.6.3 Calculating output values using summation modeGUID-61946494-15BC-49D6-9C21-7BA84AA0E6A6 v1

Set Mode to Summation to enable this functionality. In this mode, one or more inputs can behigh in a random order and the output is the cumulative sum of the scaled input values. If noneof the inputs are high, the input is not detected and the NOINP output is set to TRUE. Theoutput is set to the default output if ERROR and/or NOINP outputs are TRUE. The outputevaluated as per the setting of input mode is as shown in Table 103.



Table 103: BINSTSAN setting mode Summation

Input Status

Mode - Summation

1 1 0 1 0 1

2 0 1 1 0 1

3 0 0 0 0 0

4 0 0 0 0 1

5 0 0 0 0 1

6 0 0 0 0 1

7 0 0 0 0 1

8 0 0 0 1 1

Output 5 10 15 640 1255



Section 10 Logic

10.1 Configurable logic blocks

10.1.1 Standard configurable logic blocks

10.1.1.1 FunctionalityD0E6709T201305151403 v2

A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the configuration to thespecific application needs.

• OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.

• PULSETIMER function block outputs a pulse of settable duration, triggered by a positive-going edge on its input.

• GATE function block passes a signal from the input to the output, depending on itssetting.

• XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

• LOOPDELAY function block is used to delay the input signal one execution cycle.

• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal,with settable time delay.

• AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted

• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputsrespectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory settingcontrols if the block's output should reset or return to the state it was, after a powerinterruption. The SET input has priority if both SET and RESET inputs are activesimultaneously.

• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputsrespectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory settingcontrols if the block's output should reset or return to the state it was, after a powerinterruption. The RESET input has priority if both SET and RESET are activesimultaneously.

10.1.1.2 OR function block

IdentificationD0E6881T201305151403 v1

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 10Logic





OR Function block OR - -

FunctionalityD0E7110T201305151403 v1

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. TheOR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The outputsignal is 1 if at least one input signal is 1.

Function blockD0E6788T201305151403 v1

ORINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6

OUTNOUT


Figure 64: OR function block

SignalsD0E7308T201305151403 v1

Table 104: OR Input signals


INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1






D0E7309T201305151403 v1

Table 105: OR Output signals


OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

SettingsD0E6904T201305151403 v1


10.1.1.3 Inverter function block INVERTER





Inverter function block INVERTER - -

Section 10 1MRK 511 275-UEN CLogic



INVERTERINPUT OUT


Figure 65: INVERTER function block

SignalsD0E7277T201305151403 v1

Table 106: INVERTER Input signals


INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

D0E7278T201305151403 v1

Table 107: INVERTER Output signals



SettingsD0E6904T201305151403 v1


10.1.1.4 PULSETIMER function block





PULSETIMER function block PULSETIMER - -


Triggered by a positive-going edge (logical 0 to 1 transition) on its input, PULSETIMER outputsa pulse of settable duration. While the output is on, further transitions on the input signal willbe ignored.


PULSETIMERINPUT OUT


Figure 66: PULSETIMER function block

SignalsD0E7315T201305151403 v1

Table 108: PULSETIMER Input signals



D0E7316T201305151403 v1



Table 109: PULSETIMER Output signals



SettingsD0E7317T201305151403 v1

Table 110: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)


t 0.000 -90000.000

s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

10.1.1.5 Controllable gate function block GATE





Controllable gate function block GATE - -


The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input to theoutput or not, depending on the setting.


GATEINPUT OUT


Figure 67: GATE function block

SignalsD0E7274T201305151403 v1

Table 111: GATE Input signals



D0E7275T201305151403 v1

Table 112: GATE Output signals



SettingsD0E7276T201305151403 v1

Table 113: GATE Group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn




10.1.1.6 Exclusive OR function block XOR





Exclusive OR function block XOR - -


The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with booleanvariables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The outputsignal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.


XORINPUT1INPUT2

OUTNOUT


Figure 68: XOR function block

SignalsD0E7313T201305151403 v1

Table 114: XOR Input signals




D0E7314T201305151403 v1

Table 115: XOR Output signals




SettingsD0E6904T201305151403 v1


10.1.1.7 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAYD0E6905T201305151403 v1

D0E6906T201305151403 v1




Logic loop delay function block LOOPDELAY - -

D0E6907T201305151403 v1

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the input signalone execution cycle.




LOOPDELAYINPUT OUT


Figure 69: LOOPDELAY function block

SignalsD0E7279T201305151403 v1

Table 116: LOOPDELAY Input signals



D0E7307T201305151403 v1

Table 117: LOOPDELAY Output signals


OUT BOOLEAN Output signal, signal is delayed one execution cycle

SettingsD0E6908T201305151403 v1


10.1.1.8 Timer function block TIMERSET





Timer function block TIMERSET - -


The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the inputsignal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

time

Input

On

Off

t

t

t

t

D0E12352T201305151403-1-en.vsd

D0E12352T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 70: TIMERSET Status diagram




TIMERSETINPUT ON

OFF


Figure 71: TIMERSET function block

SignalsD0E7310T201305151403 v1

Table 118: TIMERSET Input signals



D0E7311T201305151403 v1

Table 119: TIMERSET Output signals


ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed

OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

SettingsD0E7312T201305151403 v1

Table 120: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


t 0.000 -90000.000

s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

10.1.1.9 AND function block





AND function block AND - -


The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. TheAND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. Theoutput signal is 1 if all input signals are 1.

Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just use therequired number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT has a defaultvalue 0 initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the wrongexecution order.




ANDINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4

OUTNOUT


Figure 72: AND function block

SignalsD0E7261T201305151403 v1

Table 121: AND Input signals






D0E7262T201305151403 v1

Table 122: AND Output signals




SettingsD0E6904T201305151403 v1


10.1.1.10 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY





Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY - -


The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an outputfrom two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one isinverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return tothe state it had before or if it will be reset. For a Set-Reset flip-flop, SET input has higherpriority over RESET input.



Table 123: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRMEMORY) function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT

1 0 1 0

0 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

0 0 Lastvalue

Invertedlast value


SRMEMORYSETRESET

OUTNOUT


Figure 73: SRMEMORY function block

SignalsD0E7304T201305151403 v1

Table 124: SRMEMORY Input signals


SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set

RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

D0E7305T201305151403 v1

Table 125: SRMEMORY Output signals




SettingsD0E7306T201305151403 v1

Table 126: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)


Memory OffOn

- - On Operating mode of the memoryfunction

10.1.1.11 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY





Reset-set with memory functionblock

RSMEMORY - -




The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that canreset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has twooutputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a powerinterruption will return to the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop,RESET input has higher priority over SET input.

Table 127: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT

0 0 Lastvalue

Inverted lastvalue

0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1

1 1 0 1


RSMEMORYSETRESET

OUTNOUT


Figure 74: RSMEMORY function block

SignalsD0E7298T201305151403 v1

Table 128: RSMEMORY Input signals


SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set

RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

D0E7299T201305151403 v1

Table 129: RSMEMORY Output signals




SettingsD0E7300T201305151403 v1

Table 130: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)


Memory OffOn

- - On Operating mode of the memoryfunction



D0E7189T201305151403 v1

Table 131: Configurable logic blocks

Logic block Quantitywith cycletime

Range or value Accuracy

5 ms 20 ms 100 ms

AND 60 60 160 - -

OR 60 60 160 - -

XOR 10 10 20 - -

INVERTER 30 30 80 - -

SRMEMORY 10 10 20 - -

RSMEMORY 10 10 20 - -

GATE 10 10 20 - -

PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for20 ms cycle time

TIMERSET 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for20 ms cycle time

LOOPDELAY 10 10 20

10.2 Fixed signals FXDSIGN





Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -


The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used inthe configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to acertain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string types ofsignals are available.


FXDSIGNOFFON

INTZEROINTONE

INTALONEREALZERO

STRNULLZEROSMPL

GRP_OFF

IEC09000037.vsdD0E13012T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 75: FXDSIGN function block



10.2.4 SignalsD0E7259T201305151403 v1

Table 132: FXDSIGN Output signals


OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off

ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on

INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero

INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one

INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones

REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero

STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters

ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample

GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

10.2.5 SettingsD0E7260T201305151403 v1

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IEDManager (PCM600).


There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:

• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

10.3 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I





Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

10.3.2 FunctionalityBoolean 16 to Integer conversion B16ID0E5278T201305151403 v1

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical)signals into an integer.




B16IBLOCKIN1IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN7IN8IN9IN10IN11IN12IN13IN14IN15IN16

OUT


Figure 76: B16I function block

10.3.4 SignalsD0E5610T201305151403 v1

Table 133: B16I Input signals



IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
















D0E5612T201305151403 v1

Table 134: B16I Output signals


OUT INTEGER Output value



10.3.5 SettingsD0E4075T201305151403 v1

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IEDManager (PCM600)

10.3.6 Monitored dataD0E5611T201305151403 v1

Table 135: B16I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OUT INTEGER - - Output value


Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16 binary(logical) signals into an integer, with IN1 mapped to the least significant bit. The BLOCK inputwill freeze the output at the last value.

10.4 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic noderepresentation B16IFCVI





Boolean 16 to integer conversionwith logic node representation

B16IFCVI - -


Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function B16IFCVI is used totransform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will freeze theoutput at the last value.




B16IFCVIBLOCKIN1IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN7IN8IN9IN10IN11IN12IN13IN14IN15IN16

OUT


Figure 77: B16IFCVI function block

10.4.4 SignalsD0E5723T201305151403 v1

Table 136: B16IFCVI Input signals



















D0E5725T201305151403 v1

Table 137: B16IFCVI Output signals


OUT INTEGER Output value



10.4.5 SettingsD0E4076T201305151403 v1



Table 138: B16IFCVI Monitored data


OUT INTEGER - - Output value


Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI) is used totransform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK input will freeze theoutput at the last value.

10.5 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A





Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A - -


Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16A is used to transform an integer into a set of 16binary (logical) signals.


IB16ABLOCKINP

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16


Figure 78: IB16A function block



10.5.4 SignalsD0E5613T201305151403 v1

Table 139: IB16A Input signals



INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

D0E5614T201305151403 v1

Table 140: IB16A Output signals


OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
















10.5.5 SettingsD0E4794T201305151403 v1



Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into a set of16 binary (logical) signals, with the least significant bit mapped to OUT1. IB16A function isdesigned for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputsat the last value.



10.6 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic noderepresentation IB16FCVB




Integer to boolean 16 conversionwith logic node representation

IB16FCVB - -


Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function IB16FCVB is used totransform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.

IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 when the operator position inputPSTO is in position remote. The block input will freeze the output at the last value.


IB16FCVBBLOCKPSTO

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16


Figure 79: IB16FCVB function block

10.6.4 SignalsD0E5615T201305151403 v1

Table 141: IB16FCVB Input signals



PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection



D0E5616T201305151403 v1

Table 142: IB16FCVB Output signals


















10.6.5 SettingsD0E4077T201305151403 v1



Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is used totransform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16FCVB function can receive aninteger from a station computer – for example, over IEC 61850. The BLOCK input will freeze thelogical outputs at the last value.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number can bewritten to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in ”Off” or ”Local”, then no change is appliedto the outputs.



166

Section 11 Monitoring

11.1 Measurements


Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting tothe local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850.The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power,currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmissionand distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overviewof the present status of the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing andcommissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation andconnection of instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodiccomparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the properoperation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verifyproper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit,high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, themeasured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise inthe inputs. There are no interconnections regarding any settings or parameters, neitherbetween functions nor between signals within each function.

Zero clampings are handled by ZeroDb for each signal separately for each of the functions. Forexample, the zero clamping of U12 is handled by ULZeroDb in VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 ishandled by ILZeroDb in CMMXU.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level whenchange in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since thelast time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based onperiodic reporting.

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power• PF: power factor• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude• I: phase current amplitude• F: power system frequency

The output values are displayed in the local HMI under Main menu/Tests/Function status/Monitoring/CVMMXN/Outputs

The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical quantities:

• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) (VMMXU,

VNMMXU)

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 11Monitoring


It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% ofrated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM)and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and angle).

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamentalfrequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. Themeasured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or,averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

11.1.2 Measurements CVMMXN

11.1.2.1 IdentificationD0E5622T201305151403 v1




Measurements CVMMXN

P, Q, S, I, U, f

D0E12769T201305151403 V1 EN-US

-

11.1.2.2 Function blockD0E5617T201305151403 v1

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and thelogic configuration made in PCM600.

CVMMXNI3P*U3P*

SS_RANGE

P_INSTP

P_RANGEQ_INST

QQ_RANGE

PFPF_RANGE

ILAGILEAD

UU_RANGE

II_RANGE

FF_RANGE

IEC08000222.vsdD0E12944T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 80: CVMMXN function block

Section 11 1MRK 511 275-UEN CMonitoring


11.1.2.3 SignalsD0E5935T201305151403 v1

Table 143: CVMMXN Input signals


I3P GROUPSIGNAL

- Three phase group signal for current inputs

U3P GROUPSIGNAL

- Three phase group signal for voltage inputs

D0E5936T201305151403 v1

Table 144: CVMMXN Output signals


S REAL Apparent power magnitude of deadband value

S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent power range

P_INST REAL Active power

P REAL Active power magnitude of deadband value

P_RANGE INTEGER Active power range

Q_INST REAL Reactive power

Q REAL Reactive power magnitude of deadband value

Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive power range

PF REAL Power factor magnitude of deadband value

PF_RANGE INTEGER Power factor range

ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage

ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage

U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value

U_RANGE INTEGER Calcuated voltage range

I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value

I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range

F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value

F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range



11.1.2.4 SettingsD0E5937T201305151403 v1

Table 145: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


GlobalBaseSel 1 - 6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global BaseValue groups

Mode L1, L2, L3AronePos SeqL1L2L2L3L3L1L1L2L3

- - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current andvoltage

PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale powercalculations

PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shiftbetween measured I & U

k 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for powermeasurement

SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase

SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase

SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase

SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase

SRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband

- - Cyclic Reporting type

PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase

PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase

PRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase

QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase

QRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value

PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value

PFRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase

UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase

URepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase

IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase





IRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value

FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value

FrRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


Table 146: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)


SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% ofrange

SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase

SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase

PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase

SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range(common for all limits)

PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase

PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase

PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase

PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range(common for all limits)

QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase

QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase

QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase

QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase

QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range(common for all limits)

UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of Ubase

PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of Ibase

PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)

PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)

PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)

PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)





PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range(common for all limits)

UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase

UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase

ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase

ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase

ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range(common for all limits)

IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase

IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase

ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase

ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase

ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range(common for all limits)

FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)

FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)

FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)

FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)

FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range(common for all limits)

UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltageat 5% of Ur



IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate currentat 5% of Ir



IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% ofIr


IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100%of Ir



11.1.2.5 Monitored dataD0E5962T201305151403 v1

Table 147: CVMMXN Monitored data


S REAL - MVA Apparent power magnitude ofdeadband value

P REAL - MW Active power magnitude of deadbandvalue

Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power magnitude ofdeadband value

PF REAL - - Power factor magnitude of deadbandvalue

U REAL - kV Calculated voltage magnitude ofdeadband value

I REAL - A Calculated current magnitude ofdeadband value

F REAL - Hz System frequency magnitude ofdeadband value

11.1.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU





Phase current measurement CMMXU

I

D0E12771T201305151403 V1 EN-US

-



CMMXUI3P IL1

IL1RANGIL1ANGL

IL2IL2RANGIL2ANGL

IL3IL3RANGIL3ANGL

D0E12953T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 81: CMMXU function block



11.1.3.3 SignalsD0E5971T201305151403 v1

Table 148: CMMXU Input signals


I3P GROUPSIGNAL


D0E5972T201305151403 v1

Table 149: CMMXU Output signals


IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude

IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range

IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle







11.1.3.4 SettingsD0E5973T201305151403 v1

Table 150: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn



ILDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

ILMax 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value

ILRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband

- - Dead band Reporting type

ILAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

Table 151: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)


ILZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

ILHiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)

ILHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)

ILLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)

ILLowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)





ILMin 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value

ILLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits






IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100%of Ir


Table 152: CMMXU Monitored data


IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude

IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle





11.1.4 Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU





Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU

U

D0E12775T201305151403 V1 EN-US

-






VMMXUU3P* UL12

UL12RANGUL12ANGL

UL23UL23RANGUL23ANGL

UL31UL31RANGUL31ANGL

D0E12947T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 82: VMMXU function block

11.1.4.3 SignalsD0E5986T201305151403 v1

Table 153: VMMXU Input signals


U3P GROUPSIGNAL


D0E5988T201305151403 v1

Table 154: VMMXU Output signals


UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude

UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range

UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle





UL31RANG INTEGER UL31Amplitude range


11.1.4.4 SettingsD0E5989T201305151403 v2

Table 155: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn



ULDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

ULMax 0 - 4000000 V 1 170000 Maximum value

ULRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


ULAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s



Table 156: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)


ULZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

ULHiHiLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 160000 High High limit (physical value)

ULHiLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 150000 High limit (physical value)

ULLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 125000 Low limit (physical value)

ULLowLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 115000 Low Low limit (physical value)

ULMin 0 - 4000000 V 1 0 Minimum value

ULLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits


Table 157: VMMXU Monitored data


UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude

UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle





11.1.5 Current sequence component measurement CMSQI





Current sequence componentmeasurement

CMSQI

I1, I2, I0

D0E12777T201305151403 V1 EN-US

-






CMSQII3P* 3I0

3I0RANG3I0ANGL

I1I1RANGI1ANGL

I2I2RANGI2ANGL

D0E12941T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 83: CMSQI function block

11.1.5.3 SignalsD0E5990T201305151403 v1

Table 158: CMSQI Input signals


I3P GROUPSIGNAL


D0E6040T201305151403 v1

Table 159: CMSQI Output signals


3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude

3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range

3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle

I1 REAL I1 Amplitude

I1RANG INTEGER I1Amplitude range

I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle

I2 REAL I2 Amplitude

I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range

I2ANGL REAL I2Angle

11.1.5.4 SettingsD0E6041T201305151403 v1

Table 160: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

3I0Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value

3I0Max 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 Maximum value

3I0RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits





3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

I1Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value

I1Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value

I1RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

I2Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value

I2Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value

I2RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits

I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

Table 161: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)


3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

3I0HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3600 High High limit (physical value)

3I0HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 High limit (physical value)

3I0LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)

3I0LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)

I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

I1HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)

I1HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)

I1LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)

I1LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)

I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits

I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

I2HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)

I2HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)

I2LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)

I2LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)




Table 162: CMSQI Monitored data


3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude

3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle

I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude

I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle

I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude

I2ANGL REAL - deg I2Angle

11.1.6 Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI





Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI

U1, U2, U0

D0E12773T201305151403 V1 EN-US

-




VMSQIU3P* 3U0

3U0RANG3U0ANGL

U1U1RANGU1ANGL

U2U2RANGU2ANGL

D0E12950T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 84: VMSQI function block

11.1.6.3 SignalsD0E6042T201305151403 v1

Table 163: VMSQI Input signals


U3P GROUPSIGNAL




D0E6044T201305151403 v1

Table 164: VMSQI Output signals


3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude

3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range

3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle

U1 REAL U1 Amplitude

U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range

U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle

U2 REAL U2 Amplitude

U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range

U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle

11.1.6.4 SettingsD0E6045T201305151403 v1

Table 165: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

3U0Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value

3U0Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 318000 Maximum value

3U0RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits

3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

U1Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value

U1Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value

U1RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

U2Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value

U2Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value





U2RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits

U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

Table 166: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)


3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

3U0HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 288000 High High limit (physical value)

3U0HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 258000 High limit (physical value)

3U0LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 213000 Low limit (physical value)

3U0LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 198000 Low Low limit (physical value)

U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

U1HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)

U1HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)

U1LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)

U1LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)

U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits

U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping

U2HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)

U2HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)

U2LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)

U2LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)


Table 167: VMSQI Monitored data


3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude

3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle

U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude

U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle

U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude

U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle



11.1.7 Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU





Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU

U

D0E12775T201305151403 V1 EN-US

-




VNMMXUU3P* UL1

UL1RANGUL1ANGL

UL2UL2RANGUL2ANGL

UL3UL3RANGUL3ANGL

D0E12956T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 85: VNMMXU function block

11.1.7.3 SignalsD0E6046T201305151403 v1

Table 168: VNMMXU Input signals


U3P GROUPSIGNAL


D0E6048T201305151403 v1

Table 169: VNMMXU Output signals


UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value


UL1ANGL REAL UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value









11.1.7.4 SettingsD0E6049T201305151403 v2

Table 170: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn

- - Off Operation Mode On / Off


UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

UMax 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value

URepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


ULimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and iscommon for all limits

UAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

Table 171: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)


UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% ofrange

UHiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)

UHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)

ULowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)

ULowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)

UMin 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value


Table 172: VNMMXU Monitored data


UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reportedvalue

UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of reportedvalue

UL2 REAL - kV UL2 Amplitude, magnitude ofreported value


UL3 REAL - kV UL3 Amplitude, magnitude ofreported value





11.1.8.1 Measurement supervisionD0E6028T201305151403 v1

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and furtherprocess information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. Thenumber of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-inoptions.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle referenceD0E6271T201305151403 v1

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General settingparameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference. The PhaseAngleRef is set in local HMI under:Configuration/Analog modules/Reference channel service values.

Zero point clampingD0E6117T201305151403 v1

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in theinput signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where Xequals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that thismeasurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clampingused for the measurement values within CVMMXN.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantityD0E6118T201305151403 v1

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block bymeans of four defined operating thresholds, see Figure 86. The monitoring has two differentmodes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-highlimit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values

• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) orLow-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in Figure 86.



en05000657.vsd

X_RANGE= 1

X_RANGE = 3

X_RANGE=0

Hysteresis

High-high limit

High limit

Low limit

Low-low limit

X_RANGE=2

X_RANGE=4

Y

tX_RANGE=0

D0E11991T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 86: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The outputsignal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limitexceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to ameasurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binarysignals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to Figure 86.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between theoperating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channelseparately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantityD0E6125T201305151403 v1

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurementis continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to thehigher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modesare available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reportingD0E6126T201305151403 v1

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp).The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-bandreporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measuredvalue passes any of the defined threshold limits.



en05000500.vsd

Valu

e 1

Y

t

Valu

e 2

Valu

e 3

Valu

e 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

Valu

e 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y5

Value Reported Value Reported

Y3Y4

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

D0E12000T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 87: Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervisionD0E6129T201305151403 v1

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is largerthan the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the measuring channelreports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimumnecessary. Figure 88 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. Thepicture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a timeinterval of one execution cycle from each other.



99000529.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValue Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

DYDY

DYDY

DYDY

Value Reported

D0E12009T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 88: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it.The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ±ΔYset limits.

Integral dead-band reportingD0E6136T201305151403 v1

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit(XDbRepInt), Figure 89, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision isshown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluatedwith a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in Figure 89 serves as a basic value for further measurement. Adifference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and ismultiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integralvalues are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that isreported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3,Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with smallvariations that can last for relatively long periods.



99000530.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Y1

ValueReported

A1Y2

ValueReported

Y3

Y4

AValueReported

A2

Y5A3

A4A5 A7

A6

ValueReported

A2 >=pre-set value

A1 >=pre-set valueA >=

pre-set valueA3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=pre-set value

D0E12012T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 89: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

11.1.8.2 Measurements CVMMXN

Mode of operationD0E6143T201305151403 v1

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltageinput in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculateabove mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputsconnected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of thenine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options aresummarized in the following table:

Set valueforparameter“Mode”

Formula used for complex,three-phase power calculation

Formula used for voltageand current magnitudecalculation

Comment

1 L1, L2, L3 * * *1 1 2 2 3 3= × + × + ×L L L L L LS U I U I U I

D0E11755T201305151403 V1 EN-US

1 2 3

1 2 3

( ) / 3

( ) / 3

= + +

= + +

L L L

L L L

U U U U

I I I ID0E11757T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Used when three phase-to-earth voltages are available

2 Arone* *

1 2 1 2 3 3= × - ×L L L L L LS U I U I

D0E11759T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation 28)

1 2 2 3

1 3

( ) / 2

( ) / 2

= +

= +

L L L L

L L

U U U

I I I

D0E11761T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation29)

Used when three twophase-to-phase voltagesare available

3 PosSeq*3= × ×PosSeq PosSeqS U I

D0E11763T201305151403 V1 EN-US(Equation 30)

3= ×

=

PosSeq

PosSeq

U U

I I


Used when onlysymmetrical three phasepower shall be measured




Set valueforparameter“Mode”

Formula used for complex,three-phase power calculation

Formula used for voltageand current magnitudecalculation

Comment

4 L1L2* *

1 2 1 2( )= × -L L L LS U I ID0E11896T201305151403 V1 EN-US(Equation 32)

1 2

1 2( ) / 2

=

= +

L L

L L

U U

I I I


Used when only UL1L2phase-to-phase voltage isavailable

5 L2L3* *

2 3 2 3( )= × -L L L LS U I ID0E11900T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation34)

2 3

2 3( ) / 2

=

= +

L L

L L

U U

I I I



6 L3L1* *

3 1 3 1( )= × -L L L LS U I ID0E11904T201305151403 V1 EN-US(Equation 36)

3 1

3 1( ) / 2

=

= +

L L

L L

U U

I I I



7 L1*

1 13= × ×L LS U ID0E11908T201305151403 V1 EN-US(Equation 38)

1

1

3= ×

=

L

L

U U

I I


Used when only UL1 phase-to-earth voltage isavailable

8 L2*

2 23= × ×L LS U ID0E11912T201305151403 V1 EN-US(Equation 40)

2

2

3= ×

=

L

L

U U

I I



9 L3*

3 33= × ×L LS U ID0E11916T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation 42)

3

3

3= ×

=

L

L

U U

I I



* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurementfunction calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9 itcalculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fullysymmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF arecalculated in accordance with the following formulas:

Re( )=P SD0E11920T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation 44)



Im( )=Q SD0E11922T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation 45)

2 2= = +S S P Q


cos PPF Sj= =


Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function areprovided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binaryoutput signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binaryoutput signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The outputsignal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputsD0E6257T201305151403 v1

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get class0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constantand linear in between, see example in Figure 90.

D0E12329T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 90: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and theamplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.



Low pass filteringD0E6228T201305151403 v1

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible tointroduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I and powerfactor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measuredquantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

(1 )Old CalculatedX k X k X= × + - ×D0E11928T201305151403 V1 EN-US (Equation 48)

where:

X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function

XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediatelygiven out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to valuebigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separatelyfor every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clampingD0E6231T201305151403 v1

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is notpresent, the amplitude level for current and voltage measurement is forced to zero. Wheneither current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values forpower (P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurementsupervision functionality, included in the CVMMXN function, is using these values the zeroclamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero pointclamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").

Compensation facilityD0E6236T201305151403 v1

In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete measurementchain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is possible to perform onsite calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constantwhich is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparentpower S. This constant is set as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value1.000) and angle (setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default valuesfor these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculatedvalue (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operatingrange (for example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform thiscalibration it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.

DirectionalityD0E6237T201305151403 v1

CTStartPoint defines if the CTs earthing point is located towards or from the protected objectunder observation. If everything is properly set power is always measured towards protectionobject.



Busbar

Protected Object

P Q


IED

D0E12357T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 91: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flowfrom the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when theyflow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the powertransformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually oppositedirectional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easilyachieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting theactive and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected objecttowards the busbar.

FrequencyD0E6242T201305151403 v1

Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from thepre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.

11.1.8.3 Phase current measurement CMMXUD0E6243T201305151403 v1

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase currentinput in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can becalibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs andIEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of ratedcurrent. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, seeFigure 90.

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude outputhas a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is aninteger in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".



11.1.8.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXUD0E6252T201305151403 v1

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration toolto be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the outputsand each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). Thesupervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurementsupervision".

11.1.8.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQID0E6266T201305151403 v1

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage(VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG, arecalculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Inputsignals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs(voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a correspondingsupervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, seesection "Measurement supervision".

11.1.9 Technical dataD0E6038T201305151403 v1

Table 173: CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage (0.1-1.5) ×Ur ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Connected current (0.2-4.0) × Ir ± 0.5% of Ir at I £ Ir± 0.5% of I at I > Ir

Active power, P 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir

± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Reactive power, Q 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir


Apparent power, S 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir


Apparent power, S Threephase settings

cos phi = 1 ± 0.5% of S at S > Sr± 0.5% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

Power factor, cos (φ) 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

< 0.02

11.2 Event Counter CNTGGIO





Event counter CNTGGIO

D0E12340T201305151403 V1EN-US

-




Event counter CNTGGIO has six counters which are used for storing the number of times eachcounter input has been activated.


CNTGGIOBLOCKCOUNTER1COUNTER2COUNTER3COUNTER4COUNTER5COUNTER6RESET

VALUE1VALUE2VALUE3VALUE4VALUE5VALUE6


Figure 92: CNTGGIO function block

11.2.4 SignalsD0E6534T201305151403 v1

Table 174: CNTGGIO Input signals



COUNTER1 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 1






RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

D0E6536T201305151403 v1

Table 175: CNTGGIO Output signals


VALUE1 INTEGER Output of counter 1






11.2.5 SettingsD0E6537T201305151403 v1

Table 176: CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn





Table 177: CNTGGIO Monitored data


VALUE1 INTEGER - - Output of counter 1







Event counter CNTGGIO comprises six independent counters. Each counter is incrementedupon activation (0 to 1 transition) of its corresponding COUNTER input. The updated countnumber is presented at its VALUE output.

All counter values are stored in flash memory once per hour, to preserve the informationagainst power loss.

To prevent loss of counter values, always wait for minimum one hour from thelast counter event to powering off the IED.

Activation (0 to 1 transition) of the RESET input resets all six counters to 0, which takesprecedence over any simultaneous COUNTER input activation. Continuous 1 on the RESETinput has no effect.

When the BLOCK input is 1 all counters are blocked, that is, they do not react to changes ontheir inputs. This takes precedence over any simultaneous COUNTER input activation.However, RESET will still work even with active BLOCK.

11.2.7.1 ReportingD0E6273T201305151403 v1

The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.

Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI or through a binary input.

Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850 client. Thevalue can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical display.


Table 178: CNTGGIO technical data


Counter value 0-100000 -

Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -



11.3 Disturbance report


Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondarysystem together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance reportfunctionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selectedanalog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a, maximum of 40 analogand 96 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Event list• Indications• Event recorder• Trip value recorder• Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration,starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks,which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of pre-faulttime to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format as areader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies to all events,which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information aboutthe recordings. The disturbance report files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysisusing the disturbance handling tool.

11.3.2 Disturbance report DRPRDRED0E7504T201305151403 v1





Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -


DRPRDREDRPOFF

RECSTARTRECMADECLEARED

MEMUSED


Figure 93: DRPRDRE function block



11.3.2.3 SignalsD0E7764T201305151403 v1

Table 179: DRPRDRE Output signals


DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off

RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started

RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made

CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared

MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

11.3.2.4 SettingsD0E7765T201305151403 v1

Table 180: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time

PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time

TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit

PostRetrig OffOn

- - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not(Off)

MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of storeddisturbances

ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor referencechannel

OpModeTest OffOn

- - Off Operation mode during test mode


Table 181: DRPRDRE Monitored data


MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)

UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 1activated

OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 1activated



























































































FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number



11.3.3 Analog input signals AxRADRD0E7518T201305151403 v1





Analog input signals A1RADR - -




A1RADR^GRPINPUT1^GRPINPUT2^GRPINPUT3^GRPINPUT4^GRPINPUT5^GRPINPUT6^GRPINPUT7^GRPINPUT8^GRPINPUT9^GRPINPUT10


Figure 94: A1RADR function block, analog inputs, example for A1RADR, A2RADR andA3RADR

11.3.3.3 Signals

A1RADR - A3RADR Input signalsD0E7498T201305151403 v1

Tables for input signals for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for GRPINPUTnumber.

• A1RADR, GRPINPUT1 - GRPINPUT10• A2RADR, GRPINPUT11 - GRPINPUT20• A3RADR, GRPINPUT21 - GRPINPUT30

D0E7756T201305151403 v1

Table 182: A1RADR Input signals


GRPINPUT1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Group signal for input 1























11.3.3.4 Settings

A1RADR - A3RADR SettingsD0E7500T201305151403 v1

Setting tables for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for channel numbers.

• A1RADR, channel01 - channel10• A2RADR, channel11 - channel20• A3RADR, channel21 - channel30

D0E7757T201305151403 v1

Table 183: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)


Operation01 OffOn

- - Off Operation On/Off

Operation02 OffOn


Operation03 OffOn


Operation04 OffOn


Operation05 OffOn


Operation06 OffOn


Operation07 OffOn


Operation08 OffOn


Operation09 OffOn


Operation10 OffOn


FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 1(IEC-60870-5-103)

InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analogchannel 1 (IEC-60870-5-103)






















InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analogchannel10 (IEC-60870-5-103)

Table 184: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)


NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1

UnderTrigOp01 OffOn

- - Off Use under level trigger for analogchannel 1 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel1 in % of signal

OverTrigOp01 OffOn

- - Off Use over level trigger for analogchannel 1 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1in % of signal


UnderTrigOp02 OffOn



OverTrigOp02 OffOn








UnderTrigOp03 OffOn



OverTrigOp03 OffOn


OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3in % of signal


UnderTrigOp04 OffOn



OverTrigOp04 OffOn




UnderTrigOp05 OffOn



OverTrigOp05 OffOn




UnderTrigOp06 OffOn



OverTrigOp06 OffOn




UnderTrigOp07 OffOn



OverTrigOp07 OffOn




UnderTrigOp08 OffOn







OverTrigOp08 OffOn




UnderTrigOp09 OffOn



OverTrigOp09 OffOn




UnderTrigOp10 OffOn



OverTrigOp10 OffOn


OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel10 in % of signal

11.3.4 Analog input signals A4RADRD0E7521T201305151403 v1







A4RADRÎNPUT31ÎNPUT32ÎNPUT33ÎNPUT34ÎNPUT35ÎNPUT36ÎNPUT37ÎNPUT38ÎNPUT39ÎNPUT40


Figure 95: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs



Channels 31-40 are not shown in LHMI. They are used for internally calculatedanalog signals.

11.3.4.3 SignalsD0E7758T201305151403 v1

Table 185: A4RADR Input signals


INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31










11.3.4.4 SettingsD0E7759T201305151403 v1

Table 186: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)


Operation31 OffOn

- - Off Operation On/off

Operation32 OffOn


Operation33 OffOn


Operation34 OffOn


Operation35 OffOn


Operation36 OffOn


Operation37 OffOn


Operation38 OffOn


Operation39 OffOn


Operation40 OffOn

























InfNo40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analogchannel40 (IEC-60870-5-103)

Table 187: A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)



UnderTrigOp31 OffOn



OverTrigOp31 OffOn




UnderTrigOp32 OffOn







OverTrigOp32 OffOn




UnderTrigOp33 OffOn



OverTrigOp33 OffOn


OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33in % of signal


UnderTrigOp34 OffOn



OverTrigOp34 OffOn




UnderTrigOp35 OffOn



OverTrigOp35 OffOn




UnderTrigOp36 OffOn



OverTrigOp36 OffOn




UnderTrigOp37 OffOn



OverTrigOp37 OffOn








UnderTrigOp38 OffOn



OverTrigOp38 OffOn




UnderTrigOp39 OffOn



OverTrigOp39 OffOn




UnderTrigOp40 OffOn



OverTrigOp40 OffOn



11.3.5 Binary input signals BxRBDR





Binary input signals B1RBDR - -









B1RBDRÎNPUT1ÎNPUT2ÎNPUT3ÎNPUT4ÎNPUT5ÎNPUT6ÎNPUT7ÎNPUT8ÎNPUT9ÎNPUT10ÎNPUT11ÎNPUT12ÎNPUT13ÎNPUT14ÎNPUT15ÎNPUT16


Figure 96: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B6RBDR

11.3.5.3 Signals

B1RBDR - B6RBDR Input signalsD0E7499T201305151403 v1

Tables for input signals for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for INPUT and descriptionnumber.

• B1RBDR, INPUT1 - INPUT16• B2RBDR, INPUT17 - INPUT32• B3RBDR, INPUT33 - INPUT48• B4RBDR, INPUT49 - INPUT64• B5RBDR, INPUT65 - INPUT80• B6RBDR, INPUT81 - INPUT96

D0E7760T201305151403 v1

Table 188: B1RBDR Input signals


INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1


















11.3.5.4 Settings

B1RBDR - B6RBDR SettingsD0E7501T201305151403 v1

Setting tables for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for binary channel and descriptionnumbers.

• B1RBDR, channel1 - channel16• B2RBDR, channel17 - channel32• B3RBDR, channel33 - channel48• B4RBDR, channel49 - channel64• B5RBDR, channel65 - channel80• B6RBDR, channel81 - channel96

D0E7761T201305151403 v1

Table 189: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)


TrigDR01 OffOn

- - Off Trigger operation On/Off

SetLED01 OffStartTripStart and Trip

- - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1

TrigDR02 OffOn




TrigDR03 OffOn




TrigDR04 OffOn




TrigDR05 OffOn




TrigDR06 OffOn




TrigDR07 OffOn








TrigDR08 OffOn




TrigDR09 OffOn




TrigDR10 OffOn




TrigDR11 OffOn




TrigDR12 OffOn




TrigDR13 OffOn




TrigDR14 OffOn




TrigDR15 OffOn




TrigDR16 OffOn








FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC-60870-5-103)

InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binarychannel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103)





FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4(IEC -60870-5-103)






























Table 190: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)


TrigLevel01 Trig on 0Trig on 1

- - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)slope for binary input 1

IndicationMa01 HideShow

- - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 1


































































Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator,analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

• Event list• Indications• Event recorder• Trip value recorder• Disturbance recorder

Figure 97 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and functionblocks. Event list , Event recorder and Indications uses information from the binary inputfunction blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog information from the analog inputfunction blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from bothAxRADR and BxRBDR.



Trip value rec

Event list

Event recorder

Indications

Disturbancerecorder

A1-4RADR

B1-6RBDR

Disturbance Report

Binary signals

Analog signalsA4RADR

B6RBDR

DRPRDRE


Figure 97: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each withthe data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is workingcontinuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. Allinformation in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This impliesthat no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get anidentification number in the interval from 0-999.

en05000161.vsd

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist.information Indications Trip

valuesEvent

recordingsDisturbance

recording Event list

D0E12745T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 98: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when thememory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The totalrecording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, numberof analog and binary channels and recording time. In a 50 Hz system it is possible to record100 where the maximum recording time is 0.7 seconds. The memory limit does not affect therest of the disturbance report (Event list, Event recorder, Indications and Trip value recorder).

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings totalrecording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings toless than 100.



The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might causedisturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

11.3.6.1 Disturbance informationD0E7544T201305151403 v1

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, and the trip values are available onthe local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use a PC and - either thePCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can beconnected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

11.3.6.2 IndicationsD0E7561T201305151403 v1

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of thedisturbance (not time-tagged), see Indication section for detailed information.

11.3.6.3 Event recorderD0E7562T201305151403 v1

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurredduring the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600, see Eventrecorder section for detailed information.

11.3.6.4 Event listD0E7545T201305151403 v1

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information iscontinuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data isoverwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM600, see Event listsection for detailed information.

11.3.6.5 Trip value recorderD0E7563T201305151403 v1

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and duringthe fault, see Trip value recorder section for detailed information.

11.3.6.6 Disturbance recorderD0E7564T201305151403 v1

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault,see Disturbance recorder section for detailed information.

11.3.6.7 Time taggingD0E7547T201305151403 v1

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time taggingwithin the disturbance report

11.3.6.8 Recording timesD0E7565T201305151403 v1

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable timeframe. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance recorder,event recorder and indication function register disturbance data and events duringtRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:



tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending onwhich criterion stops the current disturbance recording

PreFaultRecT

TimeLimit

PostFaultRecT

en05000487.vsd

1 2 3

Trig point

D0E12748T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 99: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate timeof the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.

tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any validtrigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).

PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activatedtriggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.

TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording wastriggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does notreset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recordingand prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the settingTimeLimit to set this time.

11.3.6.9 Analog signalsGUID-3DA6D334-9EA6-450A-8ABF-3DE80E914463 v1

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder andtriggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for externalanalog signals from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI). The last10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as functionblock output signals (phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).



en05000653-2.vsd

A3RADRA2RADR

A1RADRSMAI

AI1AI2AI3AI4

AI3PAI1NAMEAI2NAMEAI3NAME

GRPNAME

AI4NAME

GRPINPUT1GRPINPUT2GRPINPUT3GRPINPUT4GRPINPUT5GRPINPUT6...

A4RADR

INPUT31INPUT32INPUT33INPUT34INPUT35INPUT36

...

INPUT40

Internal analog signals

External analog signals

AIN


Figure 100: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration)available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. Theinformation is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (4000 and 4800 Hz).Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. Ifa function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will usethe latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available.

Application configuration tool (ACT) is used for analog configuration of the Disturbancereport.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where onlythe three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available asa group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situationswhere AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on thenon-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADRaccordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbancerecorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operationis set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The sameapplies for the current signals.

If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However,Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still beused to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entiredisturbance report when being used as triggers.



11.3.6.10 Binary signalsD0E7538T201305151403 v1

Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can beselected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to berecorded when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation = Off).A binary signal can be selected to activate the yellow (START) and red (TRIP) LED on the localHMI (SetLED = Off/Start/Trip/Start and Trip).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbancerecording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. Theindications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

11.3.6.11 Trigger signalsD0E7539T201305151403 v1

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runscontinuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbancereport is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is nodisturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing theright signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger• Binary-signal trigger• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual triggerD0E7540T201305151403 v1

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via station bus(IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This featureis especially useful for testing.

Binary-signal triggerD0E7541T201305151403 v1

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger( Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from alogic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog-signal triggerD0E7542T201305151403 v1

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in thedisturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe andUnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, theabsolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above thethreshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greaterthan (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrenttrigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure isseparately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DCoffset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 msfor a 50 Hz network.



All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

11.3.6.12 Post RetriggerD0E7543T201305151403 v1

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition during arecording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under certaincircumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance byautomatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during aperiod, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start untilthe post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs duringthe post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new completerecording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.


Table 191: DRPRDRE technical data


Current recording - ± 1,0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir± 1,0% of I at I > Ir

Voltage recording - ± 1,0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur± 1,0% of U at U > Ur

Pre-fault time (0.05–3.00) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -

Limit time (0.5–8.0) s -

Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -

Time tagging resolution 0.25 ms

Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internallyderived)

-

Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -

Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Valuerecorder per recording

30 -

Maximum number of indications in a disturbancereport

96 -

Maximum number of events in the Event recordingper recording

150 -

Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recordingtime and maximum number of channels, typicalvalue)

70 seconds (100 recordings)at 50 Hz, 50 seconds (100recordings) at 60 Hz

-

Sampling rate 4.0 kHz at 50 Hz4.8 kHz at 60 Hz

-

Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -



11.4 IndicationsD0E7474T201305151403 v1


To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or inthe secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that have changedstatus during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to getinformation via the local HMI in a straightforward way.

There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display statusinformation about the IED and the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).

The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to theDisturbance recorder function that have changed status during a disturbance.


The Indications function has no function block of it’s own.

11.4.3 Signals

11.4.3.1 Input signalsD0E7577T201305151403 v1

The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report function.


The LED indications display this information:

Green LED:

Steady light In Service

Flashing light Internal fail

Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:

Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.

Red LED:

Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.

Indication list:

The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance reportfunction and disturbance recorder.

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period ofthe collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or statechanges from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are nottime tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of indications the:



• the signal must be connected to binary input BxRBDR function block• the DRPRDRE parameter Operation must be set On• the DRPRDRE must be trigged (binary or analog)• the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when setting the binaryinputs.

The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined nameassigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance recorder function,indications and event recorder function.


D0E7591T201305151403 v1


Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for singledisturbance

96

Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100

11.5 Event recorderD0E7473T201305151403 v1


Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in thesecondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during disturbances. Thisinformation is used for different purposes in the short term (for example corrective actions)and in the long term (for example functional analysis).

The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance recorderfunction. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtradefile).


The Event recorder has no function block of it’s own.

11.5.3 Signals


The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance reportfunction.




When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event recorder logsevery status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be generated by bothinternal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in themain processor module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/Omodule. The events are collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limittime), and are stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording.

In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal appears duringpost-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-definedname assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the disturbance recorderfunction , indications and event recorder function.

The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed viathe local HMI or PCM600.

Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing the IEDsimultaneously.


D0E7903T201305151403 v1


Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

Resolution 1 ms

Accuracy Depending on timesynchronizing

11.6 Event listD0E7578T201305151403 v1


Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview perspectiveand is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.

The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder function. Thelist may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.


The Event list has no function block of it’s own.



11.6.3 Signals


The Event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance reportfunction.


When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the eventlist function stores input name, status and time in the event list in chronological order. The listcan contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input channels. If thelist is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives.

The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the localHMI.

The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function, which isonly active during a disturbance.

The name of the binary signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined nameassigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorderfunction , indications and the event recorder function .

The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information .


D0E7902T201305151403 v1


Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000

Resolution 1 ms

Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing

11.7 Trip value recorderD0E7579T201305151403 v1


Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for thedisturbance evaluation.

The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals connected tothe Disturbance recorder function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and duringthe fault for each analog input signal.

The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtradefile).




The Trip value recorder has no function block of it’s own.

11.7.3 Signals


The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to A3RADR(not A4RADR).


Trip value recorder calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault amplitudes as well as thephase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points outwhich input signal is used as the angle reference.

When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception issearched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channelsearch order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number.

When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the complexvalues of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation usessamples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive LeastSquares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and usessamples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals.

If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as thestart sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle beforethe trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.

The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbancerecorder function .

The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and can beviewed in PCM600 or via the local HMI.


D0E7914T201305151403 v1


Function Value

Buffer capacity

Maximum number of analog inputs 30

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

11.8 Disturbance recorderD0E7580T201305151403 v1


The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information aboutdisturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and related



primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded information isused for different purposes in the short perspective (for example corrective actions) and longperspective (for example functional analysis).

The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary signalsconnected to the Disturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals).The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder function.

The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation ofprotection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions. Up to9,9 seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file.

The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and thelocal HMI is used to view the list of recordings.


The Disturbance recorder has no function block of it’s own.

11.8.3 SignalsD0E7892T201305151403 v1

See Disturbance report for input and output signals.

11.8.4 SettingsD0E7891T201305151403 v1

See Disturbance report for settings.


D0E7568T201305151403 v1

Disturbance recording is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binarysignals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by thefunctions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from theTransformer Input Module (TRM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and someinternally derived analog signals.

Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer.The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously beoverwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined bythe set pre-fault recording time.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the datastorage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the faultcondition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault time and it canbe set in the disturbance report.

The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intendedfor disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording isoverwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.

The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. Arecording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for allfunctions within the disturbance report functionality.



11.8.5.1 Memory and storageD0E7569T201305151403 v1

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings totalrecording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings toless than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might causedisturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided intothree files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).

The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance,that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions. The Disturbance handling tooluse this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way.

General:

• Station name, object name and unit name• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance• Record number• Sampling rate• Time synchronization source• Recording times• Activated trig signal• Active setting group

Analog:

• Signal names for selected analog channels• Information, for example, trig on analog inputs• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig• CT direction

Binary:

• Signal names• Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the datafile. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc.



The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for eachsample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and timestamp for each set of samples.


GUID-2B7AA22F-7D13-4448-AA8D-5CB86A615551 v1

Table 196: Disturbance report DRPRDRE technical data


Current recording - ± 1,0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir± 1,0% of I at I > Ir

Voltage recording - ± 1,0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur± 1,0% of U at U > Ur

Pre-fault time (0.05–3.00) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -

Limit time (0.5–8.0) s -

Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -

Time tagging resolution 0.25 ms See timesynchronizationtechnical data

Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internallyderived)

-

Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -

Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Valuerecorder per recording

30 -

Maximum number of indications in a disturbancereport

96 -

Maximum number of events in the Event recordingper recording

150 -

Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recordingtime and maximum number of channels, typicalvalue)

70 seconds (100 recordings)at 50 Hz, 50 seconds (100recordings) at 60 Hz

-

Sampling rate 4.0 kHz at 50 Hz4.8 kHz at 60 Hz

-

Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

11.9 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functionsSPGGIO





IEC 61850 generic communicationI/O functions

SPGGIO - -




IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO is used to send one single logicalsignal to other systems or equipment in the substation.


SPGGIOBLOCKÎN

IEC09000237_en_1.vsdD0E13075T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 101: SPGGIO function block

11.9.4 SignalsD0E8288T201305151403 v1

Table 197: SPGGIO Input signals



IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

11.9.5 SettingsD0E8289T201305151403 v1



Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO)function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests thissignal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which function block in whichequipment or system should receive this information.

11.10 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16inputs SP16GGIO





IEC 61850 generic communicationI/O functions 16 inputs

SP16GGIO - -




IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO function is used to sendup to 16 logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation.


SP16GGIOBLOCKÎN1ÎN2ÎN3ÎN4ÎN5ÎN6ÎN7ÎN8ÎN9ÎN10ÎN11ÎN12ÎN13ÎN14ÎN15ÎN16


Figure 102: SP16GGIO function block

11.10.4 SignalsD0E8357T201305151403 v1

Table 198: SP16GGIO Input signals



IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status


















11.10.5 SettingsD0E8359T201305151403 v1


11.10.6 MonitoredDataD0E8358T201305151403 v1

Table 199: SP16GGIO Monitored data


OUT1 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 1 status

OUT2 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 2 status

OUT3 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 3 status

OUT4 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 4 status

OUT5 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 5 status

OUT6 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 6 status

OUT7 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 7 status

OUT8 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 8 status

OUT9 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 9 status

OUT10 GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output 10 status

OUT11 GROUPSIGNAL


OUT12 GROUPSIGNAL


OUT13 GROUPSIGNAL


OUT14 GROUPSIGNAL


OUT15 GROUPSIGNAL


OUT16 GROUPSIGNAL


OUTOR GROUPSIGNAL

- - Output status logic OR gate for input1 to 16


Upon receiving signals at its inputs, IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs(SP16GGIO) function will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system thatrequests this signals. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in theEngineering manual and define which function block in which equipment or system shouldreceive this information.



There are also 16 output signals that show the input status for each input as well as an OR typeoutput combined for all 16 input signals. These output signals are handled in PST.

11.11 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functionsMVGGIO





IEC61850 generic communicationI/O functions

MVGGIO - -


IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send theinstantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. Itcan also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and topermit measurement supervision on that value.



MVGGIOBLOCKÎN

^VALUERANGE

11.11.4 SignalsD0E8313T201305151403 v1

Table 200: MVGGIO Input signals



IN REAL 0 Analog input value

D0E8315T201305151403 v1

Table 201: MVGGIO Output signals


VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value

RANGE INTEGER Range



11.11.5 SettingsD0E8316T201305151403 v1

Table 202: MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)


BasePrefix micromilliunitkiloMegaGigaTera

- - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)

MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % ofrange, Int Db: In %s

MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% ofrange

MV hhLim -5000.00 -5000.00

xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with thebase prefix (multiplication factor)

MV hLim -5000.00 -5000.00

xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the baseprefix (multiplication factor)

MV lLim -5000.00 -5000.00

xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the baseprefix (multiplication factor)

MV llLim -5000.00 -5000.00

xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with thebase prefix (multiplication factor)

MV min -5000.00 -5000.00

xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with thebase prefix (multiplication factor)

MV max -5000.00 -5000.00

xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with thebase prefix (multiplication factor)

MV dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband


MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range(common for all limits)


Table 203: MVGGIO Monitored data


VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value

RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal1=High2=Low3=High-High4=Low-Low

- Range


Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions(MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In thesame time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC 61850 clients in thesubstation.



11.12 Measured value expander block MVEXP





Measured value expander block MVEXP - -


The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU),current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement supervisionfunctionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit,low limit, high limit and high-high limit. Similarly, the multilevel threshold alarm generationMONALM supervises measured or calculated analog values against the same kind of rangethresholds.

The measured value expander block MVEXP translates the integer output signal from themeasuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, abovehigh limit or above high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in theconfigurable logic or for alarming purpose.


MVEXPRANGE* HIGHHIGH

HIGHNORMAL

LOWLOWLOW


Figure 103: MVEXP function block

11.12.4 SignalsD0E6784T201305151403 v1

D0E7322T201305151403 v1

Table 204: MVEXP Input signals


RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range



D0E7323T201305151403 v1

Table 205: MVEXP Output signals


HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit

HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit

NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit

LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit

LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

11.12.5 SettingsD0E6910T201305151403 v1


GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define (IBase),(UBase) and (SBase).


The input signal must be connected to a range output of MONALM or of a measuring functionblock (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The function blockconverts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to Table 206. Only onebinary output can be active (high) at any time.

Table 206: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervisedvalue is:

below low-low limit

between low‐low and lowlimit

between lowand high limit

betweenhigh-highand high limit

above high-high limit

Output:

LOWLOW High

LOW High

NORMAL High

HIGH High

HIGHHIGH High

11.13 Operation logGUID-7406E8A3-F03D-4C8E-82B0-1DAEFE891A82 v1

Operation log is a database for storing operational data related to a trigger event. It can beused, for example, storing the set values associated with a switching operation of the circuitbreaker or an alarm status activation, or for storing a set of values every few hours using aperiodic trigger.

Stored operation records can be viewed on the LHMI or through WHMI. Furthermore, graphicalsummaries can be created in the Trend views of WHMI. This information can be used in theshort term (for example, corrective actions) and in the long term (for example, functionalanalysis).

Two types of records are supported:



• Operation records for storing current data.• Fingerprint records for storing initial data obtained during commissioning. These are

intended as a reference for analysis of changes over time.

11.13.1 Operation log function OPERLOGGUID-28821793-FB0B-4123-ABC1-B20AD1B12A1F v1

11.13.1.1 IdentificationGUID-13A76ABE-97DE-4028-ADA6-BA93E0BDCFE7 v1




Operation log OPERLOG - -

11.13.1.2 FunctionalityGUID-7B1B9614-B739-4E1E-B95E-39BE5AA5F516 v2

OPERLOG initiates storing of an operation record in the IED upon activation of a binary trigger.The stored information includes time stamp, operation type, and mode associated with thetrigger, along with up to eight connected real-value inputs. These inputs can be calculatedvalues from another function or measured process data.

OPERLOG is designed primarily to record data pertinent to controlled switching operations orcondition monitoring of power circuit breakers. Thus it supports classification of the recordedvalues according to process signal categories.

The number of operation records for each instance can be configured. Once the maximumnumber of records for an instance is exceeded, the oldest record is overwritten by the newrecord.

11.13.1.3 Function blockGUID-1F30715D-5487-46BF-A85F-7E287EE11F2D v1

OPERLOGBLOCKINTRIG_INMODEÎNPUT1ÎNPUT2ÎNPUT3ÎNPUT4ÎNPUT5ÎNPUT6ÎNPUT7ÎNPUT8

BLOCKEDTRIG_OUT


Figure 104: OPERLOG function block

11.13.1.4 SignalsPID-3336-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 207: OPERLOG Input signals


BLOCKIN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation log data storage

TRIG_IN BOOLEAN 0 Trigger input to log operation log data

MODE INTEGER 0 Input for determining the operation log modes

INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Input signal 1













Table 208: OPERLOG Output signals


BLOCKED BOOLEAN Operation log blocked output

TRIG_OUT BOOLEAN Trigger output to connect operation log function in daisychain

11.13.1.5 SettingsPID-3336-SETTINGS v4

Table 209: OPERLOG Non group settings (basic)


Type NAOC openingCB switchingDrive starts 24hDrive runtimeSF6 gasCond temp

- - OC opening Operation log instance type

TrgModOpn Do not logLog withoutvaluesLog with values

- - Log with values Trigger option for logging data foropen

TrgModCls Do not logLog withoutvaluesLog with values

- - Log with values Trigger option for logging data forclose

TsSrcSel Signal TimeSystem Time

- - Signal Time For selecting the input which will beused for triggering the timestamp

Input1Group NAAccuracyCB timesCB switchingAmbientDrive energyAdditionalLast open curElec error

- - Accuracy Group selection for INPUT1





















Table 210: OPERLOG Non group settings (advanced)


MaxRecords 100 - 20000 - 100 100 Maximum number of records

GUID-296B605A-6AC6-4674-984A-420665879F0B v2

It is recommended not to increaseMaxRecords beyond the default value in thepre-configuration of Switchsync PWC600, otherwise performance of the userinterface may be affected.

11.13.1.6 Operation principleGUID-DE562824-4B6D-4824-9F4A-1774CD8D6C6E v2

OPERLOG function performs a trigger based data transfer to the operation log database forthe connected inputs. Figure 105 shows the operation log module.


Read operation log

data

Operation log database

Storing operation log data

Memory Supervision

Trigger memory Supervision to

generate an event

Overall Oplog MaxRec

WHMI


Figure 105: Operation log system overview

• This function saves records of input values to a persistent memory (flash) based on atrigger. The connected input values can be calculated data from different functions ormeasured process data.

• The records that are logged by the operation log component can be viewed in LHMI andWHMI as common data or phase segregated data. If the signal connected has anassociated unit, it will also be displayed.

• The memory supervision component MONMEMSUP monitors the overall memoryconsumed by all operation log components instantiated in the IED. Even though there is aprovision for setting maximum records for every instance of operation log, it is thememory supervision which finally checks the IED capacity. If the size of the databaseexceeds the available memory of 40MB, the newest record will overwrite the oldest one.One record created by one instance of OPLOG will consume approximately 80 Byte ofdata, irrespective of the number of input channels connected to that component.

• By a specific triggering option, a stored operation record can be marked as “fingerprintrecord”. Fingerprint records are retained during normal clearing of the operation logdatabase, neither will they be overwritten in case of memory overrun. The number offingerprint records is limited to 50 (settable); storing another fingerprint record afterreaching this limit will overwrite the oldest fingerprint record.



A mechanism for limiting the number of write operations per time period isimplemented in the IED, to prevent the flash memory from wearing out. As aconsequence, it may take up an hour to save new operation recordspermanently in the database. If the auxiliary power is interrupted before newdata are saved, these data are lost. The time of flash saving is neither indicatedon the IED nor can it be influenced by the user.

TriggeringGUID-9D993A77-AC86-412C-B2C6-50DB0DA06A29 v1

Storing of an operation record is triggered by the input signal TRIG_IN going high. TRIG_IN isprimarily a binary signal. Depending on the application, it may be augmented by additionaldata to form a composite signal.

If the application is to store operation data of the circuit breaker along with the time stampand operation type, a composite trigger signal should be applied comprising the followinginformation.

• Time stamp provided by the application, for example, the time when a command has beenreceived

• Circuit breaker operation type (Close or Open)• Whether the data should be stored as fingerprint record

In the Switchsync PWC600 pre-configuration, the OPLOGTRIG output of SSCPOW providessuch a composite trigger signal. TsSrcSel should be set to “Signal Time” to assure correctstoring of the application generated time stamp.

In an application for periodic process monitoring (for example, maximum temperatureattained in a day), where measured data are stored immediately on triggering, a simple binary(Boolean) signal can be used to trigger OPERLOG. In this case, TsSrcSel should be set to“System Time”, to generate the time stamp from the IED’s system time when TRIG_IN wasactivated. In this case, the CB operation type (Close or Open) will be stored as “not applicable”.

Processing of trigger signals can be further controlled by the TrgModOpn (for open operation)and TrgModCls (for close operation) parameters. The options are:

• Do not log: A trigger signal for the respective operation (Close or Open) will not store anoperation record.

• Log without values: Operation record will include only the operation type (Close or Open)and the time stamp.

• Log with values: Operation record will include operation type (Close or Open), time stamp,and the values at the connected inputs.

Grouping and categorizing operation dataGUID-CCD13914-71C3-40B8-9D3C-889DAF3D640F v1

To enable grouped and categorized presentation of logged data in LHMI or WHMI, twosettings and one input are provided. One instance of OPERLOG allows to connect maximumeight real-value inputs; if more than eight values are to be logged with the same trigger signal,additional function block instances are required. To logically group these instances together inthe database, Type should be set to the same value.

If, within one Type of OPERLOG, a client such as trend graph page in WHMI is configured toshow the values of selected inputs only, the InputxGroup settings allow this segregation. Theyshould be set according to the class of monitored process data, for example, “Accuracy” (ofcontrolled switching operations) or “Ambient” (temperature).

The input signal MODE, which is stored together with the other input data, provides dynamiccategorization (at runtime). It is intended to give a status evaluation of each switchingoperation at a glance. This mode information is further explained in the User Manual, sectionIED Operation.



Configuring instances in ACTGUID-0F13DEE4-647F-4178-A349-7AB7060D8D60 v1

Operation log instances can be configured to store phase segregated values such as operationtimes of the three circuit breaker poles, or phase independent values such as ambienttemperature.

Do not connect more than three components in a daisy chain.

For phase independent signals, configure OPERLOG as individual instance(s). An example ofpossible trigger connections is shown in Figure 106.

OPERLOG

Primary 1

Instance 1

OPERLOG

Secondary 1

Instance 2

OPERLOG

Secondary 2

Instance 3

OPERLOG

Primary 2

Instance 4

OPERLOG

Secondary 3

Instance 5

OPERLOG

Secondary 4

Instance 6

OPERLOG

Individual 1

Instance 7

OPERLOG

Individual 2

Instance 8

OPERLOG

Individual 3

Instance 9

Trigger

IEC12000047-1-EN.vsd


Figure 106: Trigger connections for operation log instances

Configure the instances in ACT such that

• Individual instances do not have any input or output daisy chain connection to any otheroperation log component.

• Primary instances have only output daisy chain connection to the secondary operation logcomponent.

• Secondary instances have input daisy chain connection to a primary or secondaryoperation log component and possibly an output daisy chain connection to anothersecondary instance.

With one or more operation records already stored in the database, changes inOPERLOG related ACT configuration or in OPERLOG parameters may lead towrong reporting on LHMI or WHMI.



To prevent wrong reporting after configuration changes, the following procedure should beobserved:

1. Download the operation log database through WHMI.2. Write configuration changes to the IED.3. Clear all operation records and fingerprint records in the IED.

11.14 Clear operation log data CLROPLOGGUID-ADBC66A4-5A91-467F-908E-F5A74A51BD82 v1

11.14.1 IdentificationGUID-204E26D4-69DE-4BAD-95B6-47D27BA18255 v1




Clear operation log data CLROPLOG - -

11.14.2 FunctionalityGUID-AA314E67-2D36-45DE-BF8E-5C7F460B31A5 v1

The CLROPLOG function enables deletion of either operation records or fingerprint recordsfrom the operation log database.

Two separate binary inputs for initiating deletion of records are provided. Activating one ofthese inputs will clear all records of the corresponding type from the database.

Clearing records cannot be undone.

Permanent storage of the emptied database is subject to the same flashmemory write cycle as storing new records, see above.

11.14.3 Function blockGUID-1EBECCA2-9F2B-4203-9950-173AFF6E5265 v1

CLROPLOGCLROPLOGCLRFPRCD





Table 211: CLROPLOG Input signals


CLROPLOG BOOLEAN 0 Input for clearing the operation log data

CLRFPRCD BOOLEAN 0 Input for clearing the finger print records



11.14.5 SettingsGUID-7DE3F81C-84B1-4503-BF1D-582000C760CC v1

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and ControlIED Manager (PCM600).

11.15 Compensation of circuit breaker switching timesCBCOMP

GUID-338790CD-B1E2-46FB-999C-E8DF65ABB542 v1

11.15.1 IdentificationGUID-BDAEAFD0-D623-4DC3-B56E-5DE83A69B9AA v1

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number

Compensation ofcircuit breakerswitching times

CBCOMP — —

11.15.2 FunctionalityGUID-596AE73E-CFE2-4AB2-9115-0903949FD910 v2

To achieve accurate controlled switching, a point-on-wave controller needs to take intoaccount the estimated operating times of the circuit breaker. Depending on the design,mechanical closing and opening times may be affected by variations in external conditionssuch as:

• Control voltage• Temperature• Drive energy• Idle time (that is, time elapsed since last circuit breaker operation)

Each quantity that is measured can be converted into a compensation value (that is, deviationin milliseconds from the nominal operating time) – in PWC600 this is done by the ANSCALfunction block.

The compensation of circuit breaker switching times (CBCOMP) function provides combinedcompensation by adding up all available individual compensation values for each CB pole. Theresulting total compensation values (one per pole) take into account the quantity and healthstatus of sensors and the CB operation type (closing or opening). In controlled switching, thisis used to optimize prediction of the circuit breaker operating times for precise switchinginstants. CBCOMP has pre-defined inputs for the compensation values of the externalparameters listed above. Furthermore, it provides two groups of spare inputs, which may beused to compensate additional measured quantities.



11.15.3 Function blockGUID-5C7DF1D3-B00E-42D4-BE05-E8D084711412 v1

CBCOMPQCLOSEQOPENIDCLL1IDCLL2IDCLL3IDCLIL1IDCLIL2IDCLIL3IDOPL1IDOPL2IDOPL3IDOPIL1IDOPIL2IDOPIL3CVCLTCVOPTTMPCLL1TMPCLL2TMPCLL3TMPOPL1TMPOPL2TMPOPL3PRCLL1PRCLL2PRCLL3PROPL1PROPL2PROPL3SP1CLL1SP1CLL2SP1CLL3SP1OPL1SP1OPL2SP1OPL3SP2CLL1SP2CLL2SP2CLL3SP2OPL1SP2OPL2SP2OPL3SR1CLL1SR1CLL2SR1CLL3SR1OPL1SR1OPL2SR1OPL3SR2CLL1SR2CLL2SR2CLL3SR2OPL1SR2OPL2SR2OPL3IDCLALL1IDCLALL2IDCLALL3IDOPALL1IDOPALL2IDOPALL3

DELTAT2L1DELTAT2L2DELTAT2L3COORBCTS

ALMSTSLOSCOPSG


Figure 108: CBCOMP Function block


Table 212: CBCOMP Input signals


QCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker close query

QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open query

IDCLL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Idle closed time for phase L1





IDCLL2 GROUPSIGNAL


IDCLL3 GROUPSIGNAL


IDCLIL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Idle closed time current input for phase L1

IDCLIL2 GROUPSIGNAL


IDCLIL3 GROUPSIGNAL


IDOPL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Idle open time for phase L1

IDOPL2 GROUPSIGNAL


IDOPL3 GROUPSIGNAL


IDOPIL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Idle open time current input for phase L1

IDOPIL2 GROUPSIGNAL


IDOPIL3 GROUPSIGNAL


CVCLT GROUPSIGNAL

- Control voltage close time

CVOPT GROUPSIGNAL

- Control voltage open time

TMPCLL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Temperature close time phase L1

TMPCLL2 GROUPSIGNAL


TMPCLL3 GROUPSIGNAL


TMPOPL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Temperature open time phase L1

TMPOPL2 GROUPSIGNAL


TMPOPL3 GROUPSIGNAL


PRCLL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Drive pressure close time phase L1

PRCLL2 GROUPSIGNAL


PRCLL3 GROUPSIGNAL


PROPL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Drive pressure open time phase L1

PROPL2 GROUPSIGNAL


PROPL3 GROUPSIGNAL


SP1CLL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Spring charge analog input close time phase L1





SP1CLL2 GROUPSIGNAL


SP1CLL3 GROUPSIGNAL


SP1OPL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Spring charge analog input open time phase L1

SP1OPL2 GROUPSIGNAL


SP1OPL3 GROUPSIGNAL


SP2CLL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Spring charge binary input close time phase L1

SP2CLL2 GROUPSIGNAL


SP2CLL3 GROUPSIGNAL


SP2OPL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Spring charge binary input open time phase L1

SP2OPL2 GROUPSIGNAL


SP2OPL3 GROUPSIGNAL


SR1CLL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Spare1 close time phase L1

SR1CLL2 GROUPSIGNAL


SR1CLL3 GROUPSIGNAL


SR1OPL1 GROUPSIGNAL

- Spare1 open time phase L1

SR1OPL2 GROUPSIGNAL


SR1OPL3 GROUPSIGNAL


SR2CLL1 GROUPSIGNAL


SR2CLL2 GROUPSIGNAL


SR2CLL3 GROUPSIGNAL


SR2OPL1 GROUPSIGNAL


SR2OPL2 GROUPSIGNAL


SR2OPL3 GROUPSIGNAL


IDCLALL1 BOOLEAN 0 Idle closed time correction alarm for phase L1



IDOPALL1 BOOLEAN 0 Idle open time correction alarm for phase L1





GUID-7C9AD51B-4E0C-4568-A013-B5E7AC8BEE67 v1

Table 213: Breakdown of input group signals


OPSIGNAL REAL Closing/Opening time correction value

ALARM BOOLEAN Sensor value out of supervision range, or faulty sensor. See ANSCAL for moredetails.

SENSTSOUT BOOLEAN Sensor is faulty, or communication lost. This signal is used for IEC 61850purpose only.

The alarm conditions from the individual input channels are bit packed in ALMSTS as follows:

Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

Idletime

Controlvoltage

Temperature Drivepressure

Spring charge 1(analog)

Springcharge 2(binary)

Spare1

Spare 2

The sensor status, if it exists for any of the monitored quantities, is represented by LOSCOPSGand mapped to IEC 61850 data objects.


Table 214: CBCOMP Output signals


DELTAT2L1 REAL Switching correction delay from ideal switching instant forphase L1



COORBCTS INTEGER Co-ordination input to SSCPOW

ALMSTS INTEGER Alarming status of input(s) detected for compensationThis signal is integer because of bit packed information ofdifferent alarms generated sent as integer output.

LOSCOPSG BOOLEAN Loss of enabled compensation signal indication output


Table 215: CBCOMP Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


IdleTimeInpSel Current InputStatus Input

- - Status Input Idle time input selection for statusand current

IdleCompModeSel Disable O&CEnableO&C3SensorEnable C3SensorEnable O3Sensor

- - Disable O&C Idle time compensation input modeselection for 3sensor and 1sensor





IdleTimeErrInpOpt All HealthyOnly one faultyAtleast onehealthy

- - All Healthy Idle time compensation computationselection based on input health status

CntrlVoltCompModeSel Disable O&CEnableO&C1SensorEnable C1SensorEnable O1Sensor

- - Disable O&C Control voltage compensation inputmode selection for 1sensor

TempCompModeSel Disable O&CEnableO&C3SensorEnableO&C1SensorEnable C3SensorEnable C1SensorEnable O3SensorEnable O1Sensor

- - Disable O&C Temperature compensation inputmode selection for 3sensor and1sensor

TempErrInpOpt All HealthyOnly one faultyAtleast onehealthy

- - All Healthy Temperature compensationcomputation selection based on inputhealth status

PresCompModeSel Disable O&CEnableO&C3SensorEnableO&C1SensorEnable C3SensorEnable C1SensorEnable O3SensorEnable O1Sensor

- - Disable O&C Drive pressure compensation inputmode selection for 3sensor and1sensor

PresErrInpOpt All HealthyOnly one faultyAtleast onehealthy

- - All Healthy Drive pressure compensationcomputation selection based on inputhealth status

Spr1CompModeSel Disable O&CEnableO&C3SensorEnableO&C1SensorEnable C3SensorEnable C1SensorEnable O3SensorEnable O1Sensor

- - Disable O&C Spring charge compensation analoginput mode selection for 3sensor and1sensor

Spr1ErrInpOpt All HealthyOnly one faultyAtleast onehealthy

- - All Healthy Spring charge analog inputcompensation computation selectionbased on input health status

Spr2CompModeSel Disable O&CEnableO&C3SensorEnableO&C1SensorEnable C3SensorEnable C1SensorEnable O3SensorEnable O1Sensor

- - Disable O&C Spring charge compensation binaryinput mode selection for 3sensor and1sensor

Spr2ErrInpOpt All HealthyOnly one faultyAtleast onehealthy

- - All Healthy Spring charge binary inputcompensation computation selectionbased on input health status





Spare1CompModeSel Disable O&CEnableO&C3SensorEnableO&C1SensorEnable C3SensorEnable C1SensorEnable O3SensorEnable O1Sensor

- - Disable O&C Spare1 compensation input modeselection for 3sensor and 1sensor

Spare1ErrInpOpt All HealthyOnly one faultyAtleast onehealthy

- - All Healthy Spare1 compensation computationselection based on input health status

Spare2CompModeSel Disable O&CEnableO&C3SensorEnableO&C1SensorEnable C3SensorEnable C1SensorEnable O3SensorEnable O1Sensor

- - Disable O&C Spare2 compensation input modeselection for 3sensor and 1sensor

Spare2ErrInpOpt All HealthyOnly one faultyAtleast onehealthy

- - All Healthy Spare2 compensation computationselection based on input health status

11.15.6 Monitored dataPID-3002-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 216: CBCOMP Monitored data


DELTAT2L1 REAL - ms Switching correction delay from idealswitching instant for phase L1



11.15.7 Operation principleGUID-7AA751F1-8726-48D9-BE07-072A5A905CDD v1

In order to optimize the predicted circuit breaker switching times, analog parameters such asidle time, control voltage, ambient temperature, drive pressure, and spring charge can bemonitored periodically through appropriate sensors. In a typical application, ANSCAL convertseach sensor signal to a compensation value (that is, time deviation from nominal operatingtime), which is then supplied to CBCOMP. All associated compensation values are added toyield three total compensation values DELTAT2Lx, one per phase. See Figure 109.



Phase L1

compensation

Phase L2

compensation

Phase L3

compensation


Alarms for time correction

for phase L1

Close/Open time correction

values for phase L1

Sensor status indications

for phase L1

DELTAT2L1

DELTAT2L2

DELTAT2L3


values for phase L2


for phase L2


for phase L2


values for phase L3


for phase L3


for phase L3

QCLOSE / QOPEN


Figure 109: CBCOMP internal data processing

The number of available sensors and their respective health status are taken into account forthe calculations. Each compensation scheme can be configured to provide compensation forOpen operations, Close operations, or both. For each parameter to be compensated, CBCOMPfeatures a dedicated group of compensation values inputs, as explained in Table 217.



Table 217: Compensation signal inputs for measured parameters

Measured parameter Quantity of inputs for closingtime and opening timecompensation

Remarks

Idle time, based onmechanical status

3 + 3 Mechanical status is derived from CB auxiliarycontacts

Idle time, based onprimary currentsignals

3 + 3 CB status is detected as closed if current is flowing(I > IDead) and open otherwise

Control voltage 1+1 Control voltage is measured from IED’s powersupply input

Temperature 3 + 3 Requires external acquisition device, supplyingmeasured values via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages

Drive pressure 3 + 3 Requires external acquisition device, supplyingmeasured values via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages

Spring charge,analog measurement

3 + 3 Requires external acquisition device, supplyingmeasured values via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages

Spring charge, basedon binary rangeindication signals

3 + 3 For example, obtained from spring limit switchesindicating OCO-block or CO-block conditions

Spare 1 3 + 3 For user defined sensor signals. Requires externalacquisition device, supplying measured values viaIEC 61850 GOOSE messages

Spare 2 3 + 3 For user defined sensor signals. Requires externalacquisition device, supplying measured values viaIEC 61850 GOOSE messages

Only one of the idle time compensation channels, viz. status based or current based, is usedfor calculating the final compensation value. The selection is made by the IdleTimeInpSelsetting.

11.15.7.1 Compensation modeGUID-61A1575E-523A-4D9E-AEE3-16C60D0F621B v1

Depending on the number of sensors available for a given parameter, and on the circuitbreaker operations to be controlled (or compensation characteristics available), the respectivevalue for CompModeSel defines the compensation mode applied to that parameter. See Table218. In Switchsync PWC600, this selection can be made automatically by SST.

Table 218: Compensation mode for each parameter

Number of sensors Compensate closing times Compensate opening times CompModeSel setting

0 - - Disable O&C

(Any) No No Disable O&C

1 Yes No Enable C1Sensor

1 NO Yes Enable O1Sensor

1 Yes Yes EnableO&C1Sensor

3 (one per CB pole) Yes No Enable C3Sensor

3 (one per CB pole) No Yes Enable O3Sensor

3 (one per CB pole) Yes Yes EnableO&C3Sensor



With three sensors enabled, individual compensation values are processed for each CB pole.With only a single sensor input enabled, the compensation value on the input for breaker poleL1 is used for all three poles.

11.15.7.2 Sensor statusGUID-C6447FBC-1F8E-4785-9F0B-D409BEAE0B5C v1

Only accurate measured values from the sensors are useful in optimizing controlled switchingperformance. In case of a faulty sensor, wrong output values may even deteriorate the result.As part of the input group signals, CBCOMP accepts health status information of each sensor,where logical 1 indicates a missing or faulty sensor. Any ‘unhealthy’ condition indication on anenabled sensor input activates the LOSCOPSG output. Unacceptable numbers of faultysensors, which do not meet the criterion defined by the ErrInpOpt setting, activate theALMSTS output. Furthermore, the sensor failure information can be used for selecting afallback strategy. This assumes that operating conditions for three adjacent circuit breakerpoles would generally be similar. The strategies also depend on the ErrInpOpt setting for eachmeasured parameter, see Table 219.

Table 219: Processing of compensation values in dependence on sensor status

CompModeSelsetting

ErrInpOptsetting

Number offaultysensors

Compensationvalue processedin phases withhealthy sensor

Compensation valueprocessed in phaseswith faulty sensor

ALMSTS bit forthe channel

…1 Sensor (Any) 0 Input value - 0

1 0.0 0.0 1

…3 Sensor (Any) 0 Input value - 0

All healthy 1, 2 or 3 0.0 0.0 1

Only one faulty 1 Input value Average of inputvalues in phaseswith healthy sensor

0

2 or 3 0.0 0.0 1

Atleast onehealthy

1 Input value Average of inputvalues in phaseswith healthy sensor

0

2 Input value Input value in phasewith healthy sensor

0

3 0.0 0.0 1

11.16 Monitoring and compensation CB parametersMONCOMP

GUID-70383BBF-0533-46F7-96B1-E7B9344D9B62 v1

11.16.1 IdentificationGUID-A55491C9-845B-46AE-A5F0-4EE4F4385D52 v1




Monitoring andcompensation of circuitbreaker parameters

MONCOMP - -



11.16.2 FunctionalityGUID-25DA8AAE-2068-49B7-8AA6-D44CD69E87AB v1

Monitoring and compensation of circuit breaker MONCOMP function provides an overallcompensation for different operating and controlling parameters which can be monitored andadapted for better accuracy such as, Pre-strike, Re-ignition and mechanical operating time forPWC600’s synchronous switching functionality. MONCOMP provides single or three phasecompensation modes, predicted correction times, deviation from the fingerprint values anddrift from the fingerprint values.



11.16.3 Function blockGUID-64B0CE90-61E9-4837-B5BC-FE7FCD8A4D4F v1

MONCOMPBLOCKBLOCKFUNCOPNCMDIXCLSCMDIXOPNCMDOXCLSCMDOXRESETRESETFPDELTAT1XDELTAT3XDELTAT7XELORTMXMCORTMXCONVELXPRESTRAXARCTMXITMCDLXMCMOVTMXCBSTSXRTKCTXRTKCTALXCOORPSMCXCOORRSMCXCOORSSMCXCOORTSMCX

DELTAT1XDELTAT3XDELTAT7X

COORMCTSXPMCORTMXPELORTMX

PPRESTRAXPARCTMX

AMCORTMXAELORTMX

APRESTRAXAARCTMX

AIMCDXAMCMVX

AVPMCOTOXAVPELOTOXAVAELOTOX

AVAMCOTOXAVACVOX

AVAIMDOXAVAMCMTOX

AVAARGTXAVPMCOTCXAVPELOTCX

AVPPSAXAVAELOTCX

AVAMCOTCXAVACVCXAVAPSAX

AVAIMDCXAVAMCMTCX

DVPMCOTXDVPELOTX

DVPPSAXDVAELOTX

DVAMCOTXDVACVX

DVAPSAXDVAIMDX

DVAMCMVXDVAARGTX

DFPMCOTOXDFPELOTOXDFAELOTOX

DFAMCOTOXDFACVOX

DFAIMDOXDFAMCMVOX

DFAARGTXDFPMCOTCXDFPELOTCX

DFPPSAXDFAELOTCX

DFAMCOTCXDFACVCXDFAPSAX

DFAIMDCXDFAMCMVCX

ERMCORTXERELORTX

ERPSAXERARGTIMX

CBSTSCFXACVX

RTKCTOXRTKCTALOX

ALARMX

IEC12000060-1.vsd






Table 220: MONCOMP Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of binary outputs

BLOCKFUNC BOOLEAN 0 Block functionality to block execution of this function andpopulate outputs with default values

OPNCMDIX BOOLEAN 0 CB open command input to function for starting Evaluationfor phase L1/L2/L3

CLSCMDIX BOOLEAN 0 CB close command input to function for starting Evaluationfor phase L1/L2/L3

OPNCMDOX BOOLEAN 0 CB open command output from StrategySwitching functionfor triggering Evaluation for phase L1/L2/L3

CLSCMDOX BOOLEAN 0 CB close command output from StrategySwitching functionfor triggering Evaluation for phase L1/L2/L3

RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear all outputs except initial finger printrecords

RESETFP BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear all outputs including initial finger printrecords

DELTAT1X REAL 0.0 Electrical adjustment for RDDS or RRDS related correction forphase L1/L2/L3

DELTAT3X REAL 0.0 Adaptive target correction based on previous operationsuccess for phase L1/L2/L3

DELTAT7X REAL 0.0 Re-Ignitions/Re-Strike arcing time extension for phaseL1/L2/L3

ELORTMX REAL 0.0 Circuit breaker electrical operating time for phase L1/L2/L3

MCORTMX REAL 0.0 Circuit breaker mechanical operating time for phase L1/L2/L3

CONVELX REAL 0.0 Calculated contact velocity for phase L1/L2/L3

PRESTRAX REAL 0.0 Angle of prestrike from previous voltage zero phase L1/L2/L3

ARCTMX REAL 0.0 Arcing time duration of CB for phase L1/L2/L3

ITMCDLX REAL 0.0 Initial mechanical movement delay observed for phaseL1/L2/L3

MCMOVTMX REAL 0.0 Total mechanical movement time observed for phaseL1/L2/L3

CBSTSX INTEGER 0 Circuit breaker position derived from mechanical andelectrical status for phase L1/L2/L3

RTKCTX INTEGER 0 Re-strike count input for phase L1/L2/L3

RTKCTALX BOOLEAN 0 Re-strike count alarm input for phase L1/L2/L3

COORPSMCX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input 1 from ACBOM function for phaseL1/L2/L3

COORRSMCX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input 2 from ACBOM function for phaseL1/L2/L3

COORSSMCX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input 1 from strategy switching function forphase L1/L2/L3

COORTSMCX INTEGER 0 Co-ordination input 2 from strategy switching function forphase L1/L2/L3




Table 221: MONCOMP Output signals


DELTAT1X REAL Electrical correction delay from switching instant for phaseL1/L2/L3

DELTAT3X REAL Adaptive switching compensation delay for opening orclosing operation of phase L1/L2/L3

DELTAT7X REAL Time correction for avoiding Re-strike/Re-ignition (to extendarcing time) of phase L1/L2/L3

COORMCTSX INTEGER Co-ordination signal output from monitoring compensationto strategy switching for phase L1/L2/L3

PMCORTMX REAL Predicted mechanical operation time for phase L1/L2/L3

PELORTMX REAL Predicted electrical operation time for phase L1/L2/L3

PPRESTRAX REAL Predicted pre strike angle for phase L1/L2/L3

PARCTMX REAL Predicted arcing time for phase L1/L2/L3

AMCORTMX REAL Actual mechanical operation time for phase L1/L2/L3

AELORTMX REAL Actual electrical operation time for phase L1/L2/L3

APRESTRAX REAL Actual pre strike angle for phase L1/L2/L3

AARCTMX REAL Actual arcing time for phase L1/L2/L3

AIMCDX REAL Actual Initial mechanical movement delay observed for phaseL1/L2/L3

AMCMVX REAL Actual total mechanical movement time observed for phaseL1/L2/L3

AVPMCOTOX REAL Predicted mechanical operating time average from initialfingerprint open opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVPELOTOX REAL Predicted electrical operating time average from initialfingerprint open opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAELOTOX REAL Derived average electrical operating time from initialfingerprint open opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAMCOTOX REAL Derived average mechanical operating time from initialfingerprint open opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVACVOX REAL Derived average contact velocity from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAIMDOX REAL Average Initial mechanical movement delay from initialfingerprint open opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAMCMTOX REAL Average total mechanical movement time from initialfingerprint open opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAARGTX REAL Average arcing time from initial fingerprint open opers forphase L1/L2/L3

AVPMCOTCX REAL Predicted mechanical operating time average from initialfingerprint close opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVPELOTCX REAL Predicted electrical operating time average from initialfingerprint close opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVPPSAX REAL Predicted average pre strike angle from initial fingerprintclose opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAELOTCX REAL Derived average electrical operating time from initialfingerprint close opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAMCOTCX REAL Derived average mechanical operating time from initialfingerprint close opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVACVCX REAL Derived average contact velocity from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3





AVAPSAX REAL Average Pre strike angle from initial fingerprint operationsfor phase L1/L2/L3

AVAIMDCX REAL Average Initial mechanical movement delay from initialfingerprint close opers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAMCMTCX REAL Average total mechanical movement time from initialfingerprint close opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVPMCOTX REAL Deviation of predicted mechanical operating time from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVPELOTX REAL Deviation of Predicted electrical operating time from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVPPSAX REAL Deviation of predicted pre strike angle from initial fingerprintopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVAELOTX REAL Deviation of derived electrical operating time from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVAMCOTX REAL Deviation of derived mechanical operating time from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVACVX REAL Deviation of derived contact velocity from initial fingerprintopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVAPSAX REAL Deviation of pre strike angle from initial fingerprint opers forphase L1/L2/L3

DVAIMDX REAL Deviation of initial mechanical movement delay from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVAMCMVX REAL Deviation of total mechanical movement time from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVAARGTX REAL Deviation of arcing time from initial fingerprint opers forphase L1/L2/L3

AMCMVCX REAL Actual total mechanical movement time observed from closeoperation for phase L1/L2/L3

AMCMVOX REAL Actual total mechanical movement time observed from openoperation for phase L1/L2/L3

ERELOTCX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of electricaloperation time in close operation for phase

ERELOTOX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of electricaloperation time in open operation for phase

ERMCOTCX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of mechanicaloperation time in close operation for phase

AMCOTMCX REAL Actual mechanical operation time from close operation forphase L1/L2/L3

AIMCDCX REAL Actual Initial mechanical movement delay observed fromclosing operation for phase L1/L2/L3

AIMCDOX REAL Actual Initial mechanical movement delay observed fromopen operation for phase L1/L2/L3

ACVOX REAL Actual contact velocity from open operation for phaseL1/L2/L3

ACVCX REAL Actual contact velocity from close operation for phaseL1/L2/L3

ERMCOTOX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of mechanicaloperation time in open operation for phase

AMCOTMOX REAL Actual mechanical operation time from open operation forphase L1/L2/L3

ERMCORTX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of mechanicaloperation time for phase L1/L2/L3





ERELORTX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of electricaloperation time for phase L1/L2/L3

ERPSAX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of pre strike anglefor phase L1/L2/L3

ERARGTIMX REAL Error of actual value from predicted value of arcing time forphase L1/L2/L3

CBSTSCFX BOOLEAN Indicates conflict in circuit breaker position for phaseL1/L2/L3

RTKCTOX INTEGER Re-strike count output for phase L1/L2/L3

RTKCTALOX BOOLEAN Re-strike count alarm output for phase L1/L2/L3

ALARMX BOOLEAN Indication of conflict of open/close operations for phaseL1/L2/L3

ACVX REAL Actual contact velocity for phase L1/L2/L3


Table 222: MONCOMP Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


Table 223: MONCOMP Non group settings (advanced)


InitialRecords 2 - 50 - 2 20 Number of initial finger print records

OptCombEqual CombinedTotalRcrdsEqualOpnClsRcrds

- - CombinedTotalRcrds

Option for combined total number ofinitial records or equal number ofopen & close initial records


Table 224: MONCOMP Monitored data


PMCORTMX REAL - ms Predicted mechanical operation timefor phase L1/L2/L3

PELORTMX REAL - ms Predicted electrical operation time forphase L1/L2/L3

PPRESTRAX REAL - deg Predicted pre strike angle for phaseL1/L2/L3

PARCTMX REAL - ms Predicted arcing time for phaseL1/L2/L3

AMCORTMX REAL - ms Actual mechanical operation time forphase L1/L2/L3

AELORTMX REAL - ms Actual electrical operation time forphase L1/L2/L3





APRESTRAX REAL - deg Actual pre strike angle for phaseL1/L2/L3

AARCTMX REAL - ms Actual arcing time for phase L1/L2/L3

AIMCDX REAL - ms Actual Initial mechanical movementdelay observed for phase L1/L2/L3

AMCMVX REAL - ms Actual total mechanical movementtime observed for phase L1/L2/L3

AVPMCOTOX REAL - ms Predicted mechanical operating timeaverage from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVPELOTOX REAL - ms Predicted electrical operating timeaverage from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAELOTOX REAL - ms Derived average electrical operatingtime from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAMCOTOX REAL - ms Derived average mechanical operatingtime from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVACVOX REAL - m/s Derived average contact velocity frominitial fingerprint open opers forphase L1/L2/L3

AVAIMDOX REAL - ms Average Initial mechanical movementdelay from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAMCMTOX REAL - ms Average total mechanical movementtime from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAARGTX REAL - ms Average arcing time from initialfingerprint open opers for phaseL1/L2/L3

AVPMCOTCX REAL - ms Predicted mechanical operating timeaverage from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVPELOTCX REAL - ms Predicted electrical operating timeaverage from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVPPSAX REAL - deg Predicted average pre strike anglefrom initial fingerprint close opers forphase L1/L2/L3

AVAELOTCX REAL - ms Derived average electrical operatingtime from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVAMCOTCX REAL - ms Derived average mechanical operatingtime from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

AVACVCX REAL - m/s Derived average contact velocity frominitial fingerprint close opers forphase L1/L2/L3

AVAPSAX REAL - deg Average Pre strike angle from initialfingerprint operations for phaseL1/L2/L3

AVAIMDCX REAL - ms Average Initial mechanical movementdelay from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3





AVAMCMTCX REAL - ms Average total mechanical movementtime from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVPMCOTX REAL - ms Deviation of predicted mechanicaloperating time from initial fingerprintopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVPELOTX REAL - ms Deviation of Predicted electricaloperating time from initial fingerprintopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVPPSAX REAL - deg Deviation of predicted pre strike anglefrom initial fingerprint opers forphase L1/L2/L3

DVAELOTX REAL - ms Deviation of derived electricaloperating time from initial fingerprintopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVAMCOTX REAL - ms Deviation of derived mechanicaloperating time from initial fingerprintopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVACVX REAL - m/s Deviation of derived contact velocityfrom initial fingerprint opers forphase L1/L2/L3

DVAPSAX REAL - deg Deviation of pre strike angle frominitial fingerprint opers for phaseL1/L2/L3

DVAIMDX REAL - ms Deviation of initial mechanicalmovement delay from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVAMCMVX REAL - ms Deviation of total mechanicalmovement time from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DVAARGTX REAL - ms Deviation of arcing time from initialfingerprint opers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFPMCOTOX REAL - ms Average drift of predicted mech opertime from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFPELOTOX REAL - ms Average drift of predicted elec opertime from initial fingerprint openopers for phaseL1/L2/L3

DFAELOTOX REAL - ms Average drift in deviation of elec opertime from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFAMCOTOX REAL - ms Average drift of mechanical oper timefrom initial fingerprint open opers forphase L1/L2/L3

DFACVOX REAL - m/s Average drift in deviation of contactvelocity from initial fingerprint openopers for phaseL1/L2/L3

DFAIMDOX REAL - ms Average drift of initial mechmovement delay from initialfingerprint open opers for phaseL1/L2/L3

DFAMCMVOX REAL - ms Average drift of total mech movementtime from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFAARGTX REAL - ms Average drift in deviation of arcingtime from initial fingerprint openopers for phase L1/L2/L3





DFPMCOTCX REAL - ms Average drift of predicted mech opertime from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFPELOTCX REAL - ms Average drift of predicted elec opertime from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFPPSAX REAL - deg Average drift of predicted prestrikeangle from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFAELOTCX REAL - ms Average drift of electrical operatingtime from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFAMCOTCX REAL - ms Average drift of mechanical oper timefrom initial fingerprint close opers forphase L1/L2/L3

DFACVCX REAL - m/s Average drift of derived contactvelocity from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

DFAPSAX REAL - deg Average drift of pre strike angle frominitial fingerprint opers for phaseL1/L2/L3

DFAIMDCX REAL - ms Average drift of initial mechmovement delay from initialfingerprint close opers for phaseL1/L2/L3

DFAMCMVCX REAL - ms Average drift of total mech movementtime from initial fingerprint closeopers for phase L1/L2/L3

ERMCORTX REAL - ms Error of actual value from predictedvalue of mechanical operation time forphase L1/L2/L3

ERELORTX REAL - ms Error of actual value from predictedvalue of electrical operation time forphase L1/L2/L3

ERPSAX REAL - deg Error of actual value from predictedvalue of pre strike angle for phaseL1/L2/L3

ERARGTIMX REAL - ms Error of actual value from predictedvalue of arcing time for phaseL1/L2/L3

RTKCTOX INTEGER - - Re-strike count output for phaseL1/L2/L3

ACVX REAL - m/s Actual contact velocity for phaseL1/L2/L3

11.16.7 Operation principleGUID-EE092D58-0302-4181-9F9E-13D08035AD7D v1

The overall operation of the function is explained using the functional module diagram.



Coordination

Logic

Coor inputs

Delta values

Command inputs

Command outputs

Predicted/Actual values

Common inputs

Open specific values

Close specific values

Trigger reset

Coor reset

Coor output

Trigger

Predicted values

Actual values

Fingerprint

Average

Drift Average

Deviation

from Average

Trigger

Predicted Average

Actual Average

Trigger

Actual Deviation

Predicted Drift Average

Actual Drift Average

Error

EvaluationErrors

Fingerprint Trigger

Predicted Deviation



Figure 111: Functional module diagram

11.16.7.1 Coordination logicGUID-487CD3F7-D62A-456F-BD8E-1AB0EEE46920 v1

The coordination logic block describes the adaptive switching times compensation for thesystematic variation of circuit breaker operating time. Based on the received coordinationinputs from other functions such as, StrategySwitching (coorSSMC), Pre-strike (coorPSMC),Re-strike (coorRSMC), correction times are considered for open or close operations. Electricalcorrection and mechanical correction times are considered for evaluating overallcompensation for the circuit breaker operating time, ideal RRDS (Rate of Raise of DielectricStrength) related correction for opening operations (Re-strike/Re-ignition) correction timeand ideal RDDS (Rate of Decay of Dielectric Strength) related correction for closing operations(Pre-strike) correction time. Both Pre-strike and Re-ignition/Re-srtike correction timesadaptively vary to provide the overall compensation for the varying circuit breaker operatingtime. Summation of deltaT1XR, deltaT1XP is considered as deltaT1X, summation of deltaT3XR,deltaT3XP is considered as deltaT3X and deltaT7XR is considered as deltaT7X.


Figure 112: Coordination signal flow diagram

The coordination signal flow used in PWC600 shown in Figure 112 is based on the concepts ofsubscriber/publisher. This ensures that in no conditions (both open, close command goinghigh or wrong ACT connections) the command operation compensation or correctionevaluation result in wrong operation. The difference from the subscriber/publisher concept tothe adaptation here is, the additional triggering permit signal is required along with thesubscriber. Consider an example, when an open command is received and which resets in a



few milliseconds (>5ms required as per PWC requirements) and a close command input is highor both go high together, then the functionality blocks compensation and allows a reducedaccuracy switching or ideally possible switching is performed.

Open/close command input is received by all the function blocks as shown in Figure 112.Coordination signal contains various information which is exchanged between function blocksto execute the evaluations synchronously with each other. Any discrepancy (for example,mismatch of command input status between functions) is reported as an alarm to the user. Allthe coordination signals from other function blocks is reported to Monitoring Compensation(MONCOMP) function to check for operation values reporting. Coordination signal logic flowdiagram in MonitoringCompensation which describes coordination signal bit wise control isshown in Figure 112. Predicted values (PredictedValue) and actual values (ActualValue) arefiltered out from input value received from Pre-strike and Re-strike functions according to thestatus of the coordination signal. During close operation, parameters related to the openoperation have no relevance and vice-versa for open operation to close operation parameters.Hence, when a variable has no relevance, that is, it is not applicable for database management,a very high positive value is logged which can be filtered off later. However, if an operationfails or particular parameter could not be evaluated during an operation before the time out, azero value cannot be stored as for some parameters it might mean an ideal operation.

COORSSMC

COORPSMC

COORRSMC

COORTSMC

SSMCBit0 = OpenSSMCBit1 = Close

SSMCBit2 = OpenByPassSSMCBit3 = CloseByPassSSMCBit23 = TestOpenSSMCBit24 = TestClose

PSMCBit0 = OpenPSMCBit1 = Close

PSMCBit4 = ExternalOpenPSMCBit5 = ExternalClose

PSMCBit6 = CalcReadyOpenPSMCBit7 = CalcReadyClose

PSMCBit11 = ReducedAccOpenPSMCBit12 = ReducedAccClose

PSMCBit21 = OpenCancelPSMCBit22 = CloseCancel

PSMCBit23 = TestOpenPSMCBit24 = TestClosePSMCBit25 = PredOpenPSMCBit26 = PredClosePSMCBit27 = ActualOpenPSMCBit28 = ActualClose

TSMCBit 8 = TriggerResetTSMCBit 9 = COORReset

PSMCBit0 = OpenPSMCBit1 = Close

PSMCBit4 = ExternalOpenPSMCBit5 = ExternalClose

PSMCBit6 = CalcReadyOpenPSMCBit7 = CalcReadyClose

PSMCBit11 = ReducedAccOpenPSMCBit12 = ReducedAccClose

PSMCBit21 = OpenCancelPSMCBit22 = CloseCancel

PSMCBit23 = TestOpenPSMCBit24 = TestClosePSMCBit25 = PredOpenPSMCBit26 = PredClosePSMCBit27 = ActualOpenPSMCBit28 = ActualClose

OpenCmdInCloseCmdIn

OpenCmdOutCloseCmdOut

OpenCmdIn = OpenCmdInCloseCmdIn = CloseCmdIn

OpenCmdOut = OpenCmdOutCloseCmdOut = CloseCmdOut OpenCmdOut

CloseCmdOut

OpenCmdInCloseCmdIn

COORDATA

RSMCBit4PSMCBit4

RSMCBit23

RSMCBit11PSMCBit11

SSMCBit0

RSMCBit0PSMCBit0

PSMCBit23

SSMCBit2

XORMCTSBit4

MCTSBit11

OpenCmdOut

RSMCBit27RSMCBit6

PSMCBit27PSMCBit6

Predicted/Actual Data Types

for Open

NormalData Types

for Open

Predicted/Actual Data Types for Close

NormalData Types for Close

Actual Data Values

For Open

TrigO

NormalData Types

for Open/Close

RSMCBit25RSMCBit6

PSMCBit25PSMCBit6

Predicted Data Values

For Open

RSMCBit5PSMCBit5

RSMCBit24

RSMCBit12PSMCBit12

SSMCBit1

RSMCBit1PSMCBit1

PSMCBit24

SSMCBit3

XORMCTSBit5

MCTSBit12

RSMCBit26

PSMCBit26

RSMCBit28RSMCBit7

PSMCBit28PSMCBit7

Actual Data ValuesFor Close

Predicted Data ValuesFor Close

TrigC

N/AData Values

of Close

N/AData Values

of Open

TSMCBit9

RSMCBit7

PSMCBit7

TrigOTrigC

RSMCBit0

PSMCBit0SSMCBit0 MCTSBit0

RSMCBit1


RSMCBit2


RSMCBit3


RSMCBit23


RSMCBit24SSMCBit24 MCTSBit24PSMCBit24

PSMCBit21RSMCBit21

MCTSBit21

PSMCBit22RSMCBit22

MCTSBit22

MCTSBit10Trigger

TSMCBit8

Latch

TSMCBit8

Latch

Latch

Latch

MCTSBit0 = OpenMCTSBit1 = Close

MCTSBit2 = OpenBypassMCTSBit3 = CloseBypassMCTSBit4 = ExternalOpenMCTSBit5 = ExternalClose

MCTSBit10 = TriggerMCTSBit11 = ReducedAccOpenMCTSBit12 = ReducedAccClose

MCTSBit21 = OpenCancelMCTSBit22 = CloseCancel

MCTSBit23 = TestOpenMCTSBit24 = TestClose

MCTSBit30 = CBUnstable

COORMCTS

COORInput

DirectData

InputData

StoredData

IntermediateData

LEGEND

COOROutput

OpenCmdIn

SSTSBit29

SSTSBit29

SSTSBit21

TrigBCClose

SSTSBit29

SSTSBit22

SSMCBit29

RSMCBit21

TrigBCOpen

PSMCBit21

SSMCBit29

RSMCBit22

PSMCBit22

OpenCmdOut

OpenCmdIn

SSTSBit29

IEC12000073-1.vsd


Figure 113: Co-ordination signal logical flow diagram in MonitoringCompensation

11.16.7.2 Fingerprint average logicGUID-6D6F4F61-1FDB-44B7-9DB0-62FB1F69F4A7 v1

The fingerprint average logic block describes the evaluation of initial fingerprint operations,average of correction times for various operating and controlling parameters such as,mechanical opening/closing time, electrical opening/closing time and Pre-striking angle.Actual values of operating/controlling parameters and predicted values of operating/controlling parameters is fed from ACBMSCBR (Advanced Circuit Breaker OperationMonitoring) functions. This block selects the actual/predicted values based on coordinationsignal inputs received from ACBMSCBR functions. Cumulative average of actual and predictedparameters is evaluated to monitor the variation of actual and predicted values for initialfingerprint records. Figure 114 depicts the flow of cumulative average computation for bothpredicted and actual operating/controlling parameters for initial fingerprint operations.Computed average for different controlling/operating parameters of CB is used to evaluatedeviation of actual/predicted values from the initial fingerprint operations.



Fingerprint records count

setting evaluationNumber of Initial Records

Option – Combined/Equal

Trigger Open/Close

Fingerprint Records count

Open Records count

Close Records count

Trigger Deviation Close

Trigger Deviation Open

Average Calculation Logic

Input Quantity Close

Average Open

Max Records Average Close

Input Quantity Open

IEC12000063-1-vsd


Figure 114: Fingerprint average block diagram

Equations representing the calculation of number of records, trigger open/close for averagecomputation and average computation for open/close operation are as follows:

max ReRecords NOT optCombEqual optCombEqual initial cord= ( ) ⋅ + ⋅20 ss( ) / 2


open cordsCount MIN Records MAX open cordsCount TriRe max Re= ⋅ +( ) ⋅1 gggerOpen open cordsCount( ) ⋅( )( )Re


close cordsCount MIN Records MAX close cordsCount TRe max Re= ⋅ +( ) ⋅1 rriggerClose close cordsCount( ) ⋅( )( )Re


open cordsCount MIN open cordsCount initial cords closeRe Re Re R= ⋅ − eecordsCount( )( )


close cordsCount MIN close cordsCount initial cords openRe Re Re= ⋅ − RRecordsCount( )( )


aveCalcTrigOpen open cordsCount open cordsCountOld= −Re Re


( ) ( ) ( )1Re

averageOpen openrecordsCount inputQuantityOpenaverageOpen avgCalcTrigOpen averageopenCount NOT avgCalcTrigOpen

open cordsCountæ × - + ö

= × + ×ç ÷è ø


open cordsCountOld open cordsCountRe Re=


aveCalcTrigClose close cordsCount close cordsCountOld= −Re Re


( ) ( ) ( )Re 1Re

averageClose close cordsCount inputQuantityCloseaverageClose aveCalcTrigClose averageOpenCount NOT aveCalcTrigClose

close cordsCountæ × - + ö

= × + ×ç ÷è ø


close cordsCountOld close cordsCountRe Re=


11.16.7.3 Deviation from average logicGUID-92C024B6-932D-42B6-9BCD-19893C67CE0C v1

The deviation from average logic block describes the deviation of correction times for variousoperating and controlling parameters such as, mechanical opening/closing time, electricalopening/closing time and Pre-striking angle. Predicted/actual average values of operating/controlling parameters and actual/predicted values of operating/controlling parameters,differes in the deviation from respective actual/predicted parameters. Figure 115 depicts the



calculation of deviation of actual/predicted values from average of initial fingerprintoperations of different operating/controlling parameters of CB. Computed deviation valuesare used to evaluate drift of actual/predicted values from the initial fingerprint operations.

predAveMechTimeX

predAveElecTimeX

predAvePreStrikeAngleX

actAveElecTimeX

actAveMechTimeX

actAveContactVelocityX

actAvePreStrikeAngleX

actAveInitialMechDelayX

actAveMechMovementTimeX

Deviation Value= Actual/Predcited value –

Average value

predMechTimeX

predElecTimeX

predPreStrikeAngleX

actMechTimeX

actElecTimeX

actPreStrikeAngleX

actInitialMechDelayX

actMechMovementTimeX

predInitialMechDelayX

predMechMovementTimeX

actContactVelocityX

predDevMechTimeX

predDevElecTimeX

predDevPreStrikeAngleX

actDevElecTimeX

actDevMechTimeX

actDevContactVelocityX

actDevPreStrikeAngleX

actDevInitialMechDelayX

actDevMechMovementTimeX

IEC12000064-1-vsd


Figure 115: Deviation from average block diagram

11.16.7.4 Drift average logicGUID-E8019CE4-C4DD-4EE6-B20D-45C6F13BC25A v1

Drift is the cumulative average deviation of a parameter (either predicted/actual) from theaverage fingerprint values. Drift gives a good explanation about parameter deviation as anaverage. Deviation is only the current operation's measure. However, drift accumulates thedeviation of a steady drift value ideally near zero, which indicates that the POW (point onwave) control occurs steadily on the CB. A flickering drift value suggests that the CB POWcontrol is not operating the intended way. Drift average calculation comprises of deviation ofoperating/controlling parameters of CB from the actual/predicted parameters. Drift average,calculated to estimate the drift of actual/predicted values or operating/controllingparameters of CB for the initial fingerprint operations, helps the user to estimate the variationtrend of CB performance parameters over a certain operating time. Figure 116 depicts driftevaluation logic for actual/predicted operating/controlling parameters.



Average Drift= Cumulative Sum/Number of operations

predDriftMechOperTimeOX

predDriftElecOperTimeOX

predDriftPreStrikeAngleX

actDriftElecOperTimeOX

actDriftMechOperTimeOX

actDriftContactVelocityOX

actDriftArcingTimeX

actDriftInitialMechDelayOX

actDriftMechMovementTimeOX

-1ZInit = 0.0

actDriftPreStrikeAngleX

predDriftMechOperTimeCX

predDriftElecOperTimeCX

actDriftElecOperTimeCX

actDriftMechOperTimeCX

actDriftContactVelocityCX

actDriftInitialMechDelayCX

actDriftMechMovementTimeCX

predAveMechOperTimeOX

predAveElecOperTimeOX

predAvePreStrikeAngleX

actAveElecOperTimeOX

actAveMechOperTimeOX

actAveContactVelocityOX

actAveArcingTimeX

actAveInitialMechDelayOX

actAveMechMovementTimeOX

actAvePreStrikeAngleX

predAveMechOperTimeCX

predAveElecOperTimeCX

actAveElecOperTimeCX

actAveMechOperTimeCX

actAveContactVelocityCX

actAveInitialMechDelayCX

actAveMechMovementTimeCX IEC12000065-1-vsd


Figure 116: Drift average logical diagram

11.16.7.5 Error evaluation logicGUID-2FF4736F-6474-4115-B19B-3945DF5675F1 v1

Error value is evaluated for electrical open/close time, mechanical open/close time and Pre-strike angle to determine the deviation of predicted value from the actual value. Followingequation provides evaluation of error value for open/close operations.

ErrorValue ActualValue edictedValue= − Pr


11.17 Multilevel threshold alarm generation MONALMGUID-768D13F2-096F-4D18-8612-0737444B992C v1

11.17.1 IdentificationGUID-D00D44D6-B7FE-4980-BDE9-63B08047DE28 v1

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 devicenumber

Multilevel thresholdalarm generation

MONALM - -

11.17.2 FunctionalityGUID-92C746A1-FFCA-42A5-BB58-7F00D25D57C5 v2

MONALM is used to monitor up to 9 groups of measured or calculated analog values, toascertain whether they are within a defined “normal” range as per the process requirements.The function compares each input value against 1…4 threshold levels and indicates the rangein which it is currently residing. Values outside the normal range are indicated by a warning oralarm.



The numerical range information can be decoded into binary status signals by other functionssuch as MVEXP, for example, to control a LED or binary output or to generate an event.

Furthermore, MONALM monitors one group of binary inputs, which represent alarm levels, andreplicates the input values to corresponding output signals. These signals are also used toindicate the operational capability of the circuit breaker.

A quick indication of the overall status can be obtained from two alarm status outputs, whichsummarize the conditions of 5 input groups each.



11.17.3 Function blockGUID-FAC0AFE4-1441-4210-ABB3-D3010B2EE851 v1

MONALMBLOCKBLOCKFUNCI1L1I1L2I1L3I2L1I2L2I2L3I3L1I3L2I3L3I4L1I4L2I4L3I5L1I5L2I5L3I6L1I6L2I6L3I7L1I7L2I7L3I8L1I8L2I8L3I9L1I9L2I9L3I1ALL1I1ALL2I1ALL3I2ALL1I2ALL2I2ALL3I3ALL1I3ALL2I3ALL3I4ALL1I4ALL2I4ALL3I5ALL1I5ALL2I5ALL3I6ALL1I6ALL2I6ALL3I7ALL1I7ALL2I7ALL3I8ALL1I8ALL2I8ALL3I9ALL1I9ALL2I9ALL3BI10FLL1BI10MLL1BI10LLL1BI10FLL2BI10MLL2BI10LLL2BI10FLL3BI10MLL3BI10LLL3

ALR1L1ALR1L2ALR1L3ALR2L1ALR2L2ALR2L3ALR3L1ALR3L2ALR3L3ALR4L1ALR4L2ALR4L3ALR5L1ALR5L2ALR5L3ALR6L1ALR6L2ALR6L3ALR7L1ALR7L2ALR7L3ALR8L1ALR8L2ALR8L3ALR9L1ALR9L2ALR9L3

B10WRL1B10ALL1

B10HALL1B10WRL2B10ALL2

B10HALL2B10WRL3B10ALL3

B10HALL3ALS1T5

ALS6T10CBOPCAP3P

IEC12000039_1_vsdIEC12000039 V1 EN-US

Figure 117: MONALM function block




Table 225: MONALM Input signals




I1L1 REAL 0.0 Analog input 1 L1



























I1ALL1 BOOLEAN 0 Alarm input signal showing input 1 L1’s state of health































BI10FLL1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10 full level signal for phase L1

BI10MLL1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10 medium level signal for phase L1

BI10LLL1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10 low level signal for phase L1








Table 226: MONALM Output signals


ALR1L1 INTEGER Alarm range integer value for signal 1 L1































B10WRL1 BOOLEAN Output warning signal for binary input 10 L1

B10ALL1 BOOLEAN Output alarm signal for binary input 10 L1

B10HALL1 BOOLEAN Output high alarm signal for binary input 10 L1



B10HALL2 BOOLEAN Output high alarm signal for binary input 10 L2



B10HALL3 BOOLEAN Output high alarm signal for binary input10 L3

ALS1T5 INTEGER Alarm status integer for inputs 1 to 5

ALS6T10 INTEGER Alarm status integer for inputs 6 to 10

CBOPCAP3P INTEGER CB operation capability signal having packed information forthree phases




Table 227: MONALM Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


Inp1LimitSelect DisabledHi, HiHi, Lo, LoLoHi, Hi-HiLo, Lo-LoHi, LoHi-Hi, Lo-LoHiHi-HiLoLo-Lo

- - Disabled Selection of monitored limits for input1

Inp1HystAbsolute 0.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 10.0 Absolute Hysteresis value for input 1

Inp1HiHiLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 100.0 High alarm value limit above which anupper limit alarm would be issued forinput 1.

Inp1HiLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 100.0 High warning value limit above whichan upper limit warning would beissued for input 1.

Inp1LoLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Low value limit below which a lowerlimit warning would be issued forinput 1.

Inp1LoLoLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Lower value limit below which a lowerlimit alarm would be issued for input1.

Inp1SensorMode 1 sensor mode3 sensor mode

- - 1 sensor mode Selection of one or three sensors forinput 1.


- - Disabled Selection of monitored limits for input2.












Inp3LimitSelect DisabledHi, HiHi, Lo, LoLoHi, Hi-HiLo, Lo-LoHi, LoHiHi-HiLoLo-Lo

- - Disabled Selection of monitored limits for input3.








Inp4LimitSelect DisabledHi, HiHi, Lo, LoLoHi, Hi-HiLo, Lo-LoHi, LoHi-Hi, Lo-LoHiLoLo-Lo



























Inp6LoLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Low value limit below which a lowerlimit warning would be issued forinput 6




















Inp8HiHiLimit -100.0 - 99999.9 - 0.1 100.0 High alarm value limit above which anupper limit alarm would be issued forinput 8



















BinInp10AlarmMode Disable allEnab only WrnEnab only AlarmEnab only HiAlarmEnab Wrn & AlarmEnab Al & Hi AlEnab Wrn Al &HiAl

- - Disable all Selection of alarm mode for binaryinput 10

BinInp10SensorMode 1 sensor mode3 sensor mode

- - 1 sensor mode Selection of one or three sensors forbinary input 10.


Table 228: MONALM Monitored data


ALR1L1 INTEGER 0=Normal1=High Warning2=Low Warning3=High Alarm4=Low Alarm

- Alarm range integer value for signal 1L1





























































11.17.7 Operation principleGUID-BC2E5956-4F45-4B85-BD83-AF4691E0ACDE v1

The Multilevel threshold alarm generation MONALM function triggers an alarm when an analogquantity is not in a normal range.

MONALM works on the principle of comparing the analog quantity against a set of thresholdsin two directions at two different levels on either side. Nine analog quantities, for example,control voltage, temperature, drive pressure, spring pressure and so on can be monitored suchthat when they exceed the threshold values, alarms are generated. The binary signals are thesupervising levels of an analog signal, whose status level (for example, gas pressure, springcharge status and so on) indicates when the analog signal falls below the threshold.

Use the setting InpxSensorMode to select either 1 Sensor Mode or 3 Sensor Mode operation.Select 1 Sensor Mode if a single sensor signal is connected to the corresponding IxL1 input,else select 3 Sensor Mode for three sensor signals (one per phase).

Up to nine analog input signals can be supervised. For each signal, one or two supervisionthresholds can be configured in each direction, or supervision can be disabled altogether inany direction.

The binary input level alarm can be configured to indicate Warning, Alarm and/or High Alarm.



• If the full level binary signal is high, no warning or alarm is generated, regardless of thestatus of the other binary signals.

• If the full level binary signal is low and the medium level signal is high, Warning goes high.• If only the low level signal is high, Alarm goes high.• If all binary inputs are low, High Alarm goes high.

For analog quantities, exceeding the thresholds can trigger one of the four alarms. The outputALRxLn can have different values according to the conditions defined below:

• 0 (normal range) indicates, the input signal is in normal range, that is, between low andhigh warning limits, or the alarm input IxALn is high

• 1 (high warning) indicates, the signal has risen to or above InpxHiLimit• 2 (low warning) indicates, the signal has dropped to or below InpxLoLimit• 3 (high alarm) indicates, the signal has risen to or above InpxHiHiLimit• 4 (low alarm) indicates, the signal has dropped to or below InpxLoLoLimit

where x indicates the analog input and n indicates the phase.

The input value 1.175494E-38, which is the smallest possible real value, is notevaluated for determining the range and is always treated as in Normal range,regardless of the set limits. The purpose is to prevent raising of alarms onquantities that have no defined value, for example, a switching time if thecircuit breaker has not been operated yet.

MONALM also generates a general alarm (gives information) when any one of the alarmingcondition is present or when a signal connected to IxALn goes high. Loss of the sensor signalof the monitored analog signals can be connected to this.

11.17.7.1 Alarm status logicGUID-19430436-DA44-4966-994A-10723961982D v1

The status of the supervision alarm is indicated by an alarm status functionality which isdesigned to bit pack the alarm status of all ten input groups into two integer signals. Thesequential bits carry the status information of each analog input group for all the three phasesindependently. The phase information for every input is described using two bits, where theleast significant bit (LSB) indicates warning and the most significant bit (MSB) indicates alarmor high alarm.

The alarm status information for phase L1,

• If the signal is in low or high warning range, the LSB is set high.• If the signal is in low or high alarm range, the MSB is set high.• If alarm input signal IxALL1 is high, both MSB and LSB are set high (this indicates the

status of signal's health).• In all other conditions both MSB and LSB are set low.



Analog input 1 (L1-L3)

Binary input 10(L1-L3)

Alarm status logic

Analog input 9 (L1-L3)

Input(s)2 to 8

Logic(s)2 to 8

Monitoring alarm logic

Monitoring alarm logic

ALR1(L1-L3)

Alarm status 1

ALR2(L1-L3) to ALR8(L1-L3)

Alarm status 2 to 8

ALR9(L1-L3)

Alarm status 9

Binary settings logic

B10WR(L1-L3)B10AL(L1-L3) B10HAL(L1-L3)

B10WR(L1-L3)B10AL(L1-L3) B10HAL(L1-L3)

Evaluating alarm status signal for

binary alarm outputs

ALS1T5

ALS6T10

IEC12000037_1_vsd

Alarm status 10

Evaluating CB operation capability

signal for the 3 phases

CBOPCAP3P


Figure 118: MONALM logic diagram

Figure 118 shows the alarm status processing of the analog inputs and a single binary input inthe three phases. It also evaluates the alarm status logic and generates the outputs.

Similarly, for phase L2 and phase L3, the alarm status are set. The information for all the teninputs in three-phases are divided into two 32 bit outputs. Here, output 1 is designated asALS1T5 and output 2 is designated as ALS6T10. The last two bits in both outputs are unused.

Calculating alarm status bits for analog input signalsGUID-BC10CFB6-4B39-4218-B134-0E5A55D1DD47 v1

Example for alarm status calculation for analog input signals 1-9:

Consider for any input x for phase n, if Warning (Low Warning/High Warning) information isset, then:

[ 6·(x-1) + 2·(n-1) ]th bit position in alarm status output goes high.

If Alarm (Low Alarm/High Alarm) information needs to be set, then:

[ 6·(x-1) + 2·(n-1) +1 ]th bit position in alarm status output goes high.

The Alarm and Warning information are set as shown in the table

Table 229: Alarm and Warning information for analog input signals

Input phase Assumed alarm range Bit position

1 L1 High Warning 6·(1-1)+2·(1-1) =00th bit set high

1 L2 Low Alarm 6·(1-1)+2·(2-1)+1 =33rd bit set high

1 L3 Low Warning 6·(1-1)+2·(3-1) =44th bit set high





Input phase Assumed alarm range Bit position

2 L2 High Alarm 6·(2-1)+2·(2-1)+1 =99th bit set high

2 L3 Low Alarm 6·(2-1)+2·(3-1)+1 =1111th bit set high

3 L1 Normal both 12th and 13th bit set low


3 L3 Alarm Input is high both 16th and 17th bit set high

4 L1 Normal both 18th and 19th bit set low

4 L2 Low Alarm 6·(4-1)+2·(2-1)+1 =2121st bit set high

4 L3 Low Warning 6·(4-1)+2·(3-1) =2222nd bit set high



5 L3 Alarm Input is high both 28th and 29th bit set high

ALS1T5 becomes 00110101011000110100101001011001 in binary, that is 895699545 in decimal.

During the bit packing, the 30th and 31st bits are not used (set as zero).

Similar procedure is carried out for ALS6T10

Calculating alarm status bits for binary input signalsGUID-B16C1FEF-36F9-4ECB-9E5A-4331029DB904 v1

Example for alarm status calculation for binary input 10:

Table 230: Alarm status bits for binary input signals

Input in phase Alarm range Alarm status

L1 Warning is set to 01

L2 Alarm is set to 1000

L3 High Alarm is set to 100000

Hence the alarm status for binary input 10 is 101001. This gets bit packed in ALS6T10 (in 24thto 29th bit position).

If none of these conditions are met (that is no warning or alarm), the bits are set to 0.

11.17.7.2 HysteresisGUID-5C6220FD-69BC-4C82-99EA-0C54603F9A28 v1

Hysteresis is applied to prevent frequent toggling of alarms if the input signal oscillatesaround the threshold by a small amount. The extent of the hysteresis zone is defined byInpxHystAbsolute for each of the analog input signals x. This setting applies equally to allenabled thresholds for that signal group.



• If the signal rises above one of the upper thresholds, the output will indicate thiscondition until the signal drops below the level threshold minus hysteresis.

• If the signal drops below one of the lower thresholds, the output will indicate thiscondition until the signal rises above the level threshold plus hysteresis.

This is demonstrated in Figure 119, showing an analog signal passing from Normal rangethrough High Warning, High Alarm, High Warning, Normal, Low Warning, and back to Normalranges. Hysteresis is indicated by arrows, and small circles mark the points of output statuschange.

High Alarm level

High Warning level

Low Warning level

Low Alarm levelHysteresis


Figure 119: Example of analog signal passing through warning and alarm levels withhysteresis

11.17.7.3 Circuit breaker operation capabilityGUID-57128495-A0F6-44AF-B938-CF0A07F1E0E9 v2

The operation capability of the circuit breaker can be determined by the binary input signallevels for the three phases.

For any phase,

• When the input signal is full level, the breaker can operate a full cycle of open-close-openoperation.

• When the input signal is medium level, the breaker can operate only a close followed by anopen operation.

• When the input signal is low level, the breaker operation is restricted to a single openoperation.

• When the input signal is absent, there cannot be a possible breaker operation.

Example, consider full level binary input signal (representing stored energy in the drive) forphase L1, medium level signal for phase L2 and low level signal for phase L3.

• Phase L1 has full level binary input signal. It implies that full spring charge is available andthe breaker can operate a complete cycle of open-close-open operation.

• For phase L2, the full level binary signal is absent and only the medium level binary inputsignal is high, it implies that sufficient spring charge is unavailable for a full cycleoperation. Hence the breaker can operate only a close followed by an open operation.

• For phase L3, the spring charge is low, the breaker can operate only open operation.

In this case, the integer value of CBOPCAP3P is 131844 as defined in Table 231



Table 231 shows all possible combinations of circuit breaker operation for the three phaseswith the corresponding output integer values.

Table 231: Operation capability of the circuit breaker

Combination IntegerL1 L2 L3 CBOPCAP3P

None None None 65793

None None Open 131329

None None Close-Open 196865

None None Open-Close-Open 262401

None Open None 66049

None Open Open 131585

None Open Close-Open 197121

None Open Open-Close-Open 262657

None Close-Open None 66305

None Close-Open Open 131841

None Close-Open Close-Open 197377

None Close-Open Open-Close-Open 262913

None Open-Close-Open None 66561

None Open-Close-Open Open 132097

None Open-Close-Open Close-Open 197633

None Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open 263169

Open None None 65794

Open None Open 131330

Open None Close-Open 196866

Open None Open-Close-Open 262402

Open Open None 66050

Open Open Open 131586

Open Open Close-Open 197122

Open Open Open-Close-Open 262658

Open Close-Open None 66306

Open Close-Open Open 131842

Open Close-Open Close-Open 197378

Open Close-Open Open-Close-Open 262914

Open Open-Close-Open None 66562

Open Open-Close-Open Open 132098

Open Open-Close-Open Close-Open 197634

Open Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open 263170

Close-Open None None 65795

Close-Open None Open 131331

Close-Open None Close-Open 196867

Close-Open None Open-Close-Open 262403

Close-Open Open None 66051

Close-Open Open Open 131587




Combination IntegerL1 L2 L3 CBOPCAP3P

Close-Open Open Close-Open 197123

Close-Open Open Open-Close-Open 262659

Close-Open Close-Open None 66307

Close-Open Close-Open Open 131843

Close-Open Close-Open Close-Open 197379

Close-Open Close-Open Open-Close-Open 262915

Close-Open Open-Close-Open None 66563

Close-Open Open-Close-Open Open 132099

Close-Open Open-Close-Open Close-Open 197635

Close-Open Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open 263171

Open-Close-Open None None 65796

Open-Close-Open None Open 131332

Open-Close-Open None Close-Open 196868

Open-Close-Open None Open-Close-Open 262404

Open-Close-Open Open None 66052

Open-Close-Open Open Open 131588

Open-Close-Open Open Close-Open 197124

Open-Close-Open Open Open-Close-Open 262660

Open-Close-Open Close-Open None 66308

Open-Close-Open Close-Open Open 131844

Open-Close-Open Close-Open Close-Open 197380

Open-Close-Open Close-Open Open-Close-Open 262916

Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open None 66564

Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open Open 132100

Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open Close-Open 197636

Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open Open-Close-Open 263172

In the default configuration, connecting no signals to the hardware binaryinputs for spring charge levels results in CBOPCAP3P permanently indicatingfull for all three phases (integer value 263172).

11.18 ACBMSCBRGUID-3CAEF8F5-1011-46EF-BFAC-E666EFF91B32 v1

11.18.1 IdentificationGUID-098C27C6-A8C0-4B16-ACE9-84CF24ABC921 v1




Advanced circuit breaker operationmonitoring

ACBMSCBR — —



11.18.2 FunctionalityGUID-95C5500E-1C42-455E-A3CC-831181DAFDBA v2

ACBMSCBR monitors the condition of a circuit breaker pole by measuring and supervising itselectrical and mechanical performance during opening and closing operations. Accordingly,the measurements will be used to report and, if configured, adaptively compensate forchanges in the circuit breaker’s performance, including optimizing the arcing time to avoid re-strikes/re-ignitions.

In controlled switching applications, ACBMSCBR assists SSCPOW in determining the precisetarget phase angles. For this purpose, it evaluates compensation values according to actualsystem frequency and voltage, circuit breaker scatter characteristics, etc. so that switchingtransients due to mechanical and electrical variations in CB operating parameters areminimized.



11.18.3 Function blockGUID-5BD2F362-E6D7-477E-A8EE-FDE48D9B784B v1



Figure 120: ACBMSCBR function block




Table 232: ACBMSCBR Input signals



U3P GROUPSIGNAL

- Three phase voltage input

I3P GROUPSIGNAL

- Three phase current input

U3PL GROUPSIGNAL

- Three phase load voltage input

REFIN GROUPSIGNAL

- Zero crossing and reference misc signals input


INNOOPLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate NO contact for phase LX open operation(from CBLEARN)

INNCOPLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate NC contact for phase LX open operation(from CBLEARN)

INPRIOPLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate primary contact for phase LX open operation(from CBLEARN)

INPRICLLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate primary contact for phase LX close operation(from CBLEARN)

INNOCLLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate NO contact for phase LX close operation(from CBLEARN)

INNCCLLX REAL 0.0 Time to operate NC contact for phase LX close operation(from CBLEARN)

STRANGLX REAL 0.0 Strategy switching angle for phase LX

DELTAT2LX REAL 0.0 Circuit breaker switching correction delay for phase LX

TMPIN REAL 0.0 Temperature input

CRDSSACLX INTEGER 0 Coordination input from SSCPOW to ACBMSCBR for phase LX

ALMS1T5A INTEGER 0 Alarm status integer for input 1 to 5 from MONALMa

ALMS6T10A INTEGER 0 Alarm status integer for input 6 to 10 from MONALMa

ALMS1T5B INTEGER 0 Alarm status integer for input 1 to 5 from MONALMb

ALMS6T10B INTEGER 0 Alarm status integer for input 6 to 10 from MONALMb

T2ALSTS INTEGER 0 Alarm status for circuit breaker switching correction delay

CLCMDINP BOOLEAN 0 Input close command received by ACBMSCBR from SSCPOW

CLCMDLX BOOLEAN 0 Time activated control close synchronous switchingcommand given by SSCPOW for phase LX

OPCMDINP BOOLEAN 0 Input open command received by ACBMSCBR from SSCPOW

OPCMDLX BOOLEAN 0 Time activated control open synchronous switchingcommand given by SSCPOW for phase LX

INPNOLX BOOLEAN 0 NO status feedback from CB phase LX

INPNCLX BOOLEAN 0 NC status feedback from CB phase LX

LERACTIVE BOOLEAN 0 Indication for active CB test mode

RESOPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset operation count

RESADCOMP BOOLEAN 0 Reset adaptive corrections delta T3 and delta T7

RESRCNT BOOLEAN 0 Input to reset re-strike count





RESRESTRC BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear re-strike correction for open operations

RESETUNST BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to exit from CB unstable state

RESETABL BOOLEAN 0 Reset input to clear ablation sum and relative ablation sumoutputs


Table 233: ACBMSCBR Output signals


DELTAT1LX REAL Electrical switching compensation delay from switchinginstant for phase LX

DELTAT3LX REAL Adaptive switching compensation delay for re-strike and pre-strike for phase LX

DELTAT6LX REAL Switching strategy delay from switching instant for handlingmechanical scatter for phase LX

DELTAT7LX REAL Switching delay for open if re-strike/re-ignition detected asper user set value for phase LX

REFOUT GROUP SIGNAL Zero crossing and reference misc signals output

ARCTMLX REAL Arcing time duration of CB for phase LX

PRESTRALX REAL Angle of pre-strike from previous voltage zero for phase LX

PRETRTMLX REAL Prestrike time for phase LX

TMCMSCHLX REAL Time from command to status change for phase LX

RTKCTLX REAL Re-strike count output for phase LX

ELORTMLX REAL CB electrical operating time for phase LX

MCORTMLX REAL CB mechanical operating time for phase LX

MCMOVTMLX REAL Mechanical movement time between auxiliary contactsobserved for phase LX

OPTOPNOLX REAL Operation time open output for phase LX

OPTCLSOLX REAL Operation time close output for phase LX

RCTTOPOLX REAL Reaction time measurement open (initial mechanical delay foropen) output for phase LX

RCTTCLOLX REAL Reaction time measurement close (initial mechanical delayfor close) output for phase LX

AUXSWTOLX REAL Auxiliary switches' time during open for phase LX

AUXSWTCLX REAL Auxiliary switches' time during close for phase LX

CONVELLX REAL Calculated contact velocity for phase LX

OPSPOPOLX REAL Operation speed open output for phase LX

OPSPCLOLX REAL Operation speed close output for phase LX

ITMCDLLX REAL Initial mechanical movement delay observed for phase LX

LOOPABLLX REAL Last open operation ablation calculated for breaker contactsin phase LX

ABLSUMLX REAL Cumulated sum of calculated ablation for phase LX

ABLSUMRLX REAL Ablation sum relative to set alarm level for phase LX

LOOPILX REAL Instantaneous current interrupted during last open operationfor phase LX

LOOPPILX REAL Peak current interrupted during last open operation for phaseLX





SWALX REAL RMS current detected before last open operation for phaseLX

TMPOUT REAL Temperature output

OPRCNTRST INTEGER Resettable operation counter

OPRCNTOPN INTEGER Total number of open operations

OPRCNTCLS INTEGER Total number of close operations

INOPCNOLX INTEGER Count for number of in-sync operations for Open for phaseLX

INOPCNCLX INTEGER Count for number of in-sync operations for Close for phaseLX

CBSTSLX INTEGER CB position derived from mechanical and electrical status forphase LX

CBSTSCFLX INTEGER CB position confirmation output to SSCPOW for phase LX

MECHHOLX INTEGER Alarm signal for unstable mechanical behaviour for phase LX

CRDACSSLX INTEGER Co-ordination output from ACBMSCBR to SSCPOW for phaseLX

CRDPSMCLX INTEGER Co-ordination output from pre-strike detection to MONCOMPfor phase LX

CRDRSMCLX INTEGER Co-ordination output from re-strike detection to MONCOMPfor phase LX

CBSTNCLX BOOLEAN Circuit breaker status derived from NC contact for phase LX

CBSTNOLX BOOLEAN Circuit breaker status derived from NO contact for phase LX

UNSTOPOLX BOOLEAN Indication of an unstable operation detected for phase LX

RSTRDETLX BOOLEAN Indication of re-strike detected for phase LX

FLTDETLX BOOLEAN Output signalling detection of fault current for phase LX

CNTPOSOLX BOOLEAN Indication of contradicting electrical and mechanical CBposition indications for phase LX

OPERWALLX BOOLEAN Indication for consecutive operations with any monitoredvalue more than warning limit for phase LX

OPCWRNOLX BOOLEAN Warning signal for number of operations exceeding set levelfor phase LX

OPCALMOLX BOOLEAN Alarm signal for number of operations exceeding set level forphase LX

MAXRCALLX BOOLEAN Alarm signal for maximum restrike correction limit reached

OPTMALOLX BOOLEAN Alarm signal indicating switch operating time exceedingthreshold for phase LX

MAXRALOLX BOOLEAN Re-strike count alarm output for phase LX

WRABLLX BOOLEAN Warning signal for ablation exceeding threshold for phase LX

ALABLLX BOOLEAN Alarm signal for ablation exceeding threshold for phase LX

ALOUTLX BOOLEAN General alarm output for phase LX




Table 234: ACBMSCBR Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn

- - Off Operation mode Off / On

BetaAdjustElec 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.1 Electrical factor of adjustment appliedon scatter correction time

BetaAdjustMech 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.1 Mechanical factor of adjustmentapplied on scatter correction time

TotalDispLX 10.0 - 1000.0 mm 0.1 200.0 Total mechanical contactdisplacement (in mm) for phase LX

NODispLX 1.0 - 1000.0 mm 0.1 200.0 NO displacement from fully openposition (in mm) for phase LX

NCDispLX 1.0 - 1000.0 mm 0.1 20.0 NC displacement from fully openposition (in mm) for phase LX

EarliestOpenTime 0.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 20.0 Earliest time for reignition freewindow(ms)

LatestOpenTime 0.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 20.0 Latest time for reignition freewindow(ms)

ArcTimeTrafoLX 0.0 - 100.0 ms 0.1 5.0 Arcing time required for transformerfor phase LX

FaultCurrentPercent 110 - 800 %IB 10 150 Current level in percent for detectionof fault

PriDispLX 1.0 - 1000.0 mm 0.1 20.0 Primary displacement from fully openposition (in mm) for phase LX

ScatterMechClLX 0.05 - 3.00 ms 0.05 1.00 Mechanical scatter for close operationin ms

ScatRDDSPercLX 0.0 - 25.0 % 0.1 5.0 Spread of nominal RDDS in percent forphase LX

OpCntAlm Disab warn &alarmEnab warnEnab alarmEnab warn &alarm

- - Enab warn Enable/Disable alarm for operationcount

MaxRkRiAlm DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for re-strikecount output

CntrlPosAlm DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable indication ofcontradicting electrical andmechanical CB position

OutAlm DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable general alarm output

AblationAlm DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for ablation

Ablation DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable ablation calculation

OpTmAlm DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for operationtime

UnstOpChrAlm DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable indication of anunstable operation





OperWithAlm DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for monitoredoutputs exceeding warning threshold

MaxReStrCorrAlm DisableEnable

- - Enable Enable/Disable alarm for maximumre-strike correction limit reached

GlobalBaseSel 1 - 6 - 1 1 GlobalBaseSel

Table 235: ACBMSCBR Non group settings (advanced)


UDead 5.0 - 80.0 %UB 1.0 20.0 Dead voltage setting

IDead 5.0 - 80.0 %IB 1.0 20.0 Dead current setting

RDDSLX 5.0 - 999.0 kV/ms 1.0 100.0 Initial RDDS for phase LX

AblationAlarmLevel 0.0 - 99999.9 - 1.0 20000.0 Ablation threshold for alarm state

CumCurrPower 0.05 - 5.00 - 0.05 2.00 Current exponent setting forcumulative calculation

InitialCumAblLX 0.000 - 99999.999 - 0.001 0.000 Initial cumulated ablation for phase LX

AblationCoeff0 -99999.99999 -99999.99999

- 0.00001 0.14400 Coefficient 0 in ablation calculationformula

AblationCoeff1 -99999.99999 -99999.99999


AblationCoeff2 -99999.99999 -99999.99999


AblationCoeff3 -99999.99999 -99999.99999


AblationCoeff4 -99999.99999 -99999.99999


PowerCoeff1 0.0000 - 10.0000 - 0.0001 1.0000 Power coefficient 1 in ablationcalculation formula




AblationWarnLevel 0.0 - 99999.9 - 1.0 15000.0 Ablation threshold for warning state

MinCurrentLimit 0.0 - 99999.9 A 1.0 614.0 Minimum current limit for ablationcalculation

OvercurrentLimit 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 1.0 150.0 Overcurrent limit in percent forablation calculation

AblatCalShEst 0.0 - 99999.9 - 1.0 5000.0 Ablation for current exceeding higherthreshold

NumOfHalfCycle 2 - 16 - 1 10 Number of half cycles to beconsidered for half cycle average timeperiod evaluation

LoadRef CurrentVolt 3 Ph star grVolt 3 Ph delta

- - Current Load energization reference

AuxPosAvailable NoneNONCNO and NC

- - NO and NC Availability status of NO/NC contactinformation





OperWithAlmCnt 1 - 10 - 1 3 Number of error operations to triggerwarning operation alarm

OperationsMon 1 - 10 - 1 3 Number of operations to bemonitored for unstable detection

MaxReStrikeCorr 0 - 3 ms 1 1 Switching correction for openoperation setting

11.18.6 Operation principleGUID-B8ABC553-4A7F-468A-91DB-BDEE232B74D2 v1

For full functionality, ACBMSCBR needs to interact closely with other function blocks. Refer tosection Controlled Switching and Monitoring.

11.19 CBLEARNGUID-8232E0F9-9DF5-484C-9F1D-2CEE43AFCF9F v1

11.19.1 IdentificationGUID-164A8C2D-3C88-4969-9A08-DEF8FFF6AC10 v1

Table 236: Identification




Circuit breaker contact operationtime learning

CBLEARN — —

11.19.2 FunctionalityGUID-51251660-53CD-4FC6-97C2-BF907017265D v2

This function provides semi-automatic learning of the mechanical closing and opening timesof a circuit breaker's primary contacts and, optionally, auxiliary contacts. In addition, logicalwiring errors are detected and reported during the learning process. This function learns thetiming information of three phases of a circuit breaker independently, each of which may haveits individual drive. When a switching command is received, it generates a request to SSCPOWfunction for sending the commands to the circuit breaker poles, and acquires the changeovertimes of the connected contacts accurately through precision binary inputs. The user has anoption to accept or reject the results of each operation. Accepted results are averaged and areavailable for use in the controlled switching application.

For performing controlled switching and monitoring, the knowledge of status changeover ofprimary contact’s mechanical touch/separation instants is of prime importance. Thisinformation is required for determining the precise target switching instant. While monitoringlive switching operations, the timing information of auxiliary contacts (NO/52a and NC/52b) isrequired for accurate estimation of primary contact timing. During CB test mode, the functionalso detects logical wiring errors. This function has the option to provide the other functionswith either the default setting values or the learnt values (if learning has been performed atleast once) at its output interfaces.



11.19.3 Function blockGUID-6631FFEF-4483-452D-A358-E2136FF60511 v1

CBLEARN

BLOCK

CMDOPEN

CMDCLOSE

CMDOPL1

CMDOPL2

CMDOPL3

CMDCLL1

CMDCLL2

CMDCLL3

INPNOL1

INPNOL2

INPNOL3

INPNCL1

INPNCL2

INPNCL3

INPPRIL1

INPPRIL2

INPPRIL3

CBTMD

ACPTLO

REJLO

FINISH

ABORT

OPAVGNOL1

OPAVGNOL2

OPAVGNOL3

OPAVGNCL1

OPAVGNCL2

OPAVGNCL3

OPAVGPRIL1

OPAVGPRIL2

OPAVGPRIL3

CLAVGNOL1

CLAVGNOL2

CLAVGNOL3

CLAVGNCL1

CLAVGNCL2

CLAVGNCL3

CLAVGPRIL1

CLAVGPRIL2

CLAVGPRIL3

OPTIMNOL1

OPTIMNOL2

OPTIMNOL3

OPTIMNCL1

OPTIMNCL2

OPTIMNCL3

OPTIMPRIL1

OPTIMPRIL2

OPTIMPRIL3

CLTIMNOL1

CLTIMNOL2

CLTIMNOL3

CLTIMNCL1

CLTIMNCL2

CLTIMNCL3

CLTIMPRIL1

CLTIMPRIL2

CLTIMPRIL3

LONOTIML1

LONOTIML2

LONOTIML3

LONCTIML1

LONCTIML2

LONCTIML3

LOPRITIML1

LOPRITIML2

LOPRITIML3

WIERCD

CMDERCD

OPSHTDONE

CLSHTDONE

COORBLSS

WIERL1

WIERL2

WIERL3

CMDER

LERACTIVE

LOPSUC

LOPFAIL

LCLSUC

LCLFAIL

TIMOUTAL

LONOL1AL

LONOL2AL

LONOL3AL

LONCL1AL

LONCL2AL

LONCL3AL

LOPRIL1AL

LOPRIL2AL

LOPRIL3AL







Table 237: CBLEARN Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function

CMDOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open command issued by user

CMDCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close command issued by user

CMDOPL1 BOOLEAN 0 Open command input from SSCPOW for phaseL1



CMDCLL1 BOOLEAN 0 Close command input from SSCPOW for phaseL1



INPNOL1 BOOLEAN 0 NO contact feedback from circuit breaker phaseL1



INPNCL1 BOOLEAN 0 NC contact feedback from circuit breaker phaseL1



INPPRIL1 BOOLEAN 0 Primary contact feedback from circuit breaker phaseL1



CBTMD BOOLEAN 0 Command input for activating CB test mode

ACPTLO BOOLEAN 0 Accept the last operation and corresponding calculations

REJLO BOOLEAN 0 Reject the last operation and corresponding calculations

FINISH BOOLEAN 0 Finish the CB test mode and accept learnt values as finalvalues

ABORT BOOLEAN 0 Finish the CB test mode and reject learnt values


Table 238: CBLEARN Output signals


OPAVGNOL1 REAL Average value of NO contact operating time till the lastaccepted open operation for phaseL1



OPAVGNCL1 REAL Average value of NC contact operating time till the lastaccepted open operation for phaseL1







OPAVGPRIL1 REAL Average value of primary contact operating time till the lastaccepted open operation for phaseL1



CLAVGNOL1 REAL Average value of NO contact operating time till the lastaccepted close operation for phaseL1



CLAVGNCL1 REAL Average value of NC contact operating time till the lastaccepted close operation for phaseL1



CLAVGPRIL1 REAL Average value of primary contact operating time till the lastaccepted close operation for phaseL1



OPTIMNOL1 REAL Final average value of NO contact operating time for openoperations for phaseL1



OPTIMNCL1 REAL Final average value of NC contact operating time for openoperations for phaseL1



OPTIMPRIL1 REAL Final average value of primary contact operating time foropen operations for phaseL1



CLTIMNOL1 REAL Final average value of NO contact operating time for closeoperations for phaseL1



CLTIMNCL1 REAL Final average value of NC contact operating time for closeoperations for phaseL1







CLTIMPRIL1 REAL Final average value of primary contact operating time forclose operations for phaseL1



LONOTIML1 REAL NO contact operating time for last operation for phaseL1



LONCTIML1 REAL NC contact operating time for last operation for phaseL1



LOPRITIML1 REAL Primary contact operating time for last operation for phaseL1



WIERCD INTEGER Integer for indicating type of wiring error

CMDERCD INTEGER Integer for indicating type of command error

OPSHTDONE INTEGER Number of successful open shots performed

CLSHTDONE INTEGER Number of successful close shots performed

COORBLSS INTEGER Co-ordination output to SSCPOW to indicate the command

WIERL1 BOOLEAN Indication for wiring error in phaseL1



CMDER BOOLEAN Indication for command error

LERACTIVE BOOLEAN Indication for CB test mode is active

LOPSUC BOOLEAN Indication for successful last open operation

LOPFAIL BOOLEAN Indication for unsuccessful last open operation

LCLSUC BOOLEAN Indication for successful last close operation

LCLFAIL BOOLEAN Indication for unsuccessful last close operation

TIMOUTAL BOOLEAN Signal time out for not receiving auxiliary contact or primarycontact feedback

LONOL1AL BOOLEAN Alarm if NO contact operating time last operation forphaseL1 is not in the tolerance limit



LONCL1AL BOOLEAN Alarm if NC contact operating time last operation for phaseL1is not in the tolerance limit







LOPRIL1AL BOOLEAN Alarm if Primary contact operating time last operation forphaseL1 is not in the tolerance limit




Table 239: CBLEARN Non group settings (basic)


DefaultNOOpTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of NO contactfor open command for phaseL1



DefaultNCOpTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of NC contactfor open operation for phase L1



DefaultPriOpTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of primarycontact for open operation for phaseL1



DefaultNOClTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of NO contactfor Close operation for phaseL1



DefaultNCClTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of NC contactfor Close operation for phaseL1



DefaultPriClTimeL1 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of primarycontact for close operation for phaseL1

DefaultPriClTimeL2 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of primarycontact for open operation for phaseL2





DefaultPriClTimeL3 1.0 - 200.0 ms 0.1 10.0 Default operating time of primarycontact for open operation for phaseL3

TimeOutAlarmDelay 1.0 - 1500.0 ms 1.0 500.0 Maximum time delay for statuschange of auxiliary & primary contactsafter receiving input command

Mode OpenCloseOpen & Close

- - Open & Close Operation type selection (open/close/open and close)

BreakerType SPO breakerTPO breaker

- - SPO breaker Type of circuit breaker(single poleoperated or single drive)

LearnNONC MainOnlyNO&MainNC&MainNO&NC&Main

- - MainOnly Option for learning the auxiliarycontacts operating time

AvgSetSel setOPisCalcAvgValuessetOPisDefaultValues

- - setOPisCalcAvgValues

Selection for final average outputseither learnt values or default setvalues

Table 240: CBLEARN Non group settings (advanced)


AlmTolRange 0.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 10.0 Tolerance for generating the lastoperation time alarms

AlmTolSetSel AlmTolOnDefValAlmTolOnAvgCalVal

- - AlmTolOnDefVal Relative tol selection for last oper timealarms based on default set orcalculated average values

11.19.6 Operation principleGUID-208395C4-A02D-4A25-B4ED-9D2108B91703 v1

This function is used to acquire the primary contacts’ and optionally the auxiliary contacts’(NO/52a and NC/52b) timing information during CB test mode. CBLEARN receives theswitching commands from the user and releases time staggered commands to the individualpoles of the circuit breaker through SSCPOW function block. From the status changeoverinstants of primary and auxiliary contacts, CBLEARN calculates the switching times anddetects command errors and wiring errors. Typical expected sequences of contactchangeover, in each CB pole, are shown in Figure 122 and Figure 123.



CMDCLOSE

coorBLSS

CMDCLLp

INPNCLp

INPPRILp

INPNOLp

Time

Z

X

Y

X= operating time of Primary contact for close command

Y= operating time of NO contact for close command

Z= operating time of NC contact for close command

p=phase



Figure 122: Expected sequence of contact status changes for a closing operation



CMDOPEN

coorBLSS

CMDOPLp

INPNOLp

INPPRILp

INPNCLp

Time

Y

X

Z

X= operating time of Primary contact for open command

Y= operating time of NO contact for open command

Z= operating time of NC contact for open command

p=phaseIEC17000267-1-en.vsdx


Figure 123: Expected sequence of contact status changes for an opening operation

CBLEARN can be activated from LHMI menu or by activating the CBTMD input. Once thistrigger goes high, CBLEARN enters the learning mode (the LERACTIVE output becomes high)and it remains in this mode until FINISH or ABORT inputs are activated. In learning mode,CBLEARN interacts closely with the SSCPOW function block, as shown in Figure 122.



CB

Data

Acq

uis

itio

n

Com

ma

nd

Han

dlin

g

Core

Mo

du

le

Wirin

g E

rror

Dete

ctio

n

Le

arn

ing

Mo

de

Norm

al M

od

e

OR

Open

Clo

se/O

pen c

om

mands

SS

CP

OW

CB

LE

AR

N

Clo

se/

Open

Com

mands

Abort

/ Fin

ish

Reje

ct/

Acc

ept

last op

era

tion

Coord

inatio

n s

ignal

Err

or

signal

Learn

ing A

ctiv

e

Bre

aker le

arn

t

valu

es

Wirin

g e

rror

outp

uts

Com

mand feedback

with

tim

ing

Prim

ary

, N

O a

nd N

C c

onta

ct p

osi

tion feedba

ck

for all

thre

e p

ole

s

Clo

se

Clo

se

Open

IEC

17

00

02

68

-1-e

n.v

sdx


Figure 124: Signal flow diagram

11.19.6.1 Command handling logicGUID-92B52B0F-1192-42C6-A011-167A2D06F8BD v1

CBLEARN receives the Open/Close command and releases separate commands throughSSCPOW function block to the three poles of the circuit breaker, as shown in Figure 124. Circuit



breaker pole L1 is operated first, then L2, and finally L3. The time delay between poles isdefined by the TimeOutAlarmDelay setting. It ensures that no cross cable interference orwiring mix up between phases is present.

The function also detects static wiring errors, dynamic wiring errors and errors in commandexecution. These are described below.

Static wiring errors

When static wiring errors are detected, operation of the circuit breaker is not permitted untilthey are rectified. Static wiring errors are detected by a plausibility algorithm as describedbelow.

1. All 3 poles are either not open or closed simultaneously. If two poles are open and one poleis closed, the pole that is closed will be declared to have an error as it is not in agreementwith the other two poles being open. The same applies vice versa if two poles are closedand one pole is open.

2. For any phase, if the primary contact is open it expects NO/52a to be open and NC/52b tobe closed.

3. For any phase, if the primary contact is closed it expects NO/52a to be closed and NC/52bto be open.

CBLEARN checks the position of the breaker from the primary and auxiliary contacts. If the CBposition of any phase has errors, the wiringError (WIERLX) signal of the corresponding phaseis activated. The observed wiring errors and the corresponding error codes are shown in Table241.

Table 241: Wiring errors and corresponding error codes

Static wiring error in phase Error Code for WIERCD Numeric code of WIERCDWIERL1 WIERL2 WIERL3

0 0 0 NoWiringErr 0

1 0 0 WirErrL1 1

0 1 0 WirErrL2 2

0 0 1 WirErrL3 3

1 1 0 WirErrL1&L2 4

1 0 1 WirErrL1&L3 5

0 1 1 WirErrL2&L3 6

1 1 1 WirErrL1&L2&L3 7

Command issued to phase L1 orphase L2 or phase L3 but statuschangeovers are not received

WirErrStatChngeNR Refer the table below

Command issued to one phasebut status changeovers areobserved in different phase(s)

WirErrStChOtherPh

Dynamic wiring errors

Dynamic wiring errors are detected during the execution of the Open/Close commands. Forexample: If the command is released to phase L1, CBLEARN expects status changes of theprimary and auxiliary contacts of phase L1 only. If no status changeover is observed within aset period, it declares a time-out alarm and dynamic wiring error in phase L1. The same isapplied to detect wiring errors in phases L2 and L3. If an Open or Close command is issued toone phase but status changeovers are detected in another phase, CBLEARN issues a wiringerror. Error codes for different types of wiring errors are explained in Table 242.



Table 242: Wiring error codes

Commandissued tophase

Statuschangeoverobserved

Description WIERCD wiringErrorStatus

L1 L2 L3 WIERL1 WIERL2 WIERL3

L1 No No No Command issuedto phase L1 butstatuschangeovers arenot received

8 1 0 0


8 0 1 0


8 0 0 1

L1 No Yes

No Command issuedto phase L1 butstatuschangeovers areobserved in phaseL2

9 1 1 0

L1 No No Yes Command issuedto phase L1 butstatuschangeovers areobserved in phaseL3

9 1 0 1

L1 No Yes

Yes Command issuedto phase L1 butstatuschangeovers areobserved inphases L3 and L2

9 1 1 1

L1 Yes

Yes

No Command issuedto phase L1 butstatuschangeovers areobserved inphases L1 and L2

9 1 1 0

L1 Yes

No Yes Command issuedto phase L1 butstatuschangeovers areobserved inphases L1 and L3

9 1 0 1




Commandissued tophase

Statuschangeoverobserved

Description WIERCD wiringErrorStatus

L1 L2 L3 WIERL1 WIERL2 WIERL3

L1 Yes

Yes

Yes Command issuedto phase L1 butstatuschangeovers areobserved in allthree phases

9 1 1 1

L2 No No Yes Command issuedto phase L2 butstatuschangeovers areobserved in phaseL3

9 0 1 1

L2 No Yes

Yes Command issuedto phase L2 butstatuschangeovers areobserved inphases L2 and L3

9 0 1 1

Command Errors

Whenever CBLEARN receives an invalid command, CMDER is set high. The identified error isindicated on the CMDERCD output, see Table 243.

Table 243: Command Error codes

Present state Command received Error code for CMDERCD Description for CMDERCD

Breaker is Open Open command CmdErrOpen Function received OPENcommand from the user when CBis in open position

Breaker is Closed Close command CmdErrClose Function received CLOSEcommand from the user when CBis in closed position

Close operation is inprogress

Open command CmdErrOpenProg Function received OPENcommand from the user whenclose operation of CB is still inprogress

Open operation is inprogress

Close command CmdErrCloseProg Function received CLOSEcommand from the user whenopen operation of CB is still inprogress

Open operation is inprogress

Open command NoCmdErr Command is ignored

Close operation is inprogress

Close command NoCmdErr Command is ignored

During the command, if for any phase, errors are detected, learning for thecurrent operation is stopped and an emergency trip (instantaneous tripcommand to all three poles simultaneously) is issued. Identified errors areexpected to be corrected before proceeding.

Commands are accepted until CB test mode is excited by activating ABORT or FINISH inputs.



11.19.6.2 Data acquisition logicGUID-45E90641-9FE7-4EA4-8B08-E2FCCB5EEEFC v1

After the command request has been sent to SSCPOW, this block receives the actual commandinformation sent to the circuit breaker from SSCPOW and waits for the update of main andauxiliary contact information. Upon receiving this information, the operating times can beevaluated.

11.19.6.3 Core logicGUID-3CE4E298-EC09-4F39-90D0-1E504EF87D87 v1

Core module is executed when data acquisition is successful following an open or closecommand from SSCPOW. Once the appropriate timing information has been evaluated forprimary and auxiliary contacts, the core logic derives the actual switching times fromcommand to NO/52a, NC/52b and Primary contact changeover, and makes them available onthe outputs LONOTIMLX, LONCTIMLX, LOPRITIMLX (where LX is L1, L2 L3). At the same timethe function increments the counter of operations performed.

If the acquired values are considered not to be correct, they can be discarded by activating theREJLO input. Once the REJLO command is received, CBLEARN discards the calculatedtemporary time values that correspond to the last operation and decrements the number ofoperations performed counter.

The calculated switching times from the last operation are accepted implicitly, by issuing anew switching command, or explicitly, by activating the ACPTLO input. Once a new switchingcommand or the ACPTLO signal is received, the accepted values acquired thus far are averagedand presented at the outputs OPAVGNOLX, OPAVGNCLX, OPAVGPRILX and CLAVGNOLX,CLAVGNCLX, CLAVGPRILX for open and close respectively (where LX is L1, L2, or L3). If theaverage values are found satisfactory, CB test mode can be completed and exited byactivating the FINISH input. Once FINISH is activated, CBLEARN exits CB test mode. Only whenAvgSetSel has been set to "setOpIsCalcAvgValues", the average values are presented at theoutputs OPTIMNOLx, OPTIMNCLx, OPTIMPRILx and CLTIMNOLx, CLTIMNCLx, CLTIMPRILx foropening and closing respectively (where Lx is L1, L2, or L3).

Change AvgSetSel to "setOpIsCalcAvgValues" only when CB test mode has beencompleted successfully!

To avoid loss of the calculated average values, make sure to keep the IEDpowered up for minimum 1 hour after completing CB test mode.

CB test mode can be aborted at any stage of learning by activating the ABORT input if thelearning cannot be continued or the results are not satisfactory. In such a case the functiondiscards the currently calculated average values and retains the set average outputs to eitherthe previously learnt values (if available) or user-set values, depending on AvgSetSel setting.

Depending on the Mode selection, the function calculates the operating times of the auxiliaryand primary contacts for the open command or close command or both. For example, if Modeis set to “Open only”, only the operating times corresponding to the open command areevaluated and are updated at the corresponding average outputs. The average outputs for theclose command follow the previously learnt values if available or user-set values otherwise.



Table 244: Selection of operating time values based on Mode

Mode Open set average outputsOPTIMNOLX, OPTIMNCLX,OPTIMPRILX

Close set average outputsCLTIMNOLX, CLTIMNCLX,CLTIMPRILX

Open & Close Learnt values Learnt values

Open Learnt values Set values

Close Set Values Learnt values

Depending on the availability of auxiliary contacts, LearnNONC should be set to define thescope of learning as follows:

Table 245: Selection of auxiliary contacts for learning purpose

LearnNONC setting Learn primary contacts Learn NO (52a) auxiliarycontacts

Learn NC (52b) auxiliarycontacts

MainOnly yes no no

NO&Main yes yes no

NC&Main yes no yes

NO&NC&Main yes yes yes

Successful and unsuccessful operationsGUID-527381B8-513D-42A2-B08F-A2781D90946F v1

An operation is declared successful if status changes of auxiliary and primary contacts aredetected for all the phase commands within a set time of TimeOutAlarmDelay after CMDOPX(for open operation) or CMDCLX (for close operation) information has been received fromSSCPOW. Otherwise the operation is declared as failed. This is indicated externally on theLOPSUC, LCLSUC and LOPFAIL, LCLFAIL outputs, respectively, as shown in Table 246 and Table247.

Table 246: Last opening operation type

Last opening operation type LOPFAIL LOPSUC

No open operation 0 0

Successful open operation 0 1

Unsuccessful open operation 1 0

Table 247: Last closing operation type

Last closing operation type LCLFAIL LCLSUC

No close operation 0 0

Successful close operation 0 1

Unsuccessful close operation 1 0

Last operation time alarmsGUID-DC5703CC-3AF0-4A20-BBCD-CE0ACC2A253D v1

The operation times of the last operation are compared against their expected values, whichare either set values or calculated average values, depending on the AlmTolSetSel setting.Refer Table 248 for detailed description.



Table 248: Reference values for checking actual switching times (X = L1 / L2 / L3)

AlmTolSetSelsetting

Primarycontactclosing time

Primarycontactopening time

NO (52a)closing time

NO (52a)opening time

NC (52b)closing time

NC (52b)opening time

AlmTolOnDefVal

DefaultPriClTimeX setting

DefaultPriOpTimeXsetting

DefaultNOClTimeXsetting

DefaultNOOpTimeXsetting

DefaultNCClTimeXsetting

DefaultNCOpTimeXsetting

AlmTolOnAvgCalVal

CLAVGPRIX OPAVGPRIX CLAVGNOX OPAVGNOX CLAVGNCX OPAVGNCX

Any deviation of more than AlmTolRange from the expected value will raise an alarm. The onlyexception is the first operation when comparison to calculated average values(AlmTolOnAvgCalVal) is selected:

Here, an alarm will be raised if the difference between phases exceeds the AlmTolRangesetting.



310

Section 12 Station communication

12.1 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol





IEC 61850-8-1 communicationprotocol

IEC 61850-8-1 - -


The IED supports the communication protocol IEC 61850-8-1. All operational information andcontrols are available through this protocol.

The IED is equipped with optical Ethernet rear port(s) for the substation communicationstandard IEC 61850-8-1. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) fromdifferent vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peercommunication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files downloading isprovided.

Disturbance files (waveform files in Switchsync PWC600 terminology) are accessed using theIEC 61850-8-1 protocol. Disturbance files are also available to any Ethernet based applicationvia FTP in the standard Comtrade format. Further, the IED can send and receive binary values,double point values and measured values (for example from MMXU functions), together withtheir quality bit, using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile. The IED meets the GOOSEperformance requirements for tripping applications in substations, as defined by the IEC61850 standard. The IED interoperates with other IEC 61850-compliant IEDs and systems, andsimultaneously reports events to five different clients on the IEC 61850 station bus.

The Denial of Service functions DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT are included to limit the inboundnetwork traffic. The communication can thus never compromise the primary functionality ofthe IED.

The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. The event channel has a quota of 10events/second after the initial 30 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the event channeltransmission is blocked until the event changes is below the quota, no event is lost.

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on integratedcommunication modules. The IED is connected to Ethernet-based communication systems viathe fibre-optic multimode LC connector(s) (100BASE-FX).

The IED supports SNTP and IRIG-B time synchronization methods with a time-stampingaccuracy of ±1 ms.

• Ethernet based: SNTP• With time synchronization wiring: IRIG-B

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 12Station communication


12.1.3 Communication interfaces and protocolsD0E7214T201305151403 v3

Table 249: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Protocol Ethernet100BASE-FX LC

IEC 61850-8-1

HTTPS

= Supported

12.1.4 SettingsD0E7392T201305151403 v1

Table 250: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


PortSelGOOSE FrontLAN1

- - LAN1 Port selection for GOOSEcommunication

PortSelMMS FrontLAN1Front+LAN1

- - LAN1 Port selection for MMScommunication


Table 251: Communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol TCP/IP (Ethernet)

Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

Protocol IEC 61850–8–1

Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

12.2 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV





GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV - -

12.2.2 FunctionalityGUID-2A465DC9-5F06-48A6-B055-1003422DA9B0 v1

GOOSEBINRCV is used to receive 16 binary values via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages.

Section 12 1MRK 511 275-UEN CStation communication



GOOSEBINRCVBLOCK ÔUT1

OUT1VALÔUT2

OUT2VALÔUT3

OUT3VALÔUT4

OUT4VALÔUT5

OUT5VALÔUT6

OUT6VALÔUT7

OUT7VALÔUT8

OUT8VALÔUT9

OUT9VALÔUT10

OUT10VALÔUT11

OUT11VALÔUT12

OUT12VALÔUT13

OUT13VALÔUT14

OUT14VALÔUT15

OUT15VALÔUT16

OUT16VAL

IEC09000236_en.vsdD0E13072T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 125: GOOSEBINRCV function block

12.2.4 SignalsD0E7435T201305151403 v1

Table 252: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

D0E7436T201305151403 v1

Table 253: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals


OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1

OUT1VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1



































12.2.5 SettingsD0E7437T201305151403 v1

Table 254: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


12.2.6 Operation principleGUID-EE39046D-9B5A-4BD9-9A65-35DAF019A7BA v1

The OUTxVAL output will be 1 (high) if the incoming message contains valid data for channel x.In case of invalid data the OUTx output will be forced to 0 (low). In case of communicationerror the OUTx output will retain the last valid value.



12.3 GOOSE function block to receive a double point valueGOOSEDPRCV





GOOSE function block to receive adouble point value

GOOSEDPRCV - -


GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.



GOOSEDPRCVBLOCK ^DPOUT

DATAVALIDCOMMVALID

TEST

D0E13789T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 126: GOOSEDPRCV function block

12.3.4 SignalsD0E7508T201305151403 v1

Table 255: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals



D0E7509T201305151403 v1

Table 256: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals


DPOUT INTEGER Double point output

DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output

TEST BOOLEAN Test output

12.3.5 SettingsD0E7510T201305151403 v1

Table 257: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn





DPOUT represents the double-point status (transmitted via IEC 61850 GOOSE message) of aswitching element according to the following table.

DPOUT (integer value) DPOUT (binary value) Status

0 00 intermediate / unknown

1 01 off / open

2 10 on / closed

3 11 faulty

The DATAVALID output will be 1 (high) as long as the incoming message contains valid data. Incase of invalid data DPOUT will be forced to 0.

The COMMVALID output will become 0 (low) when the subscribed GOOSE messages are notreceived as expected. In this case DPOUT will retain the last valid value.

The TEST output will be 1 (high) when the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT to receive the doublepoint values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to asimple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will beHIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILUREor OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

12.4 GOOSE function block to receive an integer valueGOOSEINTRCV





GOOSE function block to receive aninteger value

GOOSEINTRCV - -


GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.





GOOSEINTRCVBLOCK ÎNTOUT

DATAVALIDCOMMVALID

TEST

D0E13792T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 127: GOOSEINTRCV function block

12.4.4 SignalsD0E7511T201305151403 v1

Table 258: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals



D0E7512T201305151403 v1

Table 259: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals


INTOUT INTEGER Integer output

DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output


12.4.5 SettingsD0E7513T201305151403 v1

Table 260: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn



The DATAVALID output will be 1 (high) as long as the incoming message contains valid data. Incase of invalid data INTOUT will be forced to 0.

The COMMVALID output will become 0 (low) when the subscribed GOOSE messages are notreceived as expected. In this case INTOUT will retain the last valid value.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT to receive the integervalues.



The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to asimple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will beHIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILUREor OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

12.5 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand valueGOOSEMVRCV





GOOSE function block to receive ameasurand value

GOOSEMVRCV - -


GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive a measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.



GOOSEMVRCVBLOCK ^MVOUT

DATAVALIDCOMMVALID

TEST

D0E13795T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 128: GOOSEMVRCV function block

12.5.4 SignalsD0E7514T201305151403 v1

Table 261: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals



D0E7515T201305151403 v1

Table 262: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals


MVOUT REAL Measurand value output

DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output




12.5.5 SettingsD0E7516T201305151403 v1

Table 263: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn



The DATAVALID output will be 1 (high) as long as the incoming message contains valid data. Incase of invalid data MVOUT will be forced to 0.

The COMMVALID output will become 0 (low) when the subscribed GOOSE messages are notreceived as expected. In this case MVOUT will retain the last valid value.


The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT to receive the measurandvalues.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to asimple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will beHIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILUREor OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW

12.6 GOOSE function block to receive a single point valueGOOSESPRCV





GOOSE function block to receive asingle point value

GOOSESPRCV - -


GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.




GOOSESPRCVBLOCK ^SPOUT

DATAVALIDCOMMVALID

TEST


Figure 129: GOOSESPRCV function block

12.6.4 SignalsD0E7505T201305151403 v1

Table 264: GOOSESPRCV Input signals



D0E7506T201305151403 v1

Table 265: GOOSESPRCV Output signals


SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output

DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output


12.6.5 SettingsD0E7507T201305151403 v1

Table 266: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn



The DATAVALID output will be 1 (high) as long as the incoming message contains valid data. Incase of invalid data SPOUT will be forced to 0.

The COMMVALID output will become 0 (low) when the subscribed GOOSE messages are notreceived as expected. In this case SPOUT will retain the last valid value.


The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT to receive the binarysingle point values.



The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to asimple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will beHIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILUREor OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW

12.7 IEC 61850-9-2(LE) merging unit

12.7.1 IntroductionGUID-BA744DF4-1854-4E69-BDF2-1A569DE290BE v2

The IEC 61850-9-2 standard defines a process bus for transmitting sampled values of primaryvoltage and current signals over Ethernet. “LE” (Light Edition) is a commonly agreedimplementation guideline, which defines a practical subset of IEC 61850-9-2 to allowstraightforward implementation and application.

IEC 61850-9-2(LE) defines a logical device Merging Unit (MU). A MU collects up to fourindividual current and four voltage signals and merges them into a single data stream.

In the Switchsync PWC600 IED, sampled values streams from up to four MUs are received onthe LAN2 A port of the communication interface module COM03. The application can accessthem as outputs of the MUx_4I_4U function blocks (x = 1…4) and use them in the same manneras analog inputs on a TRM or AIM card.

12.7.2 IdentificationGUID-C97C65A7-DA6C-4CA7-BE68-8687A948AAEA v1

Functiondescription




IEC 61850-9-2(LE)merging unit

MU1_4I_4UMU2_4I_4UMU3_4I_4UMU4_4I_4U

- -

12.7.3 Function blockGUID-E5258705-E5D4-4C20-87B0-87FA8D086B6D v1

MU1_4I_4U^MU1_I1^MU1_I2^MU1_I3^MU1_I4

^MU1_U1^MU1_U2^MU1_U3^MU1_U4

MU1DATAMU1SYNCHMU1SMPLTMU1SYNMUMU1TSTMD




12.7.4 SignalsPID-3371-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 267: MU1_4I_4U Output signals


MU1_I1 STRING Analogue input I1




MU1_U1 STRING Analogue input U1




MU1DATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss

MU1SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock not synchronized to same clock as IED

MU1SMPLT BOOLEAN Sample lost

MU1SYNMU BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU

MU1TSTMD BOOLEAN MU in test mode


Table 268: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)


SVId 0 - 35 - 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier

SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group









Table 269: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)


SynchMode NoSynchInitOperation

- - Operation Synchronization mode

GUID-242C96FD-E2AA-4B57-AD66-79571D067FCB v1

MU2_4I_4U, MU3_4I_4U and MU4_4I_4U have the same settings as MU1_4I_4U.



12.7.6 Operation principleGUID-1318F925-300F-418F-9526-BD8540DFF22E v1

A merging unit (MU) gathers sampled values of primary current and voltage signals frominstrument transformers, electronic transducers, or both. The gathered data are transmittedto subscribers over the process bus, utilizing a process bus according to the IEC 61850-9-2(LE)specification.

The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the LAN2 A port (X3) of thecommunication interface module. Only data streams sampled at 80 samples/cycle areaccepted. In ACT, the MU appears as a function block (unlike an analog input module).

CombiSensor

ABB

Merging

Unit

ABB

Merging

Unit

Ethernet Switch

CombiSensor

IEC61850-9-2LE

IEC61850-9-2LE

IEC61850-9-2LE

SplitterElectrical-to-

Optical Converter

1PPS

1PPS 1PPS

Station Wide

GPS Clock

COM03 Module

Preprocessing blocksSMAI

Application

IED

MU1 (Logic MU) MU2 (Logic MU)

LAN2 A

SMAI1

BLOCK

DFTSPFC

^GRP1L1

^GRP1L2

^GRP1L3

^GRP1N

TYPE

SPFCOUT

AI3P

AI1

AI2

AI3

AI4

AIN

GUID-B5973EFD-8304-4A30-8CC9-B64FF531A197 V1 EN-US

Figure 130: Example of signal path for sampled analog values from merging units viaprocess bus IEC 61850-9-2LE with PPS synchronization



CTCT CombiSensor

ABBMerging

Unit

ABBMerging

Unit

Ethernet Switch

CombiSensor

Conventional VT

IEC61850-9-2LE

IEC61850-9-2LE

IEC61850-9-2LE

SplitterElectrical-to-

Optical Converter

1PPS

1PPS 1PPS

110 V 1 A

Station WideGPS Clock

COM03 Module


Application

MU1 MU2

1 A

TRM module


IED

LAN2 A

GUID-938F229C-5768-4DF9-B3B6-78A52266F643 V1 EN-US

Figure 131: Example of signal path for sampled analog values from MU and conventionalCT/VT

12.7.6.1 Signal identificationGUID-35A49B49-EA89-40A0-97B3-CA9BCB3A02AE v1

Up to four logical MUs can be connected to an IED on a single physical interface. The datastreams from individual MUs are distinguished by the SVId (Sampled Values Identification)setting, which must be set identical to the MsvID data attribute of MSVCB01 in the MU.

The IEC 61850-9-2(LE) guideline specifies that the value of SVId shall comprise 10 charactersand follow the convention “xxxxMUnn01”. The portions “xxxx” and “nn” can be substituted by



user-defined strings, whereas “MU” and “01” are fixed and should not be changed. However,the MUx_4I_4U function blocks will work correctly also with less restrictive values of SVId.

The SmplGrp parameter is not used in the PWC600 implementation, keep it at default value 0.

Within a MU1_4I_4U function block, the assignment of sampled values streams (4 currents, 4voltages) is fixed, as provided by the MU.

12.7.6.2 Time synchronizationGUID-BEF65E7B-EB03-4E43-8EC5-2FF6824BA24C v1

Sampled values received over the process bus are time stamped. For synchronizing the signalprocessing in the IED to the incoming data stream, an external 1PPS signal shall be provided onthe PPS Rx port (X10) of the communication interface module. Accuracy shall be class T4 (±4µs) or better.

Preferably, a GPS based clock source is used as master for generating a station-wide 1PPSclock for all merging units and receiving IEDs. This is particularly important when an IED mayreceive sampled values from more than one MU. Only if any IED is connected to just one MUthen the MU may be used as clock master for the receiving IED(s).

The SynchMode parameter determines handling of the synchronization information in thedatastream:

• When set to "NoSynch" it will not check the SmpSynch flag.• When set to "Operation" it will always check the SmpSynch flag.• "Init" should not be used.

See TIMESYNCHGEN for further information on time synchronization.

12.7.6.3 Alarm signalsGUID-1DC11181-BDA8-4AF2-AC8B-EE57D22C4C13 v1

Each MU function block has five binary alarm signal outputs.

• MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned, that is, the applicationneeds to be restarted soon. The signal is raised for 2 seconds before the application isrestarted.

• SYNCH: Indicates that the internal time synchronization quality is out of the set value fromparameter TIMESYNCHGEN.syncAccLevel (“1 μs”, “4 μs” or “unspecified”) and theparameter TIMESYNCHGEN.AppSynch is set to “Synch”. If TIMESYNCHGEN.AppSynch isset to “NoSynch”, the SYNCH output never goes high.

• SMPLT: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost or marked as invalid, overflownor failed and the sample has thereafter been substituted.

• SYNMU: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received from SmpSynchflag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.

• TSTMD: Indicates that the MU connected is in “Test Mode”. Received from Test flag indatastream. No IED setting affects this signal.

In case of communication problems, all analog outputs will be forced to 0.0.

Connect the binary output signals, except for TSTMD, to the BLKSYNSW inputof the SSCPOW function, for blocking controlled switching operations in caseof communication problems. See the section on Controlled Switching &Monitoring.



12.7.6.4 Accuracy of power measurement functionsGUID-2521102E-1229-4796-A073-83F11C8D04F0 v1

The power measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU) containcorrection factors to account for the nonlinearity in the input circuits, mainly in the inputtransformers, when using direct analog connection to the IED.

The IED uses the same correction factors when feeding the IED with analog signals over IEC61850-9-2(LE). Since the signals via IEC 61850-9-2(LE) are not subjected to the samenonlinearity errors, this causes an inaccuracy in the measured values.

For voltage signals, the correction factors are less than 0.05% of the measured value and noangle compensation, hence the impact on the reported value can be ignored.

For current signals, the correction factors cause a significant impact on the reported values atlow currents. The correction factors are +2.4% and -3.6 degrees at signal levels below 5% ofthe set base current, +0.6% and -1.12 degrees at signal level 30% of the set base current and0% and -0.44 degrees at signal levels above 100% of the set base current. Between thecalibration points 5%, 30% and 100% of the set base current, linear interpolation is used.

12.7.7 Technical dataGUID-D7474867-326C-44CD-B21E-BEE52756918F v1

Table 270: IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol IEC 61850-9-2LE

Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

12.8 Redundant station bus communicationD0E8296T201305151403 v1





System component for parallelredundancy protocol

PRPSTATUS - -


Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 is available asoption in the IED. It uses both ports LAN1A and LAN1B on the COM03 module to connect totwo redundant networks using Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP).


PRPSTATUSLAN1-ALAN1-B


Figure 132: PRPSTATUS function block



12.8.4 SignalsD0E8356T201305151403 v1

Table 271: PRPSTATUS Output signals


LAN1-A BOOLEAN LAN1 channel A status

LAN1-B BOOLEAN LAN1 channel B status

12.8.5 Setting parametersD0E8125T201305151403 v1

The PRPSTATUS function has no user settings.

Redundant station bus communication is configured in the LHMI under Main menu/Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuration/ETHLAN1_AB where Operation mode,IPAddress and IPMask can be entered.


The redundant station bus communication is configured using the local HMI, Main Menu/Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuation/ETHLAN1_AB. The settings are alsovisible in PST in PCM600.

Redundant communication runs in parallel, meaning that the same data package istransmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channelis compared with the data package identity from the other channel. If the identity is the same,the last package is discarded.

PRPSTATUS supervises redundant communication on the two channels. If no data package hasbeen received on one or both channels within the last 10 s, the output LAN1-A and/or LAN1-Bare set to indicate error.



Switch A Switch B1 2

DataData

DataData


IED

PRPSTATUS

1 2

COM03

A B

Duo

Redundancy Supervision

Station Control System

D0E13912T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 133: Redundant station bus

12.9 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

12.9.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOGD0E3183T201305151403 v1

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.

There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configuredwith IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog (RFC5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.



12.9.2 SettingsD0E3185T201305151403 v1

Table 272: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)


ExtLogSrv1Type OffSYSLOG UDP/IPSYSLOG TCP/IPCEF TCP/IP

- - Off External log server 1 type

ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number

ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IPAddress

1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address




























12.10 Generic security application component AGSAL

12.10.1 Generic security application AGSALD0E3184T201305151403 v1

As a logical node AGSAL is used for monitoring security violation regarding authorization,access control and inactive association including authorization failure. Therefore, all theinformation in AGSAL can be configured to report to 61850 client.



Section 13 Basic IED functions

13.1 Self supervision with internal event list


The Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST function reacts tointernal system events generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. Theinternal events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 eventviewer tool.

13.1.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG





Internal error signal INTERRSIG - -


INTERRSIGFAIL

WARNINGTSYNCERR

RTCERRSTUPBLK


Figure 134: INTERRSIG function block

13.1.2.3 SignalsD0E7377T201305151403 v1

Table 273: INTERRSIG Output signals


FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail

WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning

TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error

RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error

STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 13Basic IED functions


13.1.2.4 SettingsD0E7258T201305151403 v1

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IEDManager (PCM600).

13.1.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST





Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST - -

13.1.3.2 SettingsD0E7393T201305151403 v1



The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.• Checking of digitized measuring signals.• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the EventViewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-supervisionfunction can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The information from theself-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600. Both events from theEvent list and the internal events are listed in time consecutive order in the Event Viewer.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free change-over alarmcontact IRF (Internal Fail) located on the power supply module. This output contact isactivated (where there is no fault) and deactivated (where there is a fault) by the Internal Failsignal, see Figure 135. The software watchdog timeout and the undervoltage detection of thePSM will deactivate the contact as well.

Section 13 1MRK 511 275-UEN CBasic IED functions



Power supply fault

WatchdogTX overflowMaster resp.Supply fault

ReBoot I/O

Internal Fail (CPU)

Power supplymodule

I/O nodes

CEM

AND

Fault

Fault

Fault

INTERNALFAIL

I/O nodes = BIOxxxx = Inverted signal

D0E13262T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 135: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free contact

Time Synch Error

Internal Warning

GENTS SYNC ERROR

GENTS SYNC OK

SR

GENTS RTC ERROR SR

>1 Internal Fail

LIODEV STOPPED SR

Real Time Clock Error

e.g. BIO1- ERROR

Settings changedSETTINGS CHANGED

RTE FATAL ERROR

WDOG STARVED SW Watchdog Error

GENTS RTC OK

GENTS TIME RESET>1

LIODEV STARTED

>1LIODEV FAIL

>1

Runtime Exec Error

>1

RTE APP FAILED SR

RTE ALL APPS OK

>1

Setting groups changedSETTINGS CHANGED

CHANGE LOCK ON SR Change lock

CHANGE LOCK OFF

Runtime App Error

FTF FATAL ERROR File System Error

SR

IEC 61850 READY

DNP 3 STARTUP ERROR S

RDNP 3 READY

IEC 61850 Error

DNP 3 Error

IEC 61850 NOT READY


Figure 136: Self supervision, function block internal signals



Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from INTERRSIGfunction block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals fromthe INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization viaoutput relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in theSignal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the timesynchronization block INTERRSIG.

13.1.4.1 Internal signalsD0E7081T201305151403 v1

SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of theIED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also calledinternal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.

• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 274.• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware

configuration, see Table 275.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 276.

Table 274: SELFSUPEVLST standard internal signals

Name of signal Description

Internal Fail Internal fail status

Internal Warning Internal warning status

Real Time Clock Error Real time clock status

Time Synch Error Time synchronization status

Runtime App Error Runtime application error status

Runtime Exec Error Runtime execution error status

IEC61850 Error IEC 61850 error status

SW Watchdog Error SW watchdog error status

Setting(s) Changed Setting(s) changed

Setting Group(s) Changed Setting group(s) changed

Change Lock Change lock status

File System Error Fault tolerant file system status

Table 275: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description

PSM PSM-Error Power supply module error status

TRM TRM-Error Transformator module error status

COM COM-Error Communication module error status

BIO BIO-Error Binary input/output module error status

PIO PIO-Error Precision binary input/output module error status



Table 276: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation

Internal Fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signalsare active; Real Time Clock Error, Runtime App Error, Runtime ExecError, SW Watchdog Error, File System Error

Internal Warning This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signalsare active; IEC 61850 Error, DNP3 Error

Real Time Clock Error This signal will be active if there is a hardware error with the real timeclock.

Time Synch Error This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronizationis lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset.

Runtime Exec Error This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do someactions with the application threads. The actions can be loading ofsettings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups,loading or unloading of application threads.

IEC61850 Error This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed insome actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup, forexample.

SW Watchdog Error This signal will be activated when the IED has been under too heavyload for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task isused for the measurements.

Runtime App Error This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads arenot in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can beCREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example.

Setting(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the internal event list ifany setting(s) is changed.

Setting Group(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the Internal Event List ifany setting group(s) is changed.

Change Lock This signal will generate an internal Event to the Internal Event List ifthe Change Lock status is changed

File System Error This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file arecorrupted and cannot be recovered.

13.1.4.2 Run-time modelD0E7074T201305151403 v1

The analog signals to the A/D converter are internally distributed into two differentconverters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 137.

u1

x2

x1

u1

x2

x1

ADxControllerADx_High

ADx_LowADx


Figure 137: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.



The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with differentamplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal conditionswhere the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An alarm is given if thesignals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performanceof the A/D conversion.

The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One ofthe tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. The ADx_Controllerfunction is included in all IEDs equipped with an analog input module. This is done in avalidation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part that checks that theA/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the twosignals shall be sent to the CPU, that is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, theADx_LO or the 16 times higher ADx_HI.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the twoA/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed andan alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

The ADx_Controller also supervises other parts of the A/D converter.


Table 277: Self supervision with internal event list

Data Value

Recording manner Continuous, event controlled

List size 40 events, first in-first out

13.2 Time systemD0E6698T201305151403 v1


The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute timefor the IED when it is a part of a control and protection system. This makes it possible tocompare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.

13.2.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN





Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN

- -




Table 278: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)


CoarseSyncSrc OffSNTP

- - Off Coarse time synchronization source

FineSyncSource OffSNTPIRIG-B

- - Off Fine time synchronization source

SyncMaster OffSNTP-Server

- - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master

HWSyncSrc OffIRIG-BPPS

- - Off Hardware time synchronizationsource

AppSynch NoSynchSynch

- - NoSynch Time synchronization mode forapplication

SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us)Class T4 (4us)Unspecified

- - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy

13.2.3 Time synchronization via SNTP





Time synchronization via SNTP SNTP - -

13.2.3.2 SettingsD0E7328T201305151403 v1

Table 279: SNTP Non group settings (basic)


ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IPAddress

1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address

RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IPAddress

1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address

13.2.4 SYNCHPPS:1


Table 280: SYNCHPPS Non group settings (basic)


SynchType GalvanicOptical

- - Optical Physical input



13.2.5 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN





Time system, summer time begins DSTBEGIN - -

13.2.5.2 SettingsD0E7375T201305151403 v1

Table 281: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)


MonthInYear JanuaryFebruaryMarchAprilMayJuneJulyAugustSeptemberOctoberNovemberDecember

- - March Month in year when daylight timestarts

DayInWeek SundayMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday

- - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts

WeekInMonth LastFirstSecondThirdFourth

- - Last Week in month when daylight timestarts

UTCTimeOfDay 00:0000:301:001:30...48:00

- - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours whendaylight time starts

13.2.6 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND





Time system, summer time ends DSTEND - -



13.2.6.2 SettingsD0E7376T201305151403 v1

Table 282: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)


MonthInYear JanuaryFebruaryMarchAprilMayJuneJulyAugustSeptemberOctoberNovemberDecember

- - October Month in year when daylight timeends

DayInWeek SundayMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday

- - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends

WeekInMonth LastFirstSecondThirdFourth

- - Last Week in month when daylight timeends

UTCTimeOfDay 00:0000:301:001:30...48:00

- - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours whendaylight time ends

13.2.7 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE





Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE - -

13.2.7.2 SettingsD0E7327T201305151403 v1

Table 283: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)


NoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 - 1 0 Number of half-hours from UTC



13.2.8 Time synchronization via IRIG-B





Time synchronization via IRIG-B IRIG-B - -

13.2.8.2 SettingsD0E7281T201305151403 v2

Table 284: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)


TimeDomain LocalTimeUTC

- - LocalTime Time domain

Encoding IRIG-B13441344TZ

- - IRIG-B Type of encoding

TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZPlusTZ

- - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard

Encoding

This type of encoding consists of the following options:

• IRIG-B. This encoding is based on the legacy of(pre-2004) IRIG-B standard which is withoutany time zone information. IRIG-B uses the timecoding available in IRIG-B 00x and IRIG-B12x, where x = 0-7. When x is set in the range from 4- 7, the year information is providedalong with year and time data.

• 1344. This encoding is based on the current (2004) IRIG-B standard. IED uses the time zoneinformation from TIMEZONE:1. The setting 1344 refers to the Annex F in IEEE1344, whichadds information regarding quality of the time using the control bits in the IRIG-Bmessage. This annex also contains the year information with the variable x that rangesfrom 4-7 in the 2004 version of IRIG-B.

• 1344TZ. This encoding is based on the current (2004) IRIG-B standard. The time zoneinformation from IRIG-B overrides the TIMEZONE:1 settings.

TimeZoneAs1344

This type of encoding consists of the following options:

• MinusTZ. Encoded IRIG time minus time zone offset equals UTC at all times.• PlusTZ. Encoded IRIG time plus time zone offset equals UTC at all times.


13.2.9.1 General conceptsD0E6679T201305151403 v1



Time definitionsD0E6680T201305151403 v1

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time theclock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the timegained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensatefor them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)D0E6773T201305151403 v1

SW-time

Time tagging and general synchronization

External

synchronization

sources

Off

SNTP

IRIG - B Time-regulator

Time-regulator

(fast or slow)

Communication

Off

IRIG - B

PPS

EventsProtection and

control

functions

A/D

ConverterTransducers*

HW-time

Synchronization for different protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)

*IEC 61850-9-2

D0E13057T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 138: Design of time system (clock synchronization)

Synchronization principleD0E6681T201305151403 v1

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. Afunction is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

Function

Synchronization froma higher level

Optional synchronization of modules at a lower level


Figure 139: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messagesfrom a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases aswell. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum



errors. This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and toadjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message• The time since the last used synchronization message• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

13.2.9.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operationD0E6655T201305151403 v1

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock has abuilt-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power offD0E6661T201305151403 v1

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock thatwill provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IEDmay drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lostcompletely.

Real-time clock at startupD0E6662T201305151403 v1

At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time,the time in the IED will be accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lostduring power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 1970-01-01.

Time synchronization startup procedureD0E6678T201305151403 v1

Coarse time synchronization is used to set the time on the very first message and if anymessage has an offset of more than ten seconds. If no FineSyncSource is given, theCoarseSyncSource is used to synchronize the time.

Fine time synchronization is used to set the time on the first message after a time reset or ifthe source may always set the fine time, and the source gives a large offset towards the IEDtime. After this, the time is used to synchronize the time after a spike filter, that is, if thesource glitches momentarily or there is a momentary error, this is neglected. FineSyncSourcethat may always set the time is only IRIG-B.

It is not recommended to use SNTP as both fine and coarse synchronization source, as someclocks sometimes send out a bad message. For example, Arbiter clocks sometimes send out a"zero-time message", which if SNTP is set as coarse synchronization source (with or withoutSNTP as fine synchronization source) leads to a jump to "2036-02-07 06:28" and back. In allcases, except for demonstration, it is recommended to use SNTP as FineSynchSource only.

Rate accuracyD0E6684T201305151403 v1

In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while,the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant.Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sourcesD0E6685T201305151403 v1

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally, the time-out isset so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than onemessage is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

13.2.9.3 Synchronization optionsD0E6637T201305151403 v1

Two main options of external time synchronization are available. The synchronization messageis applied either via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram messageincluding date and time or via IRIG-B.



Synchronization via SNTPD0E6653T201305151403 v1

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to anSNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and atransmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs via IEC61850 station bus. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present,preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse time synchsource. However shall SNTP normally be used as fine synch only. The only reason to use SNTPas coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source. The combination SNTP as both fineand coarse source shall not be used.

SNTP server requirementsD0E6710T201305151403 v1

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at leastequipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. TheSNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, orlocal without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary orsecondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via IRIG-BD0E6636T201305151403 v1

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of theyear in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and themessage is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating if and how the signal ismodulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x messagescan be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number in the range of 1-7.

If the x in 00x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If xis 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year information hasto come from the tool or local HMI.

The IRIG-B input also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-Bpreviously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and containsyear information and information of the time-zone.

It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B module. Inthis case, send also the local time in the messages.

Synchronization via process bus IEC 61850-9-2LEGUID-684E5B3A-AF6B-4BDC-966A-BB5B3AAC4280 v1

An optical PPS signal can be used for the time synchronisation of the process buscommunication (IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol). This signal should emanate either from theexternal GPS clock or from the merging unit.


D0E7191T201305151403 v1

Table 285: Time synchronization, time tagging

Function Value

Time tagging resolution, events 1 ms

Time tagging resolution, waveform records 0.25 ms (50 Hz) / 0.208 ms(60 Hz)

Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization ±1.0 ms max.

Time tagging error with IRIG-B synchronization ±0.1 ms max.



13.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE





Test mode functionality TESTMODE - -


When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the IED areautomatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing yellow LED on the localHMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s) individually from the local HMI to performrequired tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal operation.However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later restored, the IED willremain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before thepower was removed. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within theIED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.


TESTMODEINPUT ACTIVE

OUTPUTSETTING

NOEVENT

IEC09000219-1.vsdD0E13066T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 140: TESTMODE function block

13.3.4 SignalsD0E7240T201305151403 v1

D0E7398T201305151403 v1

Table 286: TESTMODE Input signals


INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Sets terminal in test mode when active

D0E7399T201305151403 v1

Table 287: TESTMODE Output signals


ACTIVE BOOLEAN Terminal in test mode when active

OUTPUT BOOLEAN Test input is active

SETTING BOOLEAN Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)

NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during testmode



13.3.5 SettingsD0E7241T201305151403 v1

D0E7400T201305151403 v1

Table 288: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)


TestMode OffOn

- - Off Test mode in operation (On) or not(Off)

EventDisable OffOn

- - Off Event disable during testmode

CmdTestBit OffOn

- - Off Command bit for test required or notduring testmode


D0E7120T201305151403 v1

Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.• setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/Tests/IED test mode/

1:TESTMODE.

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated.The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the “Test mode: being in On”state. If the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from localHMI (SETTING signal is activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Anyfunction can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.D0E7113T201305151403 v1

Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the localHMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output ACTIVE is activated).When leaving the test mode, and returning to normal operation, these blockings are disabledand everything is set back to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set andconfigured parameter values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes arepossible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockingswere not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test mode is set to off.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputswill be activated.

When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a parameter, thatrequires restart of the application, is changed, the IED will re-enter test modeand all functions will be blocked, also functions that were unblocked before thechange. During the re-entering to test mode, all functions will be temporarilyunblocked for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This isonly valid if the IED is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a testhandle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) cansupply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.



The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to preventfilling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a commissioning ormaintenance test.

13.4 Change lock function CHNGLCK





Change lock function CHNGLCK - -


Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration andsettings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IEDconfiguration changes beyond a certain point in time.

The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.D0E6913T201305151403 v1

When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IEDconfiguration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked" will bedisplayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied by activeChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it is controlled by a signalfrom a binary input card. This guarantees that by setting that signal to a logical zero,CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal path to the CHNGLCK input, thatlogic must be designed so that it cannot permanently issue a logical one to the CHNGLCKinput. If such a situation would occur in spite of these precautions, then please contact thelocal ABB representative for remedial action.


CHNGLCKLOCK* ACTIVE

OVERRIDE


Figure 141: CHNGLCK function block

13.4.4 SignalsD0E7272T201305151403 v1

Table 289: CHNGLCK Input signals


LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock



D0E7273T201305151403 v1

Table 290: CHNGLCK Output signals


ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active

OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

13.4.5 SettingsD0E6903T201305151403 v1

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and ControlIED Manager (PCM600)


The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that doesnot involve reconfiguring of the IED:

• Monitoring• Reading events• Resetting events• Reading disturbance data• Clear disturbances• Reset LEDs• Reset counters and other runtime component states• Control operations• Set system time• Enter and exit from test mode• Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:

Binary input Function

1 Activated

0 Deactivated

13.5 IED identifiers TERMINALID





IED identifiers TERMINALID - -




IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in thesystem, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

13.5.3 SettingsD0E7526T201305151403 v1

Table 291: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)


StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name

StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number

ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name

ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number

UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name

UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number

IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type forIEC60870-5-103

TechnicalKey 0 - 18 - 1 AA0J0Q0A0 Technical key

13.6 Product information





Product information PRODINF - -


The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set, settingsthat are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:

• IEDProdType• ProductVer• ProductDef• SerialNo• OrderingNo• ProductionDate

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Productidentifiers



They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

13.6.3 SettingsD0E7494T201305151403 v1

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

13.7 Primary system values PRIMVAL





Primary system values PRIMVAL - -


The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set under Main menu/Configuration/Power system/ Primary values/PRIMVAL in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.

13.7.3 SettingsD0E7988T201305151403 v1

Table 292: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)


Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency

PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3Inverse=L3L2L1

- - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation

13.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI


Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function,processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all aspects of theanalog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency, harmonic content,sequence components and so on. This information is then used by the respective functions inACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring).

The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool or theApplication Configuration tool.

In the Switchsync PWC600 pre-configuration, all analog inputs to SMAI functionblocks are routed through SRCSELECT function blocks. This is to enableselection of input signal sources either from TRM or IEC 61850-9-2(LE) mergingunits, through a setting.







Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_80_x - -


D0E8601T201305151403 v1

SMAI_80_1

BLOCK

DFTSPFC

REVROT

^GRP1L1

^GRP1L2

^GRP1L3

^GRP1N

SPFCOUT

AI3P

AI1

AI2

AI3

AI4

AIN

IEC09000139-2-en.vsdxIEC09000139 V2 EN-US

Figure 142: SMAI_80_1 function block

SMAI_80_2

BLOCK

REVROT

^GRP2L1

^GRP2L2

^GRP2L3

^GRP2N

AI3P

AI1

AI2

AI3

AI4

AIN



Figure 143: SMAI_80_2 to SMAI_80_12 function block


Table 293: SMAI_80_1 Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1

DFTSPFC REAL 80.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFTcalculation

REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1

GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity

GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity

GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity

GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity




Table 294: SMAI_80_1 Output signals


SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFTreference function

AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1-4

AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input

AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input

AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input

AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input

AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected

PID-3044-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 295: SMAI_80_12 Input signals


BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 12

REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 12

GRP12L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity

GRP12L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity

GRP12L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity

GRP12N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity


Table 296: SMAI_80_12 Output signals


AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1-4

AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input

AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input

AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input

AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input

AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected




Table 297: SMAI_80_1 Non group settings (basic)



DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRefDFTRefGrp1DFTRefGrp2DFTRefGrp3DFTRefGrp4DFTRefGrp5DFTRefGrp6DFTRefGrp7DFTRefGrp8DFTRefGrp9DFTRefGrp10DFTRefGrp11DFTRefGrp12External DFT ref

- - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output

DFTReference InternalDFTRefDFTRefGrp1DFTRefGrp2DFTRefGrp3DFTRefGrp4DFTRefGrp5DFTRefGrp6DFTRefGrp7DFTRefGrp8DFTRefGrp9DFTRefGrp10DFTRefGrp11DFTRefGrp12External DFT ref

- - InternalDFTRef DFT reference

ConnectionType Ph-NPh-Ph

- - Ph-N Input connection type

AnalogInputType VoltageCurrent

- - Voltage Analog input signal type

Table 298: SMAI_80_1 Non group settings (advanced)


Negation OffNegateNNegate3PhNegate3Ph+N

- - Off Negation

MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % ofUBase




Table 299: SMAI_80_12 Non group settings (basic)



DFTReference InternalDFTRefDFTRefGrp1DFTRefGrp2DFTRefGrp3DFTRefGrp4DFTRefGrp5DFTRefGrp6DFTRefGrp7DFTRefGrp8DFTRefGrp9DFTRefGrp10DFTRefGrp11DFTRefGrp12External DFT ref

- - InternalDFTRef DFT reference

ConnectionType Ph-NPh-Ph

- - Ph-N Input connection type

AnalogInputType VoltageCurrent

- - Voltage Analog input signal type

Table 300: SMAI_80_12 Non group settings (advanced)


Negation OffNegateNNegate3PhNegate3Ph+N

- - Off Negation

MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % ofUBase


Every SMAI can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltageor current. The AnalogInputType setting should be set according to the input connected. Thesignal received by SMAI is processed internally to obtain 244 different electrical parameters,for example RMS value, peak-to-peak, frequency and so on. The activation of BLOCK inputresets all outputs to 0.

SMAI_80 does all the calculation based on nominal 80 samples per line frequency period, thisgives a sample frequency of 4 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 4.8 kHz at 60 Hznominal line frequency.

The output signals AI1...AI4 in SMAI_80_x function block are direct outputs of the connectedinput signals GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN. GRPxN is always the neutral current. IfGRPxN is not connected, the output AI4 is zero. The AIN output is the calculated residualquantity, obtained as a sum of inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 but is equal to output AI4 ifGRPxN is connected. The output signals AI1, AI2, AI3 and AIN are normally connected to theanalog disturbance recorder.

The SMAI function block always calculates the residual quantities in case onlythe three phases (Ph-N) are connected (GRPxN input not used).



The output signal AI3P in the SMAI function block is a group output signal containing allprocessed electrical information from inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN.Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.

The input signal REVROT is used to reverse the phase order.

A few points need to be ensured for SMAI to process the analog signal correctly.

• It is not mandatory to connect all the inputs of SMAI function. However, it is veryimportant that same set of three phase analog signals should be connected to one SMAIfunction.

• The sequence of input connected to SMAI function inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 andGRPxN should normally represent phase L1, phase L2, phase L3 and neutral currentsrespectively.

• It is possible to connect analog signals available as Ph-N or Ph-Ph to SMAI.ConnectionType should be set according to the input connected.

• If the GRPxN input is not connected and all three phase-to-earth inputs are connected,SMAI calculates the neutral input on its own and it is available at the AI3P and AIN outputs.It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-N.

• If any two phase-to-earth inputs and neutral currents are connected, SMAI calculates theremaining third phase-to-neutral input on its own and it is available at the AI3P output. Itis necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-N.

• If any two phase-to-phase inputs are connected, SMAI calculates the remaining thirdphase-to-phase input on its own. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set toPh-Ph.

• All three inputs GRPxLx should be connected to SMAI for calculating sequencecomponents for ConnectionType set to Ph-N.

• At least two inputs GRPxLx should be connected to SMAI for calculating the positive andnegative sequence component for ConnectionType set to Ph-Ph. Calculation of zerosequence requires GRPxN input to be connected.

• Negation setting inverts (reverse) the polarity of the analog input signal.

Frequency adaptivity

SMAI function performs DFT calculations for obtaining various electrical parameters. DFT usessome reference frequency for performing calculations. For most of the cases, thesecalculations are done using a fixed DFT reference based on system frequency. However, if thefrequency of the network is expected to vary more than 2 Hz from the nominal frequency, moreaccurate DFT results can be obtained if the adaptive DFT is used. This means that thefrequency of the network is tracked and the DFT calculation is adapted according to that.

DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference need to be set appropriately for adaptive DFT calculations.

DFTRefExtOut: Setting valid only for the instance of function block SMAI_80_1. It decides thereference block for external output SPFCOUT.

DFTReference: Reference DFT for the block. This setting decides DFT reference for DFTcalculations. DFTReference set to InternalDFTRef uses fixed DFT reference based on the setsystem frequency. DFTReference set to DFTRefGrpX uses DFT reference from the selectedgroup block, when own group selected adaptive DFT reference will be used based on thecalculated signal frequency from own group. DFTReference set to External DFT Ref will usereference based on input signal DFTSPFC.



Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default valueInternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. However, if it is necessary to usefrequency adaptive DFT (DFTReference set to other than default, referringcurrent measuring SMAI) when no voltages are available, note that theMinValFreqMeas setting is still set in reference to UBase (of the selectedGBASVAL group). This means that the minimum level for the current amplitudeis based on UBase. For example, if UBase is 20000, the resulting minimumamplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000.

MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated,expressed as percent of the voltage in the selected Global Base voltage group (GlobalBaseSel).

13.9 Global base values GBASVALD0E7957T201305151403 v1





Global base values GBASVAL - -


Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for allapplicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for current,voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have six different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base values.This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point for updatingvalues when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out of the sixsets of GBASVAL functions.

13.9.3 SettingsD0E7978T201305151403 v1

D0E8306T201305151403 v1

Table 301: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)


UBase 0.05 - 1500.00 kV 0.05 132.00 Global base voltage

IBase 1 - 50000 A 1 1000 Global base current

SBase 0.050 - 7500.000 MVA 0.001 229.000 Global base apparent power



13.10 Authority check ATHCHCK





Authority check ATHCHCK - -


To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing theIED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IEDand the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:

• local, through the local HMI• remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user managementtool.


Figure 144: PCM600 user management tool

13.10.3 SettingsD0E7263T201305151403 v1





There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of theIED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 302.

Table 302: Pre-defined user types

User type Access rights

SystemOperator Control from local HMI, no bypass

ProtectionEngineer All settings

DesignEngineer Application configuration (including SMT, GDE andCMT)

UserAdministrator User and password administration for the IED

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management withinPCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users,groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names andpasswords.The maximum of characters in a password is 12.

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able towrite users, created in PCM600, to IED.

13.10.4.1 Authorization handling in the IEDD0E7206T201305151403 v1

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until auser has been created with the IED User Management.

Once a user is created and written to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, using thepassword assigned in the tool. Then the default user will be Guest.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user defined!”

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/Configuration/HMI/Screen/SCREEN:1) elapses, the IED returns to Guest state, when onlyreading is possible. By factory default, the display timeout is set to 60 minutes.

If one or more users are created with the IED User Management and written to the IED, then,

when a user attempts a Log on by pressing the key or when the user attempts to performan operation that is password protected, the Log on window opens.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, one can changethe user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows. After choosing

the right user name, the user must press the key again. When it comes to password, upon

pressing the key, the following characters will show up: “”. The user mustscroll for every letter in the password. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case

sensitive) choose OK and press the key again.



At successful Log on, the local HMI shows the new user name in the status bar at the bottomof the LCD. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protectedsetting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, an "ErrorAccess Denied" message opens. If a user enters an incorrect password three times, that userwill be blocked for ten minutes before a new attempt to log in can be performed. The user willbe blocked from logging in, both from the local HMI and PCM600. However, other users are tolog in during this period.

13.11 Authority management AUTHMAN





Authority management AUTHMAN - -


This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance menulog on time out.

13.11.3 SettingsD0E7402T201305151403 v1

Table 303: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)


MaintMenuEnable NoYes

- - Yes Maintenance menu enabled

AuthTimeout 10 Min20 Min30 Min40 Min50 Min60 Min

- - 10 Min Authority blocking timeout

13.12 FTP access with password FTPACCS





FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -


The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with SSL.



The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features. It tries toimmediately activate implicit SSL if the specified port is 990. If the specified port is any other,it tries to negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS.

Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This mode is onlyfor accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.

If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a specificaccount for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The password ofthis user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.

13.12.3 SettingsD0E7391T201305151403 v1

Table 304: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)


PortSelection NoneFrontLAN1Front+LAN1

- - Front+LAN1 Port selection for communication

SSLMode FTP+FTPSFTPS

- - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL

TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with ExplicitSSL

TCPPortFTPS 1 - 65535 - 1 990 TCP port for FTP with Implicit SSL

13.13 Authority status ATHSTAT





Authority status ATHSTAT - -


Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on activity.

User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.


ATHSTATUSRBLKED

LOGGEDON


Figure 145: ATHSTAT function block



13.13.4 SignalsD0E7280T201305151403 v1

Table 305: ATHSTAT Output signals


USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password

LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

13.13.5 SettingsD0E7242T201305151403 v1

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and ControlIED Manager (PCM600)


Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the userauthorization:

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked(the output USRBLKED)

• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON)is activated.

13.14 Denial of service


The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit overload on theIED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not beallowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic willbe quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network loadmight for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

13.14.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT





Denial of service, frame rate controlfor front port

DOSFRNT - -




DOSFRNTLINKUP

WARNINGALARM


Figure 146: DOSFRNT function block

13.14.2.3 SignalsD0E7269T201305151403 v1

Table 306: DOSFRNT Output signals


LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status

WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state

ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

13.14.2.4 SettingsD0E7217T201305151403 v1



Table 307: DOSFRNT Monitored data


State INTEGER 0=Off1=Normal2=Throttle3=DiscardLow4=DiscardAll5=StopPoll

- Frame rate control state

Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100

IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received innormal mode

IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received inpolled mode

IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets discarded

NonIPPackRecNorm

INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received innormal mode

NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received inpolled mode

NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets discarded



13.14.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1





Denial of service, frame rate controlfor LAN1 port

DOSLAN1 - -


DOSLAN1LINKUP

WARNINGALARM


Figure 147: DOSLAN1 function block

13.14.3.3 SignalsD0E7271T201305151403 v1

Table 308: DOSLAN1 Output signals


LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status

WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state

ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

13.14.3.4 SettingsD0E7217T201305151403 v1



Table 309: DOSLAN1 Monitored data


State INTEGER 0=Off1=Normal2=Throttle3=DiscardLow4=DiscardAll5=StopPoll

- Frame rate control state

Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100

IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received innormal mode

IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets received inpolled mode

IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets discarded





NonIPPackRecNorm

INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received innormal mode

NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets received inpolled mode

NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets discarded


The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED load fromcommunication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and protectionfunctionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:

• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

13.15 Source selection SRCSELECT

13.15.1 IdentificationGUID-C4F69AF5-FDBE-464D-B28E-C4C539613E17 v1



ANSI/IEEEC37.2 devicenumber

Source selection betweentransformer module andmerging unit

SrcSelect - -

13.15.2 FunctionalityGUID-2FA7F39C-76E0-4B03-B68F-E49A61FA6C6E v2

Switchsync PWC600 is supplied with a pre-configuration that can be customized to mostapplications by settings entered in Switchsync Setting Tool (SST). The SRCSELECT functionallows selecting the source of an analog (voltage or current) signal from TRM (hardware based)or MU (software based) by settings. Flexibility of selection of the input source from all the MUs(that is, four MUs) and TRM (that is, two TRMs) sources modeled as three-phase + neutralinputs eliminates the need for modifications in ACT or SMT. A SRCSELECT function block isplaced between TRM or MU outputs and SMAI inputs.

There are eight sets of input available in the function. Each set is modeled as the three-phase+neutral input. For each MU, the function has five binary status inputs. The selection needs tobe done for the status signals of MU from which the data is subscribed. TRM signals can beconnected to any of the eight input phase group.



13.15.3 Function blockGUID-F0F5275E-B405-4464-A1CA-8802F740F220 v1

SRCSELECT

INPUT1-1INPUT1-2

INPUT1-3

INPUT1-N

OUTPUT-1


INPUT2-1INPUT2-2INPUT2-3INPUT2-NINPUT3-1INPUT3-2

INPUT3-3

INPUT3-N

INPUT4-1INPUT4-2

INPUT4-3

INPUT4-N

INPUT5-1INPUT5-2INPUT5-3

INPUT5-NDIAG5DATA

DIAG5SYNCH

DIAG5SMPLT

DIAG5SYNMU

DIAG5TSTMDINPUT6-1INPUT6-2INPUT6-3INPUT6-N

DIAG6DATADIAG6SYNCHDIAG6SMPLT

DIAG6SYNMUDIAG6TSTMD

INPUT7-1INPUT7-2INPUT7-3INPUT7-N



INPUT8-1INPUT8-2INPUT8-3INPUT8-N



OUTPUT-2

OUTPUT-3

OUTPUT-N

DIAGDATA

DIAGSYNCH

DIAGSMPLT

DIAGSYNMU

DIAGTSTMD






Table 310: SRCSELECT Input signals


INPUT1-1 STRING 0 First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity ofINPUT1

INPUT1-2 STRING 0 Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity ofINPUT1

INPUT1-3 STRING 0 Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity ofINPUT1

INPUT1-N STRING 0 Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity ofINPUT1













INPUT5-1 STRING 0 First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2(not in case ofMU) quantity of INPUT5

INPUT5-2 STRING 0 Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3(not in case ofMU) quantity of INPUT5

INPUT5-3 STRING 0 Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1(not in case ofMU) quantity of INPUT5


DIAG5DATA BOOLEAN 0 Serious data loss from MU over INPUT5 group

DIAG5SYNCH BOOLEAN 0 MU clock not synced to same clock as IED over INPUT5 group

DIAG5SMPLT BOOLEAN 0 Sample lost; Current sample estimated for MU over INPUT5group

DIAG5SYNMU BOOLEAN 0 SmpSynch flag in frame for MU not ok over INPUT5 group

DIAG5TSTMD BOOLEAN 0 Used channel from MU is in testmode over INPUT5 group









DIAG6DATA BOOLEAN 0 Serious data loss from MU over INPUT6 group



DIAG6SYNMU BOOLEAN 0 smpSynch flag in frame for MU not ok over INPUT6 group






DIAG7DATA BOOLEAN 0 Serious data loss from MU over INPUT7 group.









DIAG8DATA BOOLEAN 0 Serious data loss from MU over INPUT8 group.








Table 311: SRCSELECT Output signals


OUTPUT-1 STRING Selected Output -1



OUTPUT-N STRING Selected Output -N

DIAGDATA BOOLEAN Serious data loss from selected MU

DIAGSYNCH BOOLEAN Selected MU clock not synced to same clock as IED

DIAGSMPLT BOOLEAN Sample lost; Current sample estimated for selected MU

DIAGSYNMU BOOLEAN smpSynch flag in frame for selected MU not ok

DIAGTSTMD BOOLEAN Used channel from selected MU is in testmode


Table 312: SRCSELECT Non group settings (advanced)


InputSelect INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8

- - INPUT1 Input group selection to output

13.15.6 Operation principleGUID-50D0531A-AF51-4762-A957-21957195F2DF v1

The source selector function is a multiplexer, where the output is selected from one of theeight input phase group with a setting. It selects one of the analog input groups and forwardsthe selected input group to the pre-processing component connected to its output. A group oftransformer module channels or merging unit channels can be connected to the sourceselector as the input source.



SRCSELECT

INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4

INPUT5

INPUT6

INPUT7

INPUT8

SMAI Application

InputSelect



Figure 149: Source selector application

Figure 149 depicts the source selector embedded in an application. When InputSelect is set to"INPUT1", the INPUT1 channel link strings are passed to the pre-processing component, and soforth. Based on that link, the pre-procesing component fetches the data from the particularchannel.

The IED supports four IEC 61850- 9-2 (LE) merging unit streams, wherein each stream has foursets of current and voltage signals. In a hybrid configuration, the current and voltage can beeither from a conventional CT/VT (connection through TRM) or through the IEC 61850- 9-2 (LE)MU. The eight input groups are provided per instance for the selection, out of which the lastfour input groups can be connected to the merging unit signals, as there are diagnostic statussignals that need to be selected and provided as an output from the function.

The input groups are named INPUT1-x to INPUT8-x and each group supports four analoginputs. INPUT5-x to INPUT8-x additionally support the diagnostic binary status signals from amerging unit (see description of MU_4I_4U). If any of INPUT1 through INPUT4 is selected, thediagnostic outputs assume default value 0.

13.16 Web serverGUID-93701C18-1852-4054-919D-9EB6A8100FFF v1

13.16.1 IdentificationGUID-71A1BFD4-58DA-4A12-87FD-614E38E91D7B v1




Web server WEBSERVER - -

13.16.2 FunctionalityGUID-DC133893-7C9D-46AD-828F-7953795F9D72 v1

Web server function is used for configuring the access to the IED through the web interface(WHMI) using a web browser.




Table 313: WEBSERVER Non group settings (basic)


Operation OffOn


WriteMode Writing disabledWriting enabled

- - Writing disabled Writing of settings enabled

SessionTimeout 2 - 60 Min 1 3 Session timeout

Table 314: WEBSERVER Non group settings (advanced)


Port NoneFrontRearAll

- - All Select network port

SSLMode OffOptionalMandatory

- - Optional Support for AUTH TLS/SSL/Clear text

ClientCert OffOptionalMandatory

- - Off Support for client certificate

13.16.3 Operation principleGUID-D9F399C0-CD50-4E85-950F-FF4142317132 v1

For accessing the IED using a web browser, WEBSERVER works as an interface function toaccept requests and send data. The actual webpages to be displayed are defined by HTML filesstored in the IED. WEBSERVER interacts with the authority system in the IED to validate userpermissions.

Access to the IED from a web browser can be disabled by setting Operation to “Off”.

It is possible to change IED parameters and settings through Web HMI. This feature can bedisabled by setting WriteMode to “Writing disabled”.

From a security point of view, it is desirable to terminate a browser session if the user hasbeen idle for some duration. This duration can be set by SessionTimeout.

The IED has two physical ports through which it can be accessed using web browser. Allowedaccess can be configured using the Port setting. The options are described in the table below.

Port option Description

None Web access is disabled

Front Web access is enabled only through thefront port

Rear Web access is enabled only through therear port

All Web access is enabled through bothfront and rear ports

Refer to the Web HMI section in the User manual for additional information on WHMI.



370

Section 14 IED physical connections

14.1 Protective earth connectionsD0E7951T201305151403 v1

The IED shall be earthed with a 16.0 mm2 flat copper cable.

The earth lead should be as short as possible, less than 1500 mm. Additionallength is required for door mounting.

D0E13861T201305151403 V1 EN-US

Figure 150: The protective earth pin is located to the left of connector X101 on the 3U full19” case

14.2 Inputs

14.2.1 Measuring inputsD0E7938T201305151403 v5

Each terminal for CTs/VTs is dimensioned for one 0.5...6.0 mm2 wire or for two wires ofmaximum 2.5 mm2.

Table 315: Assignment of conventional CT and VT inputs in pre-configuration

Connector Pin Signal Description Software signal

X101 1 L1 I N L1 phase current TRM_2.CH1(I)

X101 2 L1 I L


X101 4 L2 I L


X101 6 L3 I L

X101 7 - Not used TRM_2.CH4(I)

X101 8 -


1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 14IED physical connections



X101 9 L1 V1 N Source voltage L1 / L1-L2 /only available single phase

TRM_2.CH5(U)

X101 10 L1 V1 L

X102 1 L2 V1 N Source voltage L2 / L2-L3 TRM_2.CH6(U)

X102 2 L2 V1 L

X102 3 L3 V1 N Source voltage L3 / L3-L1 TRM_2.CH7(U)

X102 4 L3 V1 L

X102 5 L1 V2 N Load voltage L1 (optional) TRM_2.CH8(U)

X102 6 L1 V2 L


X102 8 L2 V2 L


X102 10 L3 V2 L

A single-phase reference VT shall always be connected to terminals X101:9-10,regardless which system phase(s) it measures. If it does not measure L1 thenthe application configuration should be adjusted for proper recording anddisplay of the signals.

To avoid mismatch between CT and VT connections the connectors are mechanically encodedand cannot be inserted in the wrong location.

14.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage inputD0E8128T201305151403 v4

The auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X420-1 and X420-2/3. The terminalsused depend on the power supply.

The permitted auxiliary voltage range of the IED is marked on the identification sticker on theIED's enclosure.

Table 316: Auxliary supply voltage input


X420 1 UB- IED supply voltage (batteryvoltage)

PSM_102.BATTAMPL

X420 2 UB+ Me IED supply voltage (batteryvoltage) for 48…125V DCvariant

X420 3 UB+ Hi IED supply voltage (batteryvoltage) for 110… 250V DCvariant

The two LEDs next to X420 indicate the following conditions:

• Bat1 = input voltage (e.g. station battery) is within the expected range.• Rdy1 = output voltage of internal power supply is within the expected range (no IED

internal short circuit or overvoltage).

Section 14 1MRK 511 275-UEN CIED physical connections


14.2.3 Binary inputsD0E8133T201305151403 v6

The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch outputcontacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control of IED settings.

Each connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two 0.5...1.0 mm2

wires.

Table 317: Circuit breaker auxiliary switch position inputs


X324 1 L1 NO/52a - UB- PIO_3.PBI4

X324 2 L1 NO/52a + L1 auxiliary contact NO (52a), the otherpole of which is connected to UB+

X324 3 L2 NO/52a - UB- PIO_3.PBI5


X324 5 L3 NO/52a - UB- PIO_3.PBI6


X324 7 L1 NC/52b - UB- PIO_3.PBI7

X324 8 L1 NC/52b + L1 auxiliary contact NC (52b), the otherpole of which is connected to UB+

X324 9 L2 NC/52b - UB- PIO_3.PBI8


X324 11 L3 NC/52b - UB- PIO_3.PBI9


X324 13 L1 prim - UB- PIO_3.PBI10

X324 14 L1 prim + L1 primary contact (make available onterminal; only used duringcommissioning)





Table 318: Recommended shunt resistor ratings for precision binary inputs

Cable length 110…127 V supply 220…250 V supply

Up to 30 m 100 kΩ, 0.5 W 100 kΩ, 2 W

Up to 150 m 33 kΩ, 2 W 33 kΩ, 5 W

Up to 300 m 15 kΩ, 3 W 15 kΩ, 15 W

Above 300 m 4.7 kΩ, 10 W 4.7 kΩ, 30 W



Table 319: Inputs for close/open commands and CB drive energy level


X329 1 Close in - Close command input from bay control BIO_4.BI1

X329 2 Close in +

X329 4 Open in - Open command input from bay control BIO_4.BI2

X329 5 Open in +

X329 8 L1 Spr - L1 spring charge level (common terminal) *

X329 9 L1 Spr OCObk + L1 spring charge level: OCO blocked BIO_4.BI4

X329 10 L1 Spr CObk + L1 spring charge level: CO blocked BIO_4.BI5







X321 13 LED Rst - Reset latched status LEDs PIO_3.PBI1

X321 14 LED Rst + Reset latched status LEDs

* No separate software designation, as this is the common terminal for the next two signals.

Binary inputs for spring charge level are intended for circuit breakers in which the drive energyand the operating capability can differ with the position of the main storage element (spring).This occurs in spring-hydraulic drives such as ABB models HMB/HMC. The spring chargeinformation is used for compensation of operating times and for reporting the CB's operatingcapability. However, if the breaker is not used for fast reclosing and if the spring is always fullycharged prior to each operation, these inputs need not be connected. Similarly, these inputsare not used with drives in which the spring is always fully charged by design.

14.3 OutputsD0E8360T201305151403 v3

Each connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two 0.5...1.0 mm2

wires.

Table 320: Open and close command outputs


X321 1 L1 Close - Controlled close command output L1 PIO_3.PBO1

X321 2 L1 Close +


X321 4 L2 Close +


X321 6 L3 Close +

X321 7 L1 Open - Controlled open command output L1 PIO_3.PBO4

X321 8 L1 Open +


X321 10 L2 Open +


X321 12 L3 Open +



14.3.1 Outputs for signallingD0E8361T201305151403 v3

Signal output contacts are used for signalling alarms and warning conditions.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two 0.5...1.0mm2 wires.

Table 321: Signalling outputs


X317 13 Al Discr NO Alarm: Breaker testing discrepancytrip

PSM_102.BO7_SO

X317 14

X317 15 Al 9-2 NO Warning: Loss of 9-2 data orsynchronization

PSM_102.BO8_SO

X317 16

X317 17 Al SigPr NO Alarm: Error in signal processing PSM_102.BO9_SO

X317 18

X326 7 Wa Reig NO Warning: Re-Strike / re-ignitiondetected

BIO_4.BO4_SO

X326 8

X326 9 Wa Accur NO Warning: Reduced accuracy of lastcontrolled switching operations

BIO_4.BO5_SO

X326 10

X326 11 Wa LComp NO Warning: Loss of compensationsignal

BIO_4.BO6_SO

X326 12

X326 13 Wa Thresh NO Threshold supervision warning BIO_4.BO7_SO

X326 14 Al Thresh NO Threshold supervision alarm BIO_4.BO8_SO

X326 15 Thresh Com Threshold supervision (common) -

X326 16 Wa Uncont NC Warning: Controlled switching notpossible

BIO_4.BO9_SO

X326 17 Wa Uncont NO

X326 18 Wa Uncont Com

14.3.2 IRFD0E8362T201305151403 v3

The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision system ofthe IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one of the two contactsis closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system or the auxiliary voltage isdisconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other contact closes.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or with two 0.5...1.0mm2 wires.

Table 322: Internal failure output

Connector Pin Signals Description

X319 1 IRF NO Closed: no IRF, and Ub connected

X319 2 IRF NC Closed: IRF, or Ub disconnected

X319 3 IRF Com IRF, common



14.4 Communication interfacesD0E8365T201305151403 v2

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. This interface is intended forconfiguration and setting purposes.

Station bus and process bus communication runs on the communication module via theoptical interfaces (LC Ethernet connectors) on the rear panel. If both are used, the process busshall run as a separate network from the station bus to prevent interference of control datawith the sampled values stream.

Rear communication via the X8/EIA-485/IRIG-B connector uses a communication module withthe galvanic EIA-485 serial connection.

The HMI connector X0 and the serial interface X9 are not used in Switchsync PWC600.

14.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connectionD0E8363T201305151403 v2

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector designed for point-to-point use. Thisinterface is intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the PC has to beconfigured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically if the DHCP server is enabledin LHMI. The DHCP server inside the IED can be activated for the front interface only.

Usually this port is used only for temporary connection, thus no permanent wiring is required.Events, setting values and all input data such as operation records and waveform records canbe read via the front communication port.

Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.

• PCM600• LHMI• WHMI

The default IP address of the IED through this port is 10.1.150.3.

The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover cable withRJ-45 connector is used with the front port.

14.4.2 Station communication rear connectionD0E8366T201305151403 v2

The default IP address of the IED through the rear Ethernet port is 192.168.1.10. The physicalconnector is X1/LAN1 A. The communication speed is 100 Mbps for the 100BASE-FX LCinterface.

For redundant communication, X1/LAN1 A and X2/LAN1 B can be used.

Table 323: Station bus


X1 All LAN1 A Station bus

X2 All LAN1 B Redundant station bus, optional

For specification of the optical fibers to be used, see the corresponding technical data table.



14.4.3 Optical serial rear connectionD0E8367T201305151403 v2

The optical serial communication port (X9) is not used in Switchsync PWC600.

Always keep the factory supplied cap on the Tx output of port X9, to preventexposure to laser radiation.

14.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connectionD0E8368T201305151403 v2

The communication module follows the EIA-485 standard and is intended to be used in multi-point communication.

Table 324: EIA-485 and IRIG-B connections


X8 1 RS485_GNDC RS485 ground through capacitance

X8 2 RS485_RXTERM Termination for RS485 receiver

X8 3 RS485_RX + RS485 receiver

X8 4 RS485_TXTERM Termination for RS485 transmitter

X8 5 RS485_SIGGND Signal ground for RS485

X8 6 IRIG-B - Time synchronization input

X8 7 IRIG-B_GNDC IRIG-B ground through capacitance

X8 8 RS485_GND RS485 ground

X8 9 RS485_RX - RS485 receiver

X8 10 RS485_TX + RS485 transmitter

X8 11 RS485_TX - RS485 transmitter

X8 12 RS485_SIGGND Signal ground for RS485

X8 13 IRIG-B + Time synchronization input

X8 14 IRIG-B_GND IRIG-B ground

EIA-485 communication is not enabled in this product.

14.4.5 Process bus rear connectionGUID-60053C7B-4AD3-4DEC-9C47-BD2C2479516E v2

Switchsync PWC600 can receive digital sampled values (voltage and/or current) via IEC61850-9-2(LE) on its X3/LAN2 A interface. Up to four logical merging units can be connected,which are distinguished by their sampled values ID (svID). The specifications of X3 are identicalto X1 and X2.

Hardware synchronization of the sampled values is achieved by a 1PPS signal received onoptical input X10. Time synchronization via SNTP or IRIG-B cannot be used for this purpose.

If the 9-2 process values to Switchsync PWC600 originate from two or moreseparate physical merging units, they should be synchronized to the samemaster. Otherwise, occasional communication interruptions may occur.



Table 325: Process bus


X3 All 9-2LE Process bus: sampled values from one or more mergingunits compliant to IEC 61850-9-2 LE

Table 326: Optical 1PPS signal


X10 Rx 1PPS Optical 1PPS signal from time synchronization master

For specification of the optical fibers to be used, see the corresponding technical data table.

14.4.6 Communication interfaces and protocolsD0E7214T201305151403 v3



IEC 61850-8-1

HTTPS

= Supported

14.4.7 Recommended industrial Ethernet switchesD0E8405T201305151403 v1

ABB recommends ABB industrial Ethernet switches.

14.5 Connection diagramsD0E8410T201305151403 v3

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part of theproduct delivery. They can be accessed through the IED's context menu (item Documentation),or directly on the DVD.

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded fromhttp://new.abb.com/high-voltage/monitoring/switchsync.



http://new.abb.com/high-voltage/monitoring/switchsync

Section 15 Technical data

15.1 DimensionsD0E7937T201305151403 v1

Table 328: Dimensions of the IED - 3U full 19" rack

Description Value

Width 442 mm (17.40 inches)

Height 132 mm (5.20 inches), 3U

Depth 249.5 mm (9.82 inches)

Weight box 10 kg (<22.04 lbs)

15.2 Power supplyD0E7960T201305151403 v2

Table 329: Power supply

Description 600PSM02 600PSM03

Uauxnominal 48, 60, 110, 125 V DC 110, 125, 220, 250 V DC

Uauxvariation 80...120% of Un (38.4...150 V DC) 80...120% of Un (88...300 V DC)

Maximum load on auxiliary voltagesupply

35 W for DC

Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 and 120 Hz)

Maximum interruption time in theauxiliary DC voltage withoutresetting the IED

50 ms at Uaux

Resolution of the voltagemeasurement in PSM module

1 bit represents 1 V (+/- 1 VDC) 1 bit represents 2 V (+/- 1 VDC)

GUID-80AA04F6-C989-4E8A-81C0-1A9A7458ADCC v7.1.1

15.3 Measuring inputsD0E7961T201305151403 v3

Table 330: Measuring inputs

Description Value

Frequency

Rated frequency fr 50 or 60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs

Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A1)

Operating range 0 – 500 A


1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 15Technical data


Description Value

Thermal withstand 500 A for 1 s *)

100 A for 10 s

40 A for 1 min

20 A continuously

Dynamic withstand 1250 A one half wave

Burden < 10 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 200 mVA at Ir = 5 A

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs**)

Rated voltage Ur 100 or 220 V

Operating range 0 – 420 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s

420 V continuously

Burden < 50 mVA at 100 V

< 200 mVA at 220 V

**) all values for individual voltage inputs

Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

1) Phase currents or residual current

15.4 Binary inputsD0E7948T201305151403 v2

Table 331: Binary inputs

Description Value

Operating range Maximum input voltage 300 V DC

Rated voltage 24...250 V DC

Current drain 1.6...1.8 mA

Power consumption/input <0.38 W

Threshold voltage 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps of 1%of the rated voltage)

Table 332: Precision binary inputs

Description Value

Operating range Maximum input voltage 300 V DC

Rated voltage 33...288 V DC

Current drain 0...0.5 mA

Power consumption/input <0.15 W

Threshold voltage 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps of 1%of the rated voltage)

Section 15 1MRK 511 275-UEN CTechnical data


15.5 Signal outputsD0E7949T201305151403 v2

Table 333: Signal outputs and IRF output

Description Value

Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC

Continuous contact carry 5 A

Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A

Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A

Breaking capacity when the control-circuit timeconstant L/R<40 ms, at U <48/110/220 V DC

≤0.5 A/≤0.1 A/≤0.04 A

15.6 Power outputsD0E8276T201305151403 v2

Table 334: Power output relays without TCS function (not used in default pre-configuration)

Description Value

Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC





≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A

Table 335: Power output relays with TCS function (not used in default pre-configuration)

Description Value

Rated voltage 250 V DC





≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A

Control voltage range 20...250 V DC

Current drain through the supervision circuit ~1.0 mA

Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 V DC

Table 336: Precision binary outputs

Description Value

Rated switching voltage 33...288 V DC

Continuous carry (resistive) 0.5 A DC

DC make and carryton <1 s (single shot, toff >600 s)L/R <10 msUsw ≤50 V

10 A DC




Description Value

DC make and carryton <1 s (single shot, toff >600 s)L/R <10 msUsw >150 V

6 A DC

Impedance in On state ≤0.5 Ω

Impedance in Off state ≥100 kΩ

15.7 Data communication interfacesD0E7950T201305151403 v4

Table 337: Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate

100BASE-TX (front port) TCP/IP CAT 5 S/FTP or better 100 MBit/s

100BASE-FX (rearEthernet ports)

TCP/IP Fibre-optic cable with LCconnector

100 MBit/s

Table 338: Fibre-optic communication links

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted pathattenuation1)

Distance

1300 nm MM 62.5/125μm glass fibrecore

LC <8 dB <2 km

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together



IEC 61850-8-1

HTTPS

= Supported

Table 340: X8/IRIG-B and EIA-485 interface

Type Protocol Cable

Tension clampconnection

IRIG-B Shielded twisted pair cableRecommended: CAT 5, Belden RS-485 (9841- 9844) orAlpha Wire (Alpha 6222-6230)

Tension clampconnection

DNP3.0(not used in SwitchsyncPWC600)

Shielded twisted pair cableRecommended: DESCAFLEX RD-H(ST)H-2x2x0.22mm2, Belden 9729, Belden 9829



Table 341: IRIG-B

Type Value Accuracy

Input impedance 430 Ohm -

Minimum input voltageHIGH

4.3 V -

Maximum input voltageLOW

0.8 V -

Table 342: EIA-485 interface

Type Value Conditions

Minimum differentialdriver output voltage

1.5 V –

Maximum output current 60 mA -

Minimum differentialreceiver input voltage

0.2 V -

Supported bit rates 300, 600, 1200, 2400,4800, 9600, 19200,38400, 57600, 115200

-

Maximum number ofIEDs supported on thesame bus

32 -

Max. cable length 925 m (3000 ft) Cable: AWG24 or better, stub lines shall be avoided

Table 343: Optical serial port (X9) and PPS synchronization input (X10)

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path attenuation1)

820 nm MM 62,5/125 µmglass fibre core

ST 6.8 dB (approx. 1700 m length with 4 dB/kmfibre attenuation)

820 nm MM 50/125 µm glassfibre core

ST 2.4 dB (approx. 600 m length with 4 dB/kmfibre attenuation)

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by fibre

15.8 Enclosure classD0E7771T201305151403 v1

Table 344: Degree of protection of rack-mounted IED

Description Value

Front side IP 40

Rear side, connection terminals IP 20

Table 345: Degree of protection of the LHMI

Description Value

Front and side IP40



15.9 Ingress protectionD0E8127T201305151403 v1

Table 346: Ingress protection

Description Value

IED front IP 54

IED rear IP 21

IED sides IP 42

IED top IP 42

IED bottom IP 21

15.10 Environmental conditions and testsD0E7972T201305151403 v2

Table 347: Environmental conditions

Description Value

Operating temperature range -25...+55ºC (continuous)

Short-time service temperature range -40...+70ºC (<16h)Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performanceoutside the temperature range of -25...+55ºC

Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing

Altitude up to 2000 m

Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85ºC

Table 348: Environmental tests

Description Type test value Reference

Cold tests operation storage

96 h at -25ºC16 h at -40ºC 96 h at -40ºC

IEC 60068-2-1ANSI C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)

Dry heat tests operation storage

16 h at +70ºC 96 h at +85ºC

IEC 60068-2-2ANSI C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)

Damp heattests

steady state cyclic

240 h at +40ºChumidity 93% 6 cycles at +25 to +55ºChumidity 93...95%

IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-30



15.11 Electromagnetic compatibility testsD0E7974T201305151403 v2

Table 349: Electromagnetic compatibility tests


100 kHz and 1 MHz burstdisturbance test

IEC 61000-4-18, level 3IEC 60255-22-1ANSI C37.90.1-2012

• Common mode 2.5 kV

• Differential mode 2.5 kV

Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000-4-2, level 4IEC 60255-22-2ANSI C37.90.3-2001

• Contact discharge 8 kV

• Air discharge 15 kV

Radio frequency interferencetests

• Conducted, common mode 10 V (emf), f=150 kHz...80 MHz IEC 61000-4-6 , level 3IEC 60255-22-6

• Radiated, amplitude-modulated

20 V/m (rms), f=80...1000 MHz andf=1.4...2.7 GHz

IEC 61000-4-3, level 3IEC 60255-22-3ANSI C37.90.2-2004

Fast transient disturbance tests IEC 61000-4-4IEC 60255-22-4, class AANSI C37.90.1-2012

• Communication ports 4 kV

• Other ports 4 kV

Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5IEC 60255-22-5

• Communication ports 1 kV line-to-earth

• Other ports 2 kV line-to-earth, 1 kV line-to-line

• Power supply 4 kV line-to-earth, 2 kV line-to-line

Power frequency (50 Hz)magnetic field

IEC 61000-4-8, level 5

• 3 s 1000 A/m

• Continuous 100 A/m

Pulse magnetic field immunitytest

1000 A/m IEC 61000-4-9, level 5

Damped oscillatory magneticfield

100 A/m, 100 kHz and 1 MHz IEC 61000-4-10, level 5

Power frequency immunity test IEC 60255-22-7, class AIEC 61000-4-16

• Common mode 300 V rms





• Differential mode 150 V rms

Voltage dips and shortinterruptionsc on DC powersupply

Dips:40%/200 ms70%/500 msInterruptions:0...50 ms: No restart0...∞ s : Correct behaviour at powerdown

IEC 60255-11IEC 61000-4-11

Voltage dips and interruptions onAC power supply

Dips:40% 10/12 cycles at 50/60 Hz70% 25/30 cycles at 50/60 HzInterruptions:0...50 ms: No restart0...∞ s: Correct behaviour at powerdown

IEC 60255-11IEC 61000-4-11

Electromagnetic emission tests EN 55011, class AIEC 60255-25ANSI C63.4, FCC

• Conducted, RF-emission(mains terminal)

0.15...0.50 MHz <79 dB(µV) quasi peak<66 dB(µV) average

0.5...30 MHz <73 dB(µV) quasi peak<60 dB(µV) average

• Radiated RF-emission, IEC

30...230 MHz <40 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,measured at 10 m distance

230...1000 MHz <47 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,measured at 10 m distance

15.12 Insulation testsD0E7975T201305151403 v1

Table 350: Insulation tests


Dielectric tests: IEC 60255-5ANSI C37.90-2005

• Test voltage 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min1 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min, communication

Impulse voltage test: IEC 60255-5ANSI C37.90-2005

• Test voltage 5 kV, unipolar impulses, waveform1.2/50 μs, source energy 0.5 J1 kV, unipolar impulses, waveform1.2/50 μs, source energy 0.5 J,communication

Insulation resistancemeasurements

IEC 60255-5ANSI C37.90-2005

• Isolation resistance >100 MΏ, 500 V DC

Protective bonding resistance IEC 60255-27

• Resistance <0.1 Ώ (60 s)



15.13 Mechanical testsD0E8295T201305151403 v1

Table 351: Mechanical tests

Description Reference Requirement

Vibration response tests(sinusoidal)

IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1

Vibration endurance test IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1

Shock response test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

Shock withstand test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

Bump test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2

15.14 Product safetyD0E7923T201305151403 v1

Table 352: Product safety

Description Reference

LV directive 2006/95/EC

Standard EN 60255-27 (2005)

15.15 EMC complianceD0E7922T201305151403 v1

Table 353: EMC compliance

Description Reference

EMC directive 2004/108/EC

Standards EN 50263 (2000)EN 60255-26 (2007)



388

Section 16 Glossary

D0E688T201305141612 v5

Names of function blocks, IEC 61850 logical nodes, data objects, dataattributes etc. are not listed here. Refer to the respective section of thisdocument or to the relevant part of the standard.

AC Alternating current

ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600

ACSI Abstract communication service interface, as defined in IEC 61850-7-2

A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter

AI Analog input

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AP Access point for digital communication

AR Autoreclosing

AWG American Wire Gauge standard

BI Binary input

BIO Binary input/output module

BO Binary output

BRCB Buffered report control block

BS British Standards

CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serialcommunication

CB Circuit breaker

CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. AUnited Nations-sponsored standards body within the InternationalTelecommunications Union.

CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer

CDC Common data class

CID Configured IED description file as per IEC 61850-6

Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI

CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600

CO cycle Close-open cycle

COM Communication module

COMTRADE Standard format according to IEC 60255-24

CPU Central processing unit

CRC Cyclic redundancy check

CSV Comma-separated values

CT Current transformer

CVT Capacitive voltage transformer

1MRK 511 275-UEN C Section 16Glossary


DA Data attribute

DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of theTCP/IP protocol etc.)

DC Direct current

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DI Digital input

DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012

DO Data object

DR Disturbance recorder

DRAM Dynamic random access memory

DSP Digital signal processor

DTT Data type template section in the SCL description file of a station or IED

DVD Digital versatile disc

EHV Extra high voltage

EIA Electronic Industries Association

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EMI Electromagnetic interference

EN European standard

ESD Electrostatic discharge

FC Function constraint

GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600

GIS Gas-insulated switchgear

GoCB GOOSE control block

GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event

GPS Global positioning system

GSAL Generic security application

GSE Generic substation event

HMI Human-machine interface

HSAR High speed autoreclosing

HTTPS Hypertext transfer protocol secure

HV High-voltage

HVDC High-voltage direct current

HW Hardware

ICD IED capability description file as per IEC 61850-6

IEC International Electrical Committee

IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements forprotective current transformers for transient performance

IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard

IEC 61850-8-1 Communication protocol standard for station bus

IEC 61850-9-2(LE) Communication protocol standard for sampled values

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Section 16 1MRK 511 275-UEN CGlossary


IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pairor optical fiber cable

IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) CyberSecurity Capabilities

IED Intelligent electronic device

Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED,they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of afunction is identical to another of the same kind but has a differentnumber in the IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimesdefined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In thesame way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type offunction.

IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widelyused on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation andreassembly through the data link layer.2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard

IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20



IRF Internal failure signal

IRIG-B InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200

ITU International Telecommunications Union

LAN Local area network

LCD Liquid crystal display

LD Logical device in IEC 61850

LED Light-emitting diode

LHMI Local human-machine interface

LN Logical node in IEC 61850

MCB Miniature circuit breaker

MICS Model implementation conformance statement, for IEC 61850

MMS Manufacturing Message Specification

MU Merging unit

MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed foruse in trains.

NC Normally closed auxiliary contact

NCC National Control Centre

NCIT Non-conventional instrument transformer

NO Normally open auxiliary contact

OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle

PC Personal computer

PCM Pulse code modulation

PCM600 Protection and control IED manager

PICS Protocol implementation conformance statement, for IEC 61850

PIO Precision input/output module



PIXIT Protocol implementation extra information for testing, for IEC 61850

PoW Point on wave

PPS, 1PPS One pulse per second, time synchronization interface

Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to themeasured and/or controlled components

PSM Power supply module

PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600

PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio

PWC Point-on-wave controller

RBAC Role-based access control (role-based security)

RISC Reduced instruction set computer

RJ-45 Registered jack 45, commonly used as plug connector for electricalEthernet

RMS value Root mean square value

RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections

RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485

RTC Real-time clock

RTU Remote terminal unit

Rx Receive line

SA Substation Automation

SBO Select-before-operate

SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition

SCD System configuration description file as per IEC 61850-6

SCL System configuration language in IEC 61850

SCS Station control system

SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850

SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600

SMS Station monitoring system

SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer clocks onlocal area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accuratehardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embeddednode can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the requiredaccuracy.

SPO Single-pole operated (circuit breaker), i.e. one drive for each pole.

SST Switchsync Setting Tool within PCM600

Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator

SVC Static VAr compensation

SW Software

TC Trip coil

TCS Trip circuit supervision

TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocolused on Ethernet and the Internet.

Section 16 1MRK 511 275-UEN CGlossary


TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de factostandard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP wasdeveloped by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both networklayer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocolsat specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire USDepartment of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet,FTP, UDP and RDP.

TICS Tissue implementation conformance statement, for IEC 61850

TPO Three-pole operated (circuit breaker), i.e. one drive for three poles

TPZ, TPY, TPX,TPS

Current transformer class according to IEC

TRM Transformer module

TRV Transient recovery voltage

Tx Transmit line

UAC User Account Control in Microsoft Windows operating systems

UHV Ultra high voltage

UMT User management tool

Unicode Universal standard for text encoding

URCB Unbuffered report control block

UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by theBureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basisof a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of awhole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1(UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotationalaxis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular rotation, onwhich UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplaneand ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the militaryname, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", whichstands for longitude zero.

VT Voltage transformer

WAN Wide area network

WHMI Web human-machine interface

XML Extensible markup language



394

395

ABB ABGrid Automation ProductsSE-721 59 Västerås, SwedenPhone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00

www.abb.com/protection-control

© Copyright 2017 ABB.All rights reserved.

Scan this QR code to visit our website

1MR

K 5

11 2

75-U

EN